all | frequencies |
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
User manual revised 1 of 2 | Users Manual | 1.62 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User manual revised 2 of 2 | Users Manual | 2.75 MiB | ||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | / August 01 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | / August 01 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | / August 01 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | / August 01 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / August 01 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | February 12 2008 / August 01 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | / August 01 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | / August 01 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | / August 01 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | / August 01 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | February 12 2008 / August 01 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | / August 01 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | / August 01 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / August 01 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / August 01 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos |
1 2 | User manual revised 1 of 2 | Users Manual | 1.62 MiB |
User Guide Palm Take Back and Recycling Program This symbol indicates that Palm products should be recycled and not be disposed of in unsorted municipal waste. Palm products should be sent to a facility that properly recycles electrical and electronic equipment. For information on environmental programs visit palm com/environment. As part of Palms corporate commitment to be a good steward of the environment, we strive to use environmentally friendly materials, reduce waste, and develop the highest standards in electronics recycling. Our recycling program keeps Palm handheld devices, smartphones, and mobile companions out of landfills through evaluation and disposition for reuse and recycling. Palm customers may participate in the recycling program free of charge. Visit palm.com/recycle for additional details and information about how you can help reduce electronic waste. v. 1.0 Intellectual property notices 2008 Palm, Inc. All rights reserved. Trademark, copyright, patent, and other intellectual property notices are set forth within the safety and legal information included in your smartphone package. This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary. All rights reserved. Disclaimer and limitation of liability Palm Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this guide. Palm Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties that may arise through the use of this software. Palm Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs. Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other media to protect against data loss. This product is protected by one or more of the following United States patents:
7,007,239; 6,976,226; 6,975,304; 6,965,375; 6,961,567;
6,961,029; 6,957,397; 6,952,571; 6,950,988; 6,947,975;
6,947,017; 6,943,667; 6,940,490; 6,924,752; 6,907,233;
6,906,701; 6,906,741; 6,901,276; 6,850,780; 6,845,408;
6,842,628; 6,842,335; 6,831,662; 6,819,552; 6,804,699;
6,795,710; 6,788,285; 6,781,824; 6,781,575; 6,766,490;
6,745,047; 6,744,451; 6,738,852; 6,732,105; 6,724,720;
6,721,892; 6,712,638; 6,708,280; 6,697,639; 6,687,839;
6,685,328; 6,665,803; 6,618,044; 6,590,588; 6,539,476;
6,532,148;6,523,124; 6,519,141; 6,516,202; 6,490,155;
6,480,146; 6,457,134; 6,456,247; 6,442,637; 6,441,824;
6,437,543; 6,429,625; 6,425,087; 6,389,572; 6,388,877;
6,381,650; 6,363,082; 6,344,848; 6,317,085; 6,241,537;
6,222,857; 6,185,423; 6,147,314; 6,115,248; 6,064,342; 7,356,361;
D421,251; D429,252; D466,128; D478,091. Patent pending. This product also is licensed under United States patent 6,058,304. Contents Chapter 1: Welcome. 9 Your Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm . 11 Whats in the box? . 11 What do I need to get started? . 12 Where can I learn more? . 13 Chapter 2: Setting up . 15 Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm overview. 17 Completing the setup . 19 Making your first call . 20 Charging the battery . 21 Using the My Treo application. 25 Setting up synchronization . 25 Chapter 3: Moving around on your smartphone. 27 Navigating around the screen . 29 Using the keyboard . 35 Opening and closing applications . 39 Using your Today screen. 42 Chapter 4: Your phone . 45 Turning your smartphone on/off . 47 Making calls. 49 Receiving calls. 53 Using voicemail . 54 What can I do during a call? . 55 Working with called numbers . 59 Assigning a speed dial to a phone number . 62 C O N T E N T S iii What are all those icons? . 63 Using a phone headset . 66 Customizing phone settings . 70 Chapter 5: Synchronizing information . 77 Synchronization overview . 79 How do I synchronize? . 79 What can I synchronize? . 80 Setting up your computer for synchronization . 83 Synchronizing using the USB cable. 88 Setting up wireless synchronization . 89 Other ways to synchronize . 94 Changing which applications sync . 96 Stopping synchronization . 97 Chapter 6: Your email. 99 Setting up email . 101 Sending and receiving messages . 110 Working with email messages . 115 Customizing your email settings . 121 Working with meeting invitations . 129 Sending email messages from within another application . 130 Chapter 7: Your text and multimedia messages . 131 Sending and receiving text and multimedia messages. 133 Setting message preferences . 145 Using Windows LiveTM . 146 Chapter 8: Your connections to the web and wireless devices . 153 Browsing the web. 155 Getting online travel information and tools . 163 iv C O N T E N T S Connecting to a Wi-Fi network . 164 Connecting to devices with Bluetooth wireless technology . 173 Using your device as a modem. 177 Chapter 9: Your photos, videos, and music . 179 Synchronizing your pictures, videos, and music . 181 Camera . 183 Pictures & Videos . 190 Windows Media Player Mobile . 195 Chapter 10: Your personal information organizer . 203 Contacts . 205 Calendar . 208 Tasks . 215 Notes. 218 Chapter 11: Your Microsoft Office and other document tools . 223 Synchronizing your Microsoft Office files . 225 Word Mobile . 227 PowerPoint Mobile . 234 Excel Mobile . 235 OneNote Mobile . 246 Adobe Reader LE. 249 Chapter 12: Your application and info management tools . 253 Finding information . 255 Installing applications . 257 Removing applications . 260 Sharing information . 261 Beaming information . 261 Using expansion cards . 264 C O N T E N T S v Accessing information on a remote computer . 268 Calculator . 270 Chapter 13: Your personal settings . 273 Today screen settings . 275 System sound settings . 276 Display and appearance settings. 278 Application settings. 281 Locking your smartphone and info . 286 System settings . 290 Connection settings . 297 Chapter 14: Troubleshooting . 301 Transferring info from another device. 303 Reinstalling the desktop software. 303 Resetting your smartphone. 304 Performance . 308 Screen . 309 Network connection . 310 Synchronization . 314 Email . 321 Web. 324 Camera . 325 Third-party applications . 326 Making room on your smartphone . 327 Voice quality . 328 Terms . 329 Regulatory and safety information . 333 vi C O N T E N T S Specifications . 345 Index . 349 C O N T E N T S vii viii C O N T E N T S Welcome Congratulations on the purchase of your Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm!
Benefits
Make and receive phone calls
Manage your contacts, calendar, and task list
Receive and send corporate and personal email messages
Browse the web
Use a Bluetooth headset (sold separately) for hands-free operation CHAPTER 1 9 In this chapter Your Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm . 11 Whats in the box? . 11 What do I need to get started? . 12 Where can I learn more? . 13 1 R E T P A H C W E L C O M E Your Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm In one compact and indispensable device, you now have all the following:
An advanced wireless smartphone
A full suite of Windows Mobile organizer applications: Contacts, Calendar, Notes, and Tasks
Portable expansion capability (microSD cards, sold separately)
High-speed data with EVDO/1X and CDMA support
Wi-Fi capability IrDA support
A 2-megapixel digital camera
GPS functionality
Support for numerous mobile email solutions
Text and multimedia messaging
Windows Media Player Mobile
Microsoft Office Mobile suite This guide helps you set up your smartphone and learn to use it. TIP LOOK HERE: Dont miss the helpful tips and cross-references given in these boxes. Whats in the box?
All the following items should be in the smartphone box:
Hardware
Treo Pro smartphone
Rechargeable battery (1500 mAh)
USB AC charger
USB cable
Stereo headset with microphone Documentation and software
Getting Started, information on how to set up and begin to use your smartphone
Palm warranty
Safety and legal information Y O U R T R E O P R O S M A R T P H O N E B Y P A L M 11 1 R E T P A H C W E L C O M E Your smartphone contains links to the following:
Desktop synchronization software
(ActiveSync desktop software for Windows XP computers, or a Windows Mobile Device Center update for Windows VistaTM computers)
User Guide (this guide) on the web
Microsoft Office Outlook 2007 software trial download Data service plan: For web browsing and email. Additional data services: These may be required for sending and receiving multimedia messages. Check with your wireless service provider for information. TIP When you sign up for data services with your wireless service provider, be sure to discuss what charges you incur if you go over the stated limit on your data plan. What do I need to get started?
As you work through the instructions in this guide, you need all the items that came in the smartphone box (see Whats in the box?). In addition, depending on how you want to use your smartphone, heres what you need to get from your wireless service provider:
Service contract: For making and receiving calls, and sending and receiving text messages. After you have the required plan and services, you must have your smartphone within range of your wireless service providers cellular coverage to use the phone, messaging, and web features. Data speeds vary based on network availability and capacity. Finally, if you plan to synchronize personal information between your smartphone and a computer, you need access to that computer during the setup process. 12 W H A T D O I N E E D T O G E T S T A R T E D ?
1 R E T P A H C W E L C O M E Where can I learn more?
For a quick introduction
Quick Tour: The Quick Tour introduces you to many of your smartphones features. It is already installed on your smartphone, and you can open it from your Today screen by selecting Quick Tour. TIP If you remove the Quick Tour entry from your Today screen (see Using your Today screen), you can always open the Quick Tour by pressing Start, selecting Programs, and then selecting Quick Tour. While using your smartphone
On-device Help: Your smartphone includes on-device Help that is specially formatted for your smartphone screen. To view the on-device help, press Start and select Help.
Online support from Palm: For up-to-date downloads, troubleshooting, and support information, go to palm.com/treopro. If you need more information
Books: Many books on Windows Mobile devices are available from local or online book retailers (look in the computer section).
Customer service from your wireless service provider: For questions about your mobile account or features, contact your wireless service providers customer care. W H E R E C A N I L E A R N M O R E ?
13 W E L C O M E 1 R E T P A H C 14 W H E R E C A N I L E A R N M O R E ?
Setting up Youre about to discover the many things about your smartphone that will help you better manage your life and have fun, too. As you become more familiar with your smartphone, youll want to personalize the settings and add applications to make it uniquely yours. But first, follow these few easy steps to set up your smartphone and get it running. Benefits Benefits
Know where your smartphone controls are located
Start using your smartphone right away CHAPTER 2 15 In this chapter Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm overview . 17 Completing the setup. 19 Making your first call . 20 Charging the battery. 21 Using the My Treo application . 25 Setting up synchronization . 25 Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm overview S E T T I N G U P 2 R E T P A H C Front view 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 Charge indicator light (visible when smartphone is being charged) 2 Volume 3 Side button 4 Left softkey 5 Start 6 Phone/Send 7 Calendar 8 Lanyard connector 9 MicroUSB connector
(sync and power connector) 10 3.5mm stereo headset jack 11 Earpiece 12 Touchscreen 13 5-way navigator with Center button 14 Right softkey 15 OK 16 End 17 Messaging 18 Microphone TIP Be careful not to scratch or crush your smartphone screen. Do not store it in a place where other items might damage it. DID YOU KNOW? By default, pressing and holding the Side button opens Camera (see Camera). You can change the function of the Side button (see Reassigning buttons). 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 T R E O P R O S M A R T P H O N E B Y P A L M O V E R V I E W 17 2 R E T P A H C S E T T I N G U P IMPORTANT The smartphone speaker includes a large magnet, so be sure not to store your smartphone near credit cards or other items that could be demagnetized. Back view 1 Speaker 2 Expansion card (microSD) slot
(under back panel) 3 Wi-Fi 4 IR (infrared) port 5 Reset button (under back panel) 6 Stylus 7 Camera lens 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DID YOU KNOW? To save power, when your smartphone screen turns off, the Wi-Fi feature turns off. Press Wi-Fi to turn this feature back on and quickly reconnect to a network. You can also set an option to leave the Wi-Fi feature on (see Customizing Wi-Fi settings). TIP To connect a lanyard (sold separately), remove the back panel, connect the lanyard, and replace the back panel. Removing the back panel 1 With the back panel facing you, push the lower-right corner of the back panel with your right thumb. Then use both thumbs and firmly slide the panel away from you to release it. NOTE The back panel might be difficult to remove the first few times. If you have trouble removing the back panel as 18 T R E O P R O S M A R T P H O N E B Y P A L M O V E R V I E W described, go to the Knowledge Library at kb.palm.com. Enter 30457 in the solution id field to learn different ways to remove the back panel. Top view 1 2 S E T T I N G U P 2 R E T P A H C 1 Power 2 Ringer switch (slide to turn off all sounds immediately) Completing the setup 1 Press Power to turn on your device. It takes a few minutes for your smartphone to prepare for setup; youll see the Palm logo and then the Windows Mobile screen. 2 When prompted, use the stylus (see Back view) to tap the screen. 3 Follow the onscreen instructions. If prompted, tap to reboot your device and complete the last step of the setup. C O M P L E T I N G T H E S E T U P 19 See Replacing the battery for information on how to insert and remove the battery. See Using expansion cards for information on how to insert an expansion card. 2 R E T P A H C S E T T I N G U P Activating your phone To check whether your phone is activated, look at the Today screen.
Your phone is activated if you see the name of your wireless service providers name in the upper-left corner.
Your phone is not activated if your wireless service providers name doesnt appear on the Today screen. Contact your wireless service provider for activation instructions. Making your first call 1 Press End to display your Today screen. 2 Press Center to turn off Keyguard
(see Locking your keyboard (Keyguard) for more info). 3 Use the number keys to enter the number you want to call. 4 Press Phone/Send 5 Press End to dial. to end the call. Adjusting call volume When youre on a call, press the Volume button on the side of your smartphone to adjust the call volume. 20 M A K I N G Y O U R F I R S T C A L L S E T T I N G U P 2 R E T P A H C
*
*
* Volume Whats my number?
1 Make sure your phone is on (see Turning your phone on). and select Settings. 2 Press Start 3 Select the System tab and then About. 4 Select the Phone tab and scroll down the screen to see your phone number.
* Look here for your phone number Charging the battery Although the battery may come with a sufficient charge to complete the setup process, we recommend that after the setup you charge your smartphone until the charging indicator light is solid green to give it a full charge. See Maximizing battery life for tips on making your batterys power last longer. 1 Plug the USB cable into the USB AC charger. 2 Plug the USB AC charger into a wall outlet. C H A R G I N G T H E B A T T E R Y 21 2 R E T P A H C S E T T I N G U P 3 Connect the USB cable to the bottom of your smartphone. Make sure the symbol on the cable end is facing up, toward your smartphone screen. TIP You can also charge your smartphone battery by connecting your smartphone to your computer, using the USB cable. Charging this way takes much more time than using the USB AC charger with a wall outlet. However, if your battery is fully drained, you must use the USB AC charger.
*
When your smartphone is on (see Turning your smartphone on/off), the onscreen battery icon on the Today screen displays the charging status:
Solid lightning bolt: The battery is being charged. Filled battery: The battery is fully charged and can be disconnected from the charging source. Partly filled battery: The shading indicates approximately how much power the battery has. Exclamation point: Charge the battery immediately.
* Indicator light 4 Check the indicator light to confirm that your smartphone is being charged. Solid red: Your smartphone is being charged. Solid green: Your smartphone is fully charged. 22 C H A R G I N G T H E B A T T E R Y DID YOU KNOW? If the battery is low, the indicator light flashes red. TIP Tap the battery icon to see how much power the battery has.
*
* Battery icon TIP To go to the Today screen so you can view the battery icon, press End if you are not on a phone call. If youre on a call, press Start and select Today. 2 R E T P A H C S E T T I N G U P Maximizing battery life Battery life depends on how you use your smartphone. You can maximize the life of your battery by following a few easy guidelines:
Charge your smartphone whenever youre at your desk, or charge it overnight each day. The battery in your device has a much longer useful life when it is topped off frequently versus when it is charged after it is fully drained. If you spend a lot of time using the camera, games, media players, or other applications, keep an eye on the battery icon and charge the battery when necessary.
The wireless features of your smartphone (phone, email, messaging, GPS, Web, and any other applications that use a Wi-Fi connection) generally consume more power than the nonwireless features (Calendar, Tasks, Notes). If you dont use the wireless features on your device for a while, turn off your wireless services (see Turning wireless services on/off). To quickly turn wireless services (phone, Bluetooth C H A R G I N G T H E B A T T E R Y 23 2 R E T P A H C S E T T I N G U P
wireless technology, and Wi-Fi) on and off, tap the signal-strength icon, and then select Comm Manager. If you set up an email account in the Messaging application, set the interval to automatically download email to every two hours or less frequently (see Setting up email).
Turn off the Wi-Fi feature (see Turning wireless services on/off), leave the default option to connect only when the Wi-Fi button is pressed, or adjust Power Save Mode to maximize the battery
(see Customizing Wi-Fi settings).
Turn off the Bluetooth feature if youre not using it (see Entering basic Bluetooth settings).
Turn off the option to receive beamed information if youre not using it (see Turning on the option to receive beamed information).
Set your screen to turn off automatically after a shorter period of inactivity (see Optimizing power settings).
As with any wireless phone, if you are in an area with no wireless coverage, your smartphone nevertheless continues to search for a signal, which consumes power. Turn off your phone if you are outside a coverage area (see Turning your phone off).
Turn off the voice command feature if youre not using it (see Setting up voice commands).
Turn down the screen brightness (see
Adjusting the brightness). If you synchronize with your corporate Exchange server using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, increase the time interval between automatic synchronizations (see Setting the synchronization schedule).
Keep your battery away from direct sunlight and other sources of heat. Temperatures over 50 degrees Celsius
(120 degrees Fahrenheit) can permanently reduce the capacity and life span of any lithium-ion battery. 24 C H A R G I N G T H E B A T T E R Y Using the My Treo application Setting up synchronization S E T T I N G U P 2 R E T P A H C Use the My Treo application to register your smartphone and access the User Guide and online support. My Treo also provides an alternate starting point for setting up an email account, a Bluetooth connection, or a Wi-Fi connection, and for launching the Quick Tour.
Press Start and select My Treo. After youve finished setting up your smartphone, we recommend that you set up a synchronization method to get the most out of your smartphone. Synchronizing means that information that you enter or update in one placeyour smartphone, your computer, or your corporate serveris automatically updated in the other (see Synchronizing information). U S I N G T H E M Y T R E O A P P L I C A T I O N 25 S E T T I N G U P 2 R E T P A H C 26 S E T T I N G U P S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N Moving around on your smartphone Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you figured out the streets? Learning to move around on your Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm is a similar experience. Most applications that work on your smartphone use the same set of controls. So once you learn how to use these controls, youll be driving all over town and you wont even need a map. Benefits
Quickly move around and complete tasks in applications using one thumb on the 5-way navigator
Access extra features with menus
Find and open applications quickly CHAPTER 3 27 In this chapter Navigating around the screen . 29 Using the keyboard . 35 Opening and closing applications. 39 Using your Today screen . 42 Navigating around the screen To navigate around the smartphone screen, you can use the 5-way navigator or you can tap items on the screen with the stylus. As you become familiar with your smartphone, youll find your own favorite way to scroll, highlight, and select items.
, or Down Using the 5-way, press Right Up screen. Press Center select items.
, to move around the to highlight and
, Left TIP Some third-party applications may not work with the 5-way navigator, and you must use the stylus instead. DID YOU KNOW? Custom navigation features are available when you browse the web using Internet Explorer Mobile (see Viewing a web page). TIP The arrow icons used in this guide to indicate directions on the 5-way are different from the onscreen scroll arrows and the arrows that indicate that a list is available (see Selecting options in a list). 3 R E T P A H C M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E 5 4 1 Up 2 Right 3 Down 4 Left 5 Center 1 3 2
(flashes when you have voicemail) Scrolling through screens As on a computer, on your smartphone you scroll to move from field to field or page to page, or in some cases to highlight an item or option in a list. There are several methods of scrolling:
Press the 5-way on the front of your
, to move to the smartphone. Press Right Up next field, button, or action in that direction.
, or Down
, Left N A V I G A T I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N 29 3 R E T P A H C M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E
Press and hold Option while or Down pressing Up to scroll one screen at a time. These keys work just like the Page Up and Page Down keys on your computer keyboard. TIP Cant find the Option key? See Using the keyboard.
Press and hold Option while or Right pressing Left the top or bottom of the current document or entry. to jump to TIP When you are using applications such as Messaging, Internet Explorer Mobile, and Word Mobile, press and hold Option while pressing Left or Right on the 5-way to automatically go to the top and bottom of a screen.
When viewing a screen with tabs, such as when adding a contact, press Down press Left between tabs. or Right to move to scroll to the tabs, and then 30 N A V I G A T I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N
When inside a text field, press Right to move to the next character, to move or Down or Left and press Up between lines.
When inside a list, press and hold or Down Up through the list. to rapidly scroll
Tap an onscreen scroll arrow. 1 2 3 1 Scroll arrows 2 Scroll bar with slider 3 Scroll arrows
Tap and drag the slider of an onscreen scroll bar. Closing screens To accept the information you entered on a screen and to return to the previous screenor to return to the previous screen without making any changesdo one of the following:
Press OK
Use the stylus to tap
. or in the upper-right corner of the screen. These buttons are not accessible using the 5-way. When you close a screen, the application continues running in the background. TIP To close an appas opposed to just a screenpress and hold OK or tap and hold OK on the screen (see Opening and closing applications). TIP Cant find the stylus? It slides out from the lower-left corner on the back of your smartphone. 3 R E T P A H C M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E Highlighting and selecting items On most screens, one itema button, a list entry, or a check boxis highlighted by default. The highlight identifies which item is affected by your next action. Use the 5-way to move the highlight from one item to another before opening or selecting it. TIP The best way to learn to use the 5-way is to experiment. Press the 5-way buttons, and as you do, follow the movement of the highlight around the screen. The behavior of the 5-way varies slightly in each application. The highlight can take one of two forms, depending on what is highlighted:
Border: This rectangular border highlights items such as an onscreen button (such as OK, Dismiss, or Hide), a check box, an option, or a web link. N A V I G A T I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N 31 3 R E T P A H C M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E Light text on a dark background: This highlights items such as a phone number, an email address, text, or an item in a list. and from screen to screen. You activate the task by tapping the softkey with the stylus or pressing it with your finger. After highlighting an item with the 5-way, you can select or activate it by pressing Center stylus. or by tapping the item with the The softkey is simply the name of the task on the screen. Softkeys appear in the lower-left and lower-right corners of the screen. In most cases the right softkey opens a menu, and the left softkey performs a specific action, such as New or Edit. In some contexts, these keys may do nothing at all. Highlighting text You can use the stylus to highlight text on the screen. Tap and drag the stylus across the text you want to highlight. To highlight a word, double-tap it. To highlight a paragraph, triple-tap it. 1 2 TIP When text is highlighted, you can press Backspace to delete the highlighted text. Using the softkeys The left and right softkeys give you quick access to tasks that you can do on the current screen. The task that a softkey does varies from application to application 32 N A V I G A T I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N 1 Left softkey: Press anywhere in this area to perform the task shown. 2 Right softkey: Works the same way. Selecting menu items In many applications, a menu provides access to additional features. The menu is hidden until you press Menu (right softkey). To get the most out of your smartphone, its a good idea to familiarize yourself with the additional features available through the menus in various applications. 1 Press Menu (right softkey) to display an applications menu. 2 Press Up or Down to highlight a menu item. 3 R E T P A H C M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E 3 If an arrow appears to the right of a or to display a submenu of menu item, press Center Right additional options for that item, and then press Up highlight a submenu item. To return to the main menu without making a selection, press Left or Down to
. 4 Press Center to select the menu or Menu (right item, or press Left softkey) to close the menu and cancel your selection. DID YOU KNOW? You can select most menu items by pressing a key on the keyboard. To quickly access a menu item, press Menu
(right softkey) followed by the underlined letter in the menu items name. Selecting options in a shortcut menu Most applications also provide access to context-sensitive shortcut menussimilar to the right-click menus on a Windows computer. The shortcut menu options vary based on the highlighted selection. 1 Highlight the item whose shortcut menu you want to see. N A V I G A T I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N 33 3 R E T P A H C M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E 2 Press and hold Center to open the shortcut menu. with a downward-pointing arrow, a list is available. Lists are different from the menus described earlier in this section. TIP You can also tap and hold the stylus on an item to open the shortcut menu. 3 Press Up or Down to highlight a menu item. 4 Press Center item, or press Left selection. to select the menu to cancel your Selecting options in a list Lists enable you to select from a range of options. You can identify whether a list is available when you select a field. If a rectangle appears around the field along 34 N A V I G A T I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E To select from a list, do any of the following:
Use the 5-way to highlight the field, and Using the keyboard 3 R E T P A H C to display the then press Center items in the list. Press Up Down want, and then press Center make your selection. to highlight the item you to or
Use your stylus to tap the arrow, and then tap the item in the list. DID YOU KNOW? If you highlight a field and don't see the downward-pointing arrow, press Center on the 5-way. If you see a field with a downward-pointing arrow but no rectangle, tap the arrow with the stylus to display the list. Press Left selection. to exit the list and cancel your 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 Start 2 Phone/Send 3 Calendar 4 Option 5 Shift/Search 6 Space 7 OK 8 End 9 Messaging 10 Backspace 11 Return 12 Shift 13 Alt U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D 35 3 R E T P A H C M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E Understanding the keyboard backlight Your smartphone includes a keyboard backlight for low light conditions. The keyboard backlight activates automatically when the screen turns on. The backlight dims when the screen dims, and it turns off automatically when the screen turns off or when you are on a call or are playing music in the background for longer than the time specified in Backlight Settings. You can set different time intervals depending on whether the smartphone is operating on battery power or is connected to an external power source. The backlight also turns off when an applications power-saving features turn it off. TIP You can change the backlight shut-off interval. Press Start and select Settings. Select the System tab, and then select Backlight. Set the time interval on the Battery power tab and on the External power tab. 36 U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D Entering lowercase and uppercase letters By default, the first letter of each sentence or field is capitalized and the remaining text you enter is lowercase. To enter other uppercase letters, do one of the following:
Press Shift (
or
) and then enter a letter. You dont need to press and hold Shift while entering a letter.
Press Shift (
or
) twice to turn on Caps Lock, and then enter a series of letters. When Caps Lock is on, this symbol appears at the bottom of the screen:
Shift (
. To turn off Caps Lock, press or
) again. TIP You can turn off the first-letter capitalization setting (see Setting input options). DID YOU KNOW? You can also use the onscreen keyboard to enter letters, numbers, and other characters in applications that support this feature. Tap the keyboard icon in the center at the bottom of any screen where it appears. After opening the keyboard, you can set various input options by tapping the arrow to the right of the keyboard icon. Entering numbers, punctuation, and symbols Numbers, punctuation, and symbols appear above the letters on the keys. To enter these characters, do one of the following:
1 2 1 Symbol 2 Letter
Press Option and then press the key of the desired character. You dont need to hold Option while pressing the key.
Press Option twice to turn on Option Lock, and then press the desired keys to enter a series of characters. When Option Lock is on, this symbol appears at the bottom of the screen:
press Option
. To turn off Option Lock, again. 3 R E T P A H C M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E Entering passwords You cant see your password as you enter it, so be careful. Be sure that Caps Lock and Option Lock are not on unless you need them. For information on how to enter characters, see Entering lowercase and uppercase letters and Entering numbers, punctuation, and symbols. Entering other symbols and accented characters You can enter symbols and accented characters that dont appear on the keys by using the alternate characters list. TIP The alternate characters are grouped according to their similarity to the corresponding key. For example, the alternate character available for the R key is , and for the T key is . If you press the wrong key, press Backspace to return to the full list of alternate characters. You can then press another key. U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D 37 3 R E T P A H C M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E 1 Press Alt to display the alternate character list. 2 Narrow the list by pressing the key that corresponds to the character you want. For example, to enter an , press e. See the Symbols and accented characters table for a list of corresponding characters. 3 Press Up to highlight or Down the desired character. 4 Press Center to insert the character. TIP Some symbols, such as an underscore (_), do not correspond to a letter key. To enter these symbols, press Alt by itself and then select the symbol from the list. Symbols and accented characters Press Alt and press a A b or B c C To select 38 U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D Press Alt and press e E f or F i I l or L n N o O p or P r or R s S t or T u U x or X y To select
%
x 3 R E T P A H C M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E Opening and closing applications Opening applications on the Start menu 1 Press Start to open the Start menu. 2 Use the 5-way navigator to highlight the application you want to use. To open a recently used application, highlight its icon at the top of the Start menu. Press Alt and press Y 0 1 (
2 (
3 (
! (
$ (
; (
? (
+ E)
+ R)
+ T)
+ J)
+ H)
+ K)
+ N) To select 1 2 2 3 3
: :-) :-( ;-) by itself to select these Press Alt characters:
: & _ % = ^ $
~ \ |
[ ] { } < >
3 Press Center to open the highlighted application. O P E N I N G A N D C L O S I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S 39 3 R E T P A H C M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E TIP With the Start menu open, press the letter underlined in the applications name to open the app. For example, press H to open Help. DID YOU KNOW? You can open apps by pressing and holding Option and then pressing Phone/
Send, Start, OK, Calendar, or Messaging. You can change which app a button combination opens (see Reassigning buttons). Opening applications in Programs 1 Press Start and select Programs. 3 Press Center to open the highlighted application. 4 (Optional) Press OK to return to Programs and open another application. The current application continues to run in the background. Switching among open applications 1 Go to your Today screen. 2 Tap the running programs icon in the upper-right corner to open the Quick Menu. 3 Select the program you want to use. 2 Use the 5-way navigator to highlight the application you want to use. TIP In Programs, press a letter to jump to the first app that begins with that letter. For example, press C to jump to Calculator, press C again to jump to Camera, and so on. TIP You can also use the Quick Menu to close applications, open Task Manager, and check system memory. 40 O P E N I N G A N D C L O S I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S Closing applications Press OK application from the screen. to remove the current Applications that you open stay open in the background even after you press OK to remove them. If you want to stop them, you must do it manually. Thats usually not necessary; but if youre concerned about power usage, stop some or all applications. 1 Press and hold OK to open Task Manager. 2 Do one of the following:
To close one or more individual applications: Check the boxes next to the applications and select Stop Selected. 3 R E T P A H C M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E To close all applications except the ones you specify: Check the boxes next to the applications you do not want to close, press Menu (right softkey), and select Stop All but Selected. To close all open applications: Select Stop All. TIP If an X appears in the upper-right corner of an application screen, you can tap and hold the X with the stylus to close the application. You can turn this feature on and off or change it so that simply tapping X closes an application. Press and hold OK to open Task Manager, select the Button tab, and then select the option you want. Defining exclusive programs You can mark an application as exclusive. An exclusive application remains open even if you stop individual or all applications. 1 Press and hold OK to open Task Manager. 2 On the Running tab, tap and hold the app name with the stylus. 3 Select Add Exclusive. O P E N I N G A N D C L O S I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S 41 3 R E T P A H C M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E TIP To remove an application from the Exclusive Programs list, press and hold OK to open Task Manager. Select the Exclusive tab, check the box next to the application name, and select Remove. Customizing the Quick Menu The Quick Menu displays a list of currently running applications on your smartphone. You can use the Quick Menu to quickly switch between or close applications from the Today screen. 1 Press and hold OK to open Task Manager. 2 To remove the Quick Menu from your Today screen, select the Button tab and uncheck the Enable Quick Menu on Today screen box. 3 Select the Others tab and select the sort method for programs in the Quick Menu. Using your Today screen The Today screen lets you see your current appointments and messages at a glance. You can also make a call, search the web, and manage your smartphone from your Today screen. To access your Today screen, press End
. 42 U S I N G Y O U R T O D A Y S C R E E N 3 R E T P A H C M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E TIP Dont press End to access the Today screen if youre on a call, because that hangs up the call. Instead, press Start and select Today. TIP You can remove the Quick Tour entry from your Today screen. Open the Quick Tour and select Remove Quick Tour. 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 Title bar and status info: See What are all those icons?
2 Wireless service indicator: Shows whether the Bluetooth wireless technology and Wi-Fi features are on or off. Also displays your wireless service provider name if the phone is on. 3 Quick Tour: Select to open the Quick Tour, which introduces you to many of your smartphones features. 4 Messaging status field: Shows the number of unread email, text, and multimedia messages. Email messages are listed by email account. Select an account or select SMS\MMS to open the corresponding Inbox. 5 Calendar status field: Shows upcoming appointments. Select this field to open the Calendar application. 6 Live search field: Enter the web address or keyword you want to find, and press Center or Return to view a list of search results (data services connection required). 7 Running programs icon: Tap to open the Quick Menu, which shows all open applications so you can quickly switch between or close them. TIP You can select a picture for your Today screen background and select which items appear in the Today screen. See Today screen settings for details. U S I N G Y O U R T O D A Y S C R E E N 43 M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E 3 R E T P A H C 44 U S I N G Y O U R T O D A Y S C R E E N Your phone The Today screen and the Phone screen are the key locations for making and receiving calls. You can creatively manage multiple calls. For example, you can swap between calls, send text messages to ignored calls, and create conference calls. Benefits
Stay in touch; you choose how
Work in other applications when on an active call CHAPTER 4 45 In this chapter Turning your smartphone on/off . 47 Making calls . 49 Receiving calls . 53 Using voicemail . 54 What can I do during a call? . 55 Working with called numbers . 59 Assigning a speed dial to a phone number . 62 What are all those icons?. 63 Using a phone headset . 66 Customizing phone settings. 70 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E Turning your smartphone on/off The term smartphone refers to the device and its physical aspects. The term phone refers to the wireless feature of your Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm that enables you to connect to your wireless service providers network so that you can make and receive calls and send and receive data. The phone and the screen of your smartphone can be turned off and on separately. This means you can wake up the screen to use just the organizer features of your device (Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Notes, and so on) without turning on the phone. Also, when the screen is turned off, the phone can be on and ready for you to receive phone calls or messages. Turning your phone on When you turn on your phone, it connects to a mobile network so that you can make and receive phone calls and use other wireless services (if supported by the local network). BEFORE YOU BEGIN To use the phone, you must have an active subscription with your wireless service provider. To turn on your phone, press and hold Power
. When your smartphone locates a signal, your wireless service providers name appears in the upper-left of the screen and the signal-strength the top of the screen. icon appears at When you are inside a coverage area, the signal-strength icon has bars in it. If youre outside a coverage area, no bars appear in the signal-strength icon. Turning your phone off Press and hold Power
. When your phone is off, the phone-off icon appears at the top of the screen and Phone off appears in the upper-left of the screen. Your phone is not connected to any mobile network. Although you can no longer use the phone, you can still use T U R N I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E O N / O F F 47 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E Microsoft Office Mobile apps and all the organizer features of your smartphone. TIP When you turn off your phone using the Power button, this turns off all radios on your smartphone, which include the phone, the Bluetooth wireless technology feature, and the Wi-Fi feature. This is sometimes referred to as airplane mode or flight mode. To turn off the phone or other wireless radios individually, use Comm Manager. Select your wireless service provider name on your Today screen, or tap the signal-strength icon on any screen and select Comm Manager. Waking up the screen and turning it off Wake up the screen and leave the phone turned off when you want to use only the organizer features of your smartphone, for example, when youre on a plane and want to look at your calendar. You can also turn off the screen without turning off the wireless features on your smartphone. The screen turns off automatically after a preset period of inactivity. You can turn your screen off manually by pressing and holding End or by pressing 48 T U R N I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E O N / O F F
. If the Today screen is Power displayed and you are not on a call, you can also turn the screen off manually by pressing End
. DID YOU KNOW? You cannot turn the screen off if you are on a call. To turn the screen back on, press Power on the front of your smartphone:
Phone/Send
, Start or any of the following buttons
, Calendar
, Messaging
, or End
. When the screen is off but the phone is on, a screen saver appears, showing the date and time as well as the following indicators:
NOTE Not all wireless service providers support the screen saver feature. One or more missed calls One or more unread text or multimedia messages TIP You can set how long the screen stays on during a period of inactivity. You can also turn off the screen saver feature (see Optimizing power settings). Making calls Dialing from the Today screen 1 Press End to open your Today screen. 2 Using the keyboard, enter a phone number. NOTE You do not need to press Option to enter numbers, *, or #. This makes it easy to respond to further dialing instructions. When dialing short numbers, however, the numbers may match the letters of a contact name. If this occurs, press Option lookup. to avoid starting a contact Y O U R P H O N E 4 R E T P A H C TIP If the numbers you are entering match a phone number you have for a contact, the contact name is displayed. Select the name to dial the associated number (see Dialing by contact name for more information). 3 Press Phone/Send to dial. TIP To move around the screen during a call, use the 5-way. Dialing with a speed dial BEFORE YOU BEGIN Create some speed dials (see Assigning a speed dial to a phone number). M A K I N G C A L L S 49 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E 1 Press End to open your Today screen. 2 Press and hold the key or keys that you assigned as a speed dial to the contact number you want to call. If you have assigned a two-digit speed dial to this number, press the first key and then press and hold the second key. Dialing by contact name You can look up contacts quickly by entering just a few letters of a contacts name directly from your Today screen. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Create some contacts (see Adding a contact,) or import them by synchronizing (see Synchronizing information). 1 Press End to open your Today screen. 2 Using the keyboard, begin entering any combination of letters from the contacts first and/or last name. If you use both first- and last-name letters, separate them by a space. You can type letters from the last name first. 50 M A K I N G C A L L S To delete letters when correcting a misspelled name, press Backspace
. TIP If you press E, R, or any other key that displays both a letter and a number, you see onscreen not only matching names but the number as well. The numbers do not affect the process for dialing by contact name. 3 Select the name of a matching contact. NOTE Matching contacts are displayed with a code for the type of number you last entered for that contact: w for work, m for mobile, and so on.
If the contact name appears with the code for the number you want to dial, highlight the name and press Phone/
Send to dial the number. Y O U R P H O N E 4 R E T P A H C
If you want to dial a different number for a displayed contact, highlight the contact name and press Left Right appears. Press Phone/Send to dial the number associated with the code. until the code you want or 4 Press Phone/Send to dial. Dialing using the onscreen keypad The onscreen keypad is useful when you need to dial numbers that are expressed as letters and when you need large numbers that you can tap with your finger or the stylus. 1 Press Phone/Send Keypad (left softkey). and then press 2 Tap the onscreen keypad to enter the number. 3 Press Phone/Send to dial. DID YOU KNOW? You can paste numbers directly into the keypad. Copy a number from another application, switch to the keypad, press Menu (right softkey), and then select Paste to paste the number. Redialing a recently called number To dial the last number you called: Press Phone/Send twice. M A K I N G C A L L S 51 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E To select from your most recently dialed numbers: Press Phone/Send highlight the number or contact name you want to call, and then press Phone/
Send to dial.
, TIP You can manage information about a recently called number in several ways (see Working with called numbers). Dialing your national emergency number You can dial your national emergency number (such as 911, 112, or 999) anytime. Just wake up the screen and enter the emergency number. If the phone is turned off, you don't have to turn it on. You don't have to press Option
. 52 M A K I N G C A L L S If you lock your smartphone and select Simple PIN as the password type, dial the emergency number by entering the number in the password field and pressing Phone/Send
. If you select Strong alphanumeric as the password type, however, you must press Option number in the password field. See Locking your smartphone. twice before entering the Dialing from a web page or message Your smartphone recognizes most phone numbers that appear in web pages or in messages (text, email, or multimedia). 1 Use the 5-way to highlight the phone number you want to dial in the web page or message. 2 Verify or edit the number. 3 Press Phone/Send to dial. 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E TIP If you cant dial a phone number directly from a web page or a message, highlight the number, select Edit (right softkey), and then select Copy. Open the Keypad, press Menu
(right softkey), and select Paste. Press Phone/Send to dial. TIP Select a phone number in a message, press Menu (right softkey), and then press Save to Contacts to create a new contact containing the highlighted information or to edit an existing contact to include the highlighted information. Receiving calls If you want to answer calls, your phone must be on. This is different from having only the screen turned on (see Turning your phone on). When your phone is off, your calls go to voicemail. TIP See a picture of the person calling you!
Learn how to assign a caller ID picture in Adding a contact. If music is playing when a call arrives, the smartphone rings softly. You can answer the phone as you normally would. The audio pauses during your call. To answer a call, do one of the following
Press Accept (left softkey).
Press Phone/Send
.
If the headset is attached, press the headset button. To ignore a call and send it to voicemail, do one of the following:
Press Ignore (right softkey).
Press End
. DID YOU KNOW? You can set your phone to automatically answer calls (see Setting your phone to automatically answer calls). To silence the ringer while your smartphone is ringing, do one of the following:
To immediately silence all system sounds including the ringer, slide the Ringer switch to Sound Off
. All sounds remain off until you slide the
. Ringer switch back to Sound On R E C E I V I N G C A L L S 53 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E
Press the Volume button.
Press any letter key.
Press Center
, Left
. (Dont press Up
, or Right on the Down 5-way.) Listening to voicemail from the Today screen
, NOTE Dont press Phone/Send
.
, or Alt
, End
, OK
, Start When you silence the ringer, you can either answer the call or let it ring through to voicemail. Using voicemail Setting up voicemail 1 Press End 2 Press and hold 1
. on the keyboard to dial your wireless service providers voicemail system. 3 Follow the voice prompts to set up your voicemail. 54 U S I N G V O I C E M A I L When you have unretrieved voicemail messages, a voicemail at the top of your screen and Center the 5-way flashes. icon appears on
. 1 Press End 2 Press and hold 1 3 If necessary, enter your voicemail
. password. 4 Follow the voice prompts to listen to your messages. 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E DID YOU KNOW? When the voicemail icon appears at the top of the screen, you can tap this icon to retrieve your voicemail. TIP You can turn off the Center button voicemail notification. Press Start and select Settings. On the Personal tab, select Phone. Select the Beacon tab and uncheck the option to illuminate Center when voicemail arrives. Retrieving messages from a voicemail notification NOTE Not all service plans support voicemail notification. Check with your wireless service provider for more information. When you have a new voicemail message, a notification screen appears.
To hear your message now, press Voicemail (left softkey).
To retrieve your message later, press Dismiss (right softkey). What can I do during a call?
Your smartphone offers many advanced telephone features, including call waiting, three-way conferencing, and call forwarding. These features depend on your service plan. Contact your wireless service provider for more information. When you make or receive a call, info about the call appears on your Phone screen. If you move away from the Phone screen, press OK there. until you return TIP From the Today screen, you can also return to the Phone screen by pressing Call Status
(left softkey). W H A T C A N I D O D U R I N G A C A L L ?
55 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E Your phone screen is locked by default during a call, but you can still do any of the following by unlocking the screen or navigating with the 5-way:
1 2 1 Callers name and/or number 2 Current duration of call Use the speakerphone: Select Speaker On. To turn off the speakerphone, select Speaker Off. Mute the microphone so you cant be heard: Select Mute. To unmute the microphone, select Unmute. Jot down a note about your call: Select Note. To return to the Phone screen after you have finished writing the note, press OK
. 56 W H A T C A N I D O D U R I N G A C A L L ?
TIP When a call lasts longer than 30 seconds, the screen dims. After two minutes, it dims more. Press any key except End to light up the screen. DID YOU KNOW? You can send and receive text messages during a call. This is a great way to stay connected with colleagues during a long call. Ending a call Do one of the following:
Press End
Press the headset button (if the headset
. is attached and has a button on it). Some headsets do not have a button. Switching applications during a call Press Start This is easiest when using the speakerphone or a headset. and select the application. You can open the Contacts application directly from the Phone screen by selecting Contacts. From any application, press Phone/
Send To go to your Today screen, press Start and select Today. to return to your Phone screen. You can use many other applications on your smartphone, including the organizer and text message features, while holding a phone conversation. You cannot, however, make some data connections during an active call while connected to an EVDO network. If youre connected to an EVDO network, you cannot browse the web or send and receive email or MMS messages while on a voice call. If youre connected to a CDMA (1X) network, you can perform simultaneous voice and data functions. How can you tell which kind of network youre connected to? See What are all those icons?
NOTE Some wireless service providers do not support simultaneous voice and data functions over a 1X network. Check with your wireless service provider for information. Saving phone numbers After you hang up a call, you can add the number of the person you were talking with to Contacts if its not already in your list. If an incoming call uses caller ID blocking, you cannot save the number. Y O U R P H O N E 4 R E T P A H C 1 On the prompt that appears after you hang up the call, press Yes (left softkey). 2 Do one of the following:
Create a new contact: Select <New Contact>. Add this number to an existing contact: Select the contact name. Decline adding the number: Press Cancel (right softkey). TIP You can turn off the Save to Contacts prompt. When the prompt appears, select Do not ask again. If you dont add a number right away, follow these steps to add it later:
1 Press Phone/Send 2 Highlight the number you want to save. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select
. Save to Contacts. W H A T C A N I D O D U R I N G A C A L L ?
57 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E 4 Do one of the following:
Create a new contact: Select <New Contact>. Add this number to an existing contact: Select the contact name. Decline adding the number: Press Cancel (right softkey). Making a second call You can make a second call while your first call is still active:
1 Place your first call on hold by pressing Phone/Send
. 2 Dial the second number you want to call. Or, if the number appears on the recent calls list, highlight the number. 3 Press Phone/Send
. Answering a second call (call waiting) When youre on a call and you receive a second call, the call-waiting notification appears. You can do either of the following:
Send the new call to voicemail: Press Ignore (right softkey). Place the current call on hold and answer the new call: Press Accept (left softkey) or press Phone/Send
. When you have finished your second call, wait for the caller to hang up. If you press End
, you will end both calls. Making a conference call IMPORTANT Not all service plans support the conference call feature. Check with your wireless service provider to confirm that your service plan includes conference calling. Additional charges may apply, and minutes in your mobile account may be deducted for each call. Please contact your wireless service provider for more information. 1 Put the first call on hold and make a second call (see Making a second call). 58 W H A T C A N I D O D U R I N G A C A L L ?
4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E Working with called numbers You can redial a number youve recently called (see Redialing a recently called number). You can also view call details, send a text message to a number, save a number to your contact list, and more. When the second call connects, all three calls are joined into a conference call. Working with recently called numbers 1 Press Phone/Send
. 2 When you have finished, press End once to hang up all calls. TIP On the recent calls list, outgoing calls are designated by a right-pointing green arrow, and incoming calls are designated by a left-pointing yellow arrow. Missed calls are designated by a red exclamation point. TIP To filter the displayed information, press Menu (right softkey), select View, and then select whether you want to view all calls and contacts, all calls only, or speed dials only. 2 Highlight the number you want, and do one or more of the following:
Save the phone number to a contact:
See Saving phone numbers. W O R K I N G W I T H C A L L E D N U M B E R S 59 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E Send a text message to the number:
Press Menu (right softkey) and select Send Text Message. Enter the message text and press Send (left softkey). Create a note containing the phone number: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Save to Notes. View more details about the number:
Select the number to open the call. The first entry shows the duration of your last call with this number. Use the other entries to call the number or to send a text message. 3 Highlight a call and press Center
, then do either of the following:
View all calls with this number, including their duration: Press Menu
(right softkey) and select View All Calls. If you select this option, you can delete all calls from this number by pressing Menu (right softkey) and selecting Delete All Calls. Delete the call from the recent calls list: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Delete Call. Select Yes to confirm the deletion. Viewing all your calls Your Call History list contains the number for all incoming and outgoing calls. 1 Press Phone/Send 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select
. Call History. 60 W O R K I N G W I T H C A L L E D N U M B E R S 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E 4 Highlight the number you want, and do one or more of the following:
Save the phone number to a contact:
See Saving phone numbers. View a note associated with the phone number: Press Menu (right softkey) and select View Note. Delete the call from the list: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Delete. Select Yes to confirm the deletion. Send a text message to the number:
Press Menu (right softkey) and select Send Text Message. Enter the message text and press Send (left softkey). Delete the entire Call History List:
Press Menu (right softkey) and select Delete All Calls. Select Yes to confirm the deletion. View timers for a recent call: Highlight the call and press Center
. W O R K I N G W I T H C A L L E D N U M B E R S 61 TIP You can also open the Call History list when you are on a call or when the Keypad is displayed. 3 To filter the Call History list, select one of the following buttons:
Display outgoing calls. Display incoming calls. Display missed calls. Display all calls. 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E Assigning a speed dial to a phone number You can assign a speed dial to any contact phone number. You can assign up to 99 speed dials. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Before you can assign a speed dial to a contact phone number, you must create some contacts
(see Adding a contact) or import them by synchronizing (see Synchronizing information). 1 From your Today screen, press Contacts (left softkey). 2 Highlight the contact to whom you want to assign a speed dial, and press Center
. 3 Highlight the phone number to which you want to assign a speed dial. 62 A S S I G N I N G A S P E E D D I A L T O A P H O N E N U M B E R 4 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Add to Speed Dial. 5 If you want to change the name for this speed dial, select the Name list and enter a new name. 6 Select the Location list, and then select the speed dial you want to assign to this phone number. Press Up Down speed dials. to scroll the list of available or 7 Press OK
. DID YOU KNOW? You cannot assign 0 (zero) or 1 as a speed dial. The number 0 is reserved for entering the + symbol in a phone number, and the number 1 is reserved for dialing your voicemail system. TIP You can also assign a speed dial to a contact from the recent calls list. Press Phone/Send to open the list, press Menu
(right softkey), and select Speed Dial. Press Menu (right softkey), select New, and then select the contact to whom you want to assign a speed dial. To view a list of all your speed dials, press Phone/Send softkey), and select Speed Dial.
, press Menu (right What are all those icons?
You can monitor the status of several items by looking at the icons at the top of your Today screen or your Phone screen:
You missed an incoming call. You have a voicemail message. A new multimedia message is being downloaded to your smartphone. 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E A multimedia message could not be downloaded. You have a new multimedia message. You have a new text message. NOTE You can turn on a setting to have a notification icon appear when you have a new email message (see Selecting Sounds & Notifications). You have more than one of the conditions listed previously. Tap the icon to view the notifications. Your phone is on. The bars display the signal strength. The stronger the signal, the more bars that appear. If you are outside a coverage area, no bars appear. Your phone is off. A voice call is in progress. The speakerphone is on. A call is on hold. W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?
63 Y O U R P H O N E 4 R E T P A H C The microphone is muted. The screen is locked. You are in a roaming coverage area. Additional fees may apply for calls or data transmission. Your smartphones Wi-Fi feature is turned on, but you are not connected to a Wi-Fi network. Your smartphone is connected to a Wi-Fi network, but you are not actively transmitting data. Your smartphone is connected to a Wi-Fi network and you are actively transmitting data. ActiveSync synchronization is in progress. Your smartphone is connected to a computer or network, or Windows Mobile Device Center synchronization is in progress. A data connection is not available or your phone is off. Your smartphones battery is low. Wireless service provider name Your smartphones battery is being charged. Your smartphone is connected to a power outlet and the battery is fully charged. Your phone is on. When you turn off your phone, Phone Off appears instead. A call is in progress and your smartphone is connected to a Bluetooth headset or car kit. You have a reminder. If the reminder is not displayed on your Today screen, tap the icon to open the reminder. You have an alert from Microsoft. If the alert is not displayed on your Today screen, tap the icon to open the alert. Your GPS satellite data has expired. 64 W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?
You are in an area that supports mobile broadband (EVDO) data services. EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized) is a wireless broadband technology that is designed for very high-speed data transfer, with average download speeds of 400 to 600Kbps. It is capable of reaching download speeds up to 3.1Mbps and upload speeds up to 1.8Mbps. Your phone is on, and a mobile broadband data connection is active. You can still make or answer calls. When you make or answer a call, the data transmission is automatically interrupted. Your phone is on and is connected to a mobile broadband network, but you are not actively transmitting data. You can still make and answer calls. 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E You are in an area that supports 1xRTT data services. The 1xRTT
(single-carrier [1x] radio transmission technology) wireless technology can provide fast data transfer and Internet access with average speeds of 60 to 80Kbps and bursts up to 144Kbps. Your phone is on, and an 1xRTT data connection is active. When you make or receive a call, the data transmission is automatically interrupted. Your phone is on and is connected to a 1xRTT network, but you are not actively transmitting data. You can still make and answer calls. W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?
65 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E Using a phone headset You can connect a phone headset for hands-free operation. You can use either the headset that came with your smartphone or a compatible third-party headset. IMPORTANT If driving while using a smartphone is permitted in your area, we recommend using a headset or hands-free car kit (sold separately). However, be aware that use of a headset that covers both ears impairs your ability to hear other sounds. Use of such a headset while operating a motor vehicle or riding a bicycle may create a serious hazard to you and/or others, and may be illegal. If you must use a stereo headset while driving, place a speaker in only one ear. Leave the other ear free to hear outside noises, and do so only if it is legal and you can do so safely. Using a wired headset 2 3 1 1 Speakers 2 Microphone 3 Headset button The headset button performs various actions depending on whats happening on the phone. Press the headset button once to perform any of the following tasks:
Answer an incoming call
Respond to call waiting 66 U S I N G A P H O N E H E A D S E T 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E
Hang up a single active call or all calls on a conference call if there is no extracted call
Swap between calls if there is one active call and one call on hold NOTE Your smartphone works with headsets that have a 3.5mm connector
(look for three colored bands on the plug). When in doubt, ask the third-party headset manufacturer if the product is compatible with your smartphone. If you hear a headset buzz or poor microphone performance, your headset may be incompatible with your smartphone. Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free device Your smartphone is also compatible with many headsets and car kits (sold separately) enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology version 2.0 and earlier versions. For a list of compatible hands-free devices with Bluetooth wireless technology, go to palm.com/treopro. After you set up a connection with a Bluetooth headset or hands-free car kit, you can communicate with that device whenever it is within range and the Bluetooth feature on your smartphone is turned on. The range varies greatly, depending on environmental factors. The maximum is about 30 feet (10 meters). DID YOU KNOW? If you have both a compatible Bluetooth headset and a car kit, the one you connected to your smartphone last becomes the active device. 1 If necessary, prepare the device with which you want to connect to accept a new connection. Check the devices documentation for details. Be sure to find out if the device has a predefined passkey that you need to enter on your smartphone in step 8. 2 On your smartphone, press Start and select Settings. 3 Select the Connections tab, and then select Bluetooth
. U S I N G A P H O N E H E A D S E T 67 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E 4 Select the Mode tab and check the Turn 6 Wait for your smartphone to search for on Bluetooth box. devices and to display the device list. 5 Select the Devices tab, and then select 7 Highlight the device with which you Add new device. 68 U S I N G A P H O N E H E A D S E T want to connect and press Next (right softkey). If the device you want does not appear, select Refresh. 8 If prompted, enter a passkey between 1 and 16 digits long and press Next (right softkey). For some headsets, the passkey is entered automatically. If you are not prompted for a passkey, skip to step 10. IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices have a predefined passkey. If your hands-free device has a predefined passkey, you can find it in the documentation for that device. Other devices provide a screen where you enter 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E a passkey that you make up. In either case, you must use the same passkey on both your smartphone and your hands-free device. We recommend that you use a passkey of 16 digits, where possible, to improve the security of your smartphone. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered. 9 If the passkey is not predefined, enter the same passkey on the other Bluetooth device and press Finish (right softkey). 10 (Optional) Press Advanced (right softkey) and make sure that the Hands Free box is checked. Press Save (right softkey). 11 Press Done (left softkey). 12 Press OK You can now communicate with this device whenever it is within range and the Bluetooth feature on your smartphone is turned on. The range varies greatly, depending on environmental factors. The maximum is about 30 feet (10 meters). Using a Bluetooth hands-free device To learn how to set up and connect to Bluetooth devices, see Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free device. Here are tips for working with a Bluetooth hands-free device:
To transfer a call from the handset to a Bluetooth hands-free device during a call, on the Phone screen, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Turn Hands-free On. To transfer the call to the handset, press Menu (right softkey) and select Turn Hands-free Off. DID YOU KNOW? If youre using a Bluetooth hands-free device to answer calls and it is connected to and within range, your smartphone automatically routes all calls to the hands-free device instead of to the earpiece on your smartphone. If you answer calls on the smartphone, the call audio goes through the smartphone speakers.
To transfer a call from a wired headset to a Bluetooth headset or car kit that is within range and with which youve previously set up a partnership
(Bluetooth headset or car kit required, U S I N G A P H O N E H E A D S E T 69 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E sold separately), unplug the wired headset and press the button on the Bluetooth headset or car kit.
To find out how to transfer your contacts from your smartphone to your car kit, go to palm.com/treopro. 4 Select the Event list, and then select the type of call for which you want to set the ringtone:
Phone: Known Caller: An incoming call from someone in your Contacts list or Speed Dial list. Customizing phone settings Selecting ringtones and display notices You can set various tones for various types of incoming phone calls and notifications. You can download AAC, MP3, MIDI, AMR, WAV, MPEG4, QCELP, and WMA ringtones directly to your smartphone (see Downloading files and images from a web page). You can also download ringtones to your computer and then email them to your phone. 1 Press Start 2 On the Personal tab, select Sounds &
and select Settings. Notifications
. 3 Select the Notifications tab. 70 C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S Phone: Missed call: A call you did not answer. 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E
(Optional) Select the Play icon to preview the sound.
Check the Display message on screen box to have a message displayed when the event occurs. 7 Check the Vibrate when boxes to turn the vibrate feature on or off based on the Ringer switch setting. 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 to select ringtones for other types of calls. 9 Press OK
. DID YOU KNOW? You can add, preview, delete, and send sounds on your smartphone. You can also set sounds for messaging notifications and calendar reminders. See Selecting Sounds & Notifications. Phone: Roaming: A call that comes in when youre outside your home mobile network. Phone: Unknown Caller: An incoming call from someone identified by caller ID who is not in your Contacts list or Speed Dial list. Phone: Voice mail: A new voicemail. 5 If you selected Known Caller, Roaming, or Unknown Caller, select the ring type and the ringtone. Select the Play icon to preview the ringtone sound. 6 If you selected Missed call or Voice mail, set the following options:
Check the Play Sound box if you want to have a sound played when the event occurs.
If you checked the Play Sound box, then select the sound for the selected type of call. You can also check the Repeat box to have the sound repeated. C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S 71 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E Adjusting call and ringer volume
*
* Volume Call volume: While a call is in progress, press Volume (on the side of your smartphone) to adjust the call volume. Ringer volume: When a call is not in progress and you are not playing music or a video, press Volume to adjust ringer volume. TIP To turn off the ringer volume and all sounds except call volume completely, slide the ringer switch to Sound Off. 72 C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S Assigning a caller ID ringtone 1 On your Today screen, press Contacts (left softkey). 2 Highlight the contacts name. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit. 4 Select Ring tone. 5 Select a tone for this contact entry. 6 Press OK
. Enabling TTY You can enable your smartphone for use with a TTY/TDD device. A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a telecommunications device that enables telephone communication for people who are deaf or hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities. Your smartphone is compatible with select TTY devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD machine, headset, or hands-free kit to your smartphone through the headset jack while in TTY/TDD mode. Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device for connectivity information. Be sure that the TTY device supports digital wireless transmission. NOTE Not all wireless service providers support the TTY feature on your smartphone. Check with your wireless service provider for information. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your smartphone is connected to a TTY/TDD device using the headset jack. When you enable TTY, all audio modes are disabled on your smartphone, including holding the smartphone up to your ear and listening. and select Settings. 1 Press Start 2 On the Personal tab, select Phone. 3 Select the Services tab and then select TTY Mode from the list. 4 Select Get Settings. 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E 5 Select one of the following:
Full mode: Allows you to type a message, which is read by the TTY device to the other person. The spoken response is then typed to you.
VCO mode: Voice carryoverallows you to speak to the hearing person you have called and then read the response.
HCO mode: Hearing carryover allows you to listen to the speaking person you have called and then type your response.
Off 6 Press OK
. Setting your phone to automatically answer calls 1 Press Start 2 On the Personal tab, select Phone 3 Select the More tab. and select Settings. TIP On the Phone settings screen, press Down on the 5-way to move the highlight to the tab area, and then press Right until the More tab appears. C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S 73 4 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O N E 4 Check the Headset box and select the number of rings in the Answer incoming calls without pressing Talk after X rings list. 3 Select the Advanced tab and check or uncheck the Add new phone number to Contacts at end of call box. 5 Press OK
. Adding contact numbers from new callers By default, you are prompted to add contact entries for numbers that are not already in your Contacts list. You can turn this feature on or off. 1 Press Start 2 On the Personal tab, select Phone and select Settings. 4 Press OK
. Setting options for rejecting a call By default, when you reject an incoming call, the caller is sent to voicemail. You can change this setting so that, in addition to sending the caller to voicemail, a text message opens. This message contains default text and is addressed to the caller so that you can send the message right away. You can also change the default text of the message. 74 C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S Y O U R P H O N E and select Settings. 1 Press Start 2 On the Personal tab, select Phone 3 Select the Advanced tab. 4 To turn on the text message feature,
. check the Reject call with text message box. 5 (Optional) To change the content of the message, select the text in the box and enter the text you want. 6 Press OK
. 4 R E T P A H C C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S 75 Y O U R P H O N E 4 R E T P A H C 76 C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S Synchronizing information Synchronizing means that information that has been entered or updated in one placeyour Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm, your computer, or your corporate serveris automatically updated in the other. Theres no need to enter information twice. Some types of synchronization can happen on an automated schedule, so you dont even have to think about it. After you get into the habit of synchronizing regularly, youll know what a powerful tool synchronization is for transferring, updating, and backing up large amounts of information on your smartphone. Benefits
Quickly enter and update information on your computer and your smartphone
Protect your information
Send photos and videos to your smartphone from your desktop computer CHAPTER 5 77 In this chapter Synchronization overview. 79 How do I synchronize? . 79 What can I synchronize? . 80 Setting up your computer for synchronization . 83 Synchronizing using the USB cable . 88 Setting up wireless synchronization. 89 Other ways to synchronize. 94 Changing which applications sync . 96 Stopping synchronization . 97 5 R E T P A H C S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N Synchronization overview How do I synchronize?
This chapter discusses using desktop sync software and other methods to synchronize your smartphone and your computer. When you synchronize, info you enter on your smartphone, your computer, or your corporate server is automatically updated in the other location. Theres no need to enter the info twice. This is true whether you sync with your computer using desktop synchronization software (see Setting up your computer for synchronization) or wirelessly with your companys Exchange server using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync desktop software (see Setting up wireless synchronization). There are a number of ways to make synchronization occur. You can install desktop sync software on your computer to synchronize in one of several ways, or you may be able to synchronize wirelessly with an Exchange server. You can also maximize your sync options and sync with both an Exchange server and desktop sync software. Synchronizing with desktop sync software The sync application on your smartphone is called ActiveSync. The name of the desktop sync software on your computer depends on your computers operating system. Windows XP: The desktop sync software is called Active Sync desktop software. Windows Vista: The desktop sync software is called Windows Mobile Device Center. S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N O V E R V I E W 79 5 R E T P A H C S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N You install the software by connecting your smartphone to your computer using the USB cable. You must install this software even if you have already installed a previous version of desktop sync software. See Installing Desktop Sync Software:
Windows XP and Windows Vista for instructions. After you install desktop sync software, you can synchronize by connecting your smartphone to your computer using any of the following:
USB cable: See Synchronizing using the USB cable. Bluetooth wireless technology: See Synchronizing over a Bluetooth connection. Infrared (IR): See Synchronizing over an infrared connection. Synchronizing wirelessly with the server You can set up your smartphone to synchronize email and other information wirelessly with Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or Exchange Server 2003 using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (see Setting up wireless synchronization). If you choose this method, synchronization takes place automatically after setup. NOTE If you decide to sync wirelessly, you dont have to install the desktop sync software, but we strongly recommend that you do. You need the desktop sync software to synchronize pictures, videos, music files, and other info directly with your computer. What can I synchronize?
If you have Microsoft Office Outlook 2003 or later installed on your computer, you can synchronize information in these applications:
80 W H A T C A N I S Y N C H R O N I Z E ?
5 R E T P A H C S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N The information in these applications synchronizes with Outlook by default whether you use desktop sync software or wireless synchronization with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. If you set up synchronization with desktop sync software, information in the Favorites application is synchronized by default as well. DID YOU KNOW? Synchronizing Favorites gives you an easy way to get favorites from the web browser on your computer into the web browser on your smartphone. Just add them to the folder called Mobile Favorites, which shows up in your computer's browser. When you sync, they become available on your smartphone as well. Backup copies of any favorites that you add on the smartphone browser are also stored in the Mobile Favorites folder. You can remove applications or add others to the list of applications that synchronize. For example, you can change settings to synchronize Word, Excel, PowerPoint, OneNote, and PDF files, as well as pictures, music, videos, and other types of files (see Changing which applications sync). If you want to synchronize music or other files that appear in the Windows Media Player Mobile library on your smartphone (see Windows Media Player Mobile), you need Windows Media Player 10 or later on your computer. TIP If you dont have Windows Media Player installed on your computer, you can download it for free from microsoft.com. If you want to synchronize with a personal information manager (PIM) other than Microsoft Office Outlook, you must install a third-party solution. Contact the PIMs vendor to learn whether software is available for your smartphone. W H A T C A N I S Y N C H R O N I Z E ?
81 5 R E T P A H C S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N This table lists the types of info you can synchronize and the methods to use. Method Desktop sync software
(sync with computer) or Exchange ActiveSync
(direct sync with server) Desktop sync software or Exchange ActiveSync Desktop sync software Desktop sync software and Windows Media Player Info type Outlook Contacts, Calendar, Tasks Outlook Email Word, Excel, PowerPoint, OneNote, PDF files Music, video, and picture files that are in your Windows Media Player Mobile library Where to learn more Setting up your computer for synchronization or Setting up wireless synchronization Setting up your computer for synchronization or Setting up wireless synchronization Setting up your computer for synchronization Synchronizing your Microsoft Office files Changing which applications sync Setting up your computer for synchronization Changing which applications sync Synchronizing Windows Media Player library files 82 W H A T C A N I S Y N C H R O N I Z E ?
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N Method Desktop sync software Where to learn more Setting up your computer for synchronization 5 R E T P A H C Info type Music, picture, and video files that are not in your Windows Media Player Mobile library Outlook Notes Desktop sync software Files to be transferred to an expansion card Desktop sync software Changing which applications sync Synchronizing Windows Media Player library files (Windows Vista) Setting up your computer for synchronization Changing which applications sync Setting up your computer for synchronization Changing which applications sync Setting up your computer for synchronization Before you can synchronize with your computer, you must have the current version of the desktop sync software installed. The sync software you use depends on the type of Windows operating system you use. Your smartphone will automatically install the appropriate software for your system. System requirements Your computer must meet the following minimum system requirements:
Windows XP Service Pack 2 or Windows Vista (later versions may also be supported)
32MB of available memory (RAM) S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N 83 5 R E T P A H C S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N
170MB of free hard disk space
Available USB port
USB cable (included with your smartphone)
Adobe Flash Player (required to run the installation program) TIP If you do not have Adobe Flash Player on your computer, you can download it for free from adobe.com. Installing Desktop Sync Software:
Windows XP and Windows Vista The first time you connect your smartphone to your computer, your smartphone is in Setup Mode and automatically starts the process of setting up your computer to synchronize with your smartphone. If you have a Windows XP computer, the desktop sync software is called ActiveSync desktop software. If you have a Windows Vista computer, the desktop sync software is called Windows Mobile Device Center. On your smartphone, the sync application is called ActiveSync. The smartphone setup program recognizes whether you have a Windows XP or Windows Vista computer and automatically directs you to install the correct software. BEFORE YOU BEGIN
Close any applications that are currently running on your computer, including those running in the background. (Your computer must have all its resources available before you can install the software.)
Verify that your smartphone is in Setup mode. If it is in Sync mode you need to switch it back to Setup mode (see Switching between setup mode and sync mode).
Windows XP: If you want to sync pictures, videos, and music from your Windows Media Player Library, you must have Windows Media Player 10 or later installed on your computer before you install ActiveSync desktop software. If you plan to sync email, contacts, calendar events, and tasks directly with Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or 2003 SP2, you need your mail server address and domain name, as well as your Exchange server account username and password.
84 S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N TIP If you are installing the software on a computer at work, make sure your company allows you to install new software. Contact your companys IT department for help.
Windows Vista: Go to Start >
Computer and open the drive named Treo Setup. If necessary, double-click setup.exe. 5 R E T P A H C 1 Plug the USB cable into an available USB port on your computer or into a powered USB hub connected to your computer. TIP For best performance, plug your USB cable directly into a USB port on your computer. If your computer has USB ports on both the front and back, we suggest using the back port. If you use a USB hub, make sure its a powered hub. 2 Connect the USB cable to your smartphone by inserting it into the microUSB connector on the bottom of the smartphone. Setup starts automatically (this is called setup mode). NOTE If the Setup screen does not appear, do the following:
Windows XP: Go to My Computer and open the Treo Setup icon. 3 On your computer, select Install sync software on your PC and follow the instructions that appear on both your computer and your device. 4 After installation completes, the Setup window prompts you to start the sync process. To proceed with syncing and switch your smartphone from Setup to S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N 85 5 R E T P A H C S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N Sync mode, click Sync your PC and Treo. Otherwise, disconnect your smartphone from your computer and sync later by simply reconnecting them. computer every time you connect them using the USB cable, provided you have the current version of the desktop sync software installed on your computer. NOTE During the software installation, you can select an option to synchronize email, contacts, calendar events, and tasks directly with your information stored on a server running Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or Exchange Server 2003 upgraded to Service Pack 2. If you choose this option, you are prompted to enter your mail server address and domain name and your Exchange server account username and password. Switching between setup mode and sync mode The first time you connect your smartphone to your computer, your smartphone is in setup mode and automatically starts the process of setting up your computer to synchronize with your smartphone. When you complete the setup process and perform the first sync, the connection switches from setup mode to sync mode. In sync mode, your smartphone synchronizes with your The connection stays in sync mode unless you manually switch it to setup mode. For example, you may be using sync mode but decide you want to install sync software on another computer, so you need to switch to setup mode. After you finish working in setup mode and initiate a sync, the connection automatically switches back to sync mode. 1 On your smartphone, press Start and select Programs. 2 Select PC Setup
. 3 Select Set up my PC. 4 Press OK 5 Connect your smartphone to your
. computer to run Setup. Using the desktop sync software After you install the desktop sync software, synchronization happens by default anytime you connect your smartphone to your computer, as described in Synchronizing using the USB cable. You 86 S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N 5 R E T P A H C S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N can also open the desktop sync software window on your computer to perform the following tasks:
Install applications from your computer into your smartphone (see Installing applications from your computer) or onto an expansion card inserted into the expansion card slot on your smartphone
(see Installing applications onto an expansion card).
Change which applications synchronize.
In ActiveSync desktop software on a Windows XP computer, enter the settings to synchronize wirelessly with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 SP2 or 2007. DID YOU KNOW? You can also change which applications synchronize (see Changing which applications sync) and enter settings to synchronize wirelessly (see Setting up wireless synchronization) in the ActiveSync app on your smartphone. Whether you enter changes on your smartphone or on your computer, the changes are transferred to the other location the next time you synchronize. To open the desktop sync software, do one of the following:
Windows XP: To open the ActiveSync desktop software window, double-click the ActiveSync icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen. TIP If the ActiveSync icon does not appear in the taskbar, click Start > Programs >
Microsoft ActiveSync to open the ActiveSync window. TIP You can enter a setting to have the ActiveSync window open automatically when you connect your computer and your smartphone. In the ActiveSync window, select File > Connection Settings, and check the Open ActiveSync when my device connects box. Windows Vista: To open Windows Mobile Device Center, click Start > All Programs
> Windows Mobile Device Center. Desktop software installation also creates a folder for your device on your computer. When your device is connected to your computer, opening My Computer or Windows Explorer (Windows XP) or Computer (Windows Vista) displays an S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N 87 5 R E T P A H C S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N icon representing your Treo smartphone. Double-click this icon to display folders containing items you synchronized, such as music files, pictures, and videos. Synchronizing using the USB cable After you install the desktop sync software
(see Installing Desktop Sync Software:
Windows XP and Windows Vista), every time you connect your smartphone to your computer, the desktop sync software automatically turns on and checks whether changes you made on the computer or on the smartphone need to be synchronized. Synchronizing NOTE If you synchronize more than one device with the same computer, each device must have a unique name. To create a custom device name for your smartphone, press Start Settings. Select the System tab, and then select About
. Select the Device ID tab and enter a name and a description. and select 88 S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G U S I N G T H E U S B C A B L E 1 Plug the USB cable into an available USB port or into a powered USB hub on your computer. 2 Connect the USB cable to your smartphone by inserting it into the microUSB connector on the bottom of the smartphone. 3 Check for synchronization progress:
Windows XP: Look for the animated ActiveSync icon at the top of your 5 R E T P A H C S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N smartphone screen and the ActiveSync icon in the taskbar on your computer. Windows Vista: Look for the animated connection icon at the top of your smartphone screen.
If you dont see the correct icon, make sure that the desktop sync software that came with your smartphone is running on your computer.
If you have any problems synchronizing, see Synchronization for troubleshooting suggestions. TIP Your smartphone contains Sprite Backup, a backup and restore application that backs up information that is not synchronized with Outlook. This app also preserves your information and settings if your smartphone is ever lost or stolen, and it protects your info during a hard reset. To access this app, press Start, select Programs, and then select Sprite Backup. Setting up wireless synchronization Does your company use Microsoft Outlook as its email solution? Does your company also use Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 SP2 or 2007 as its email server? If so, you may be able to wirelessly synchronize the email and other Outlook info on your smartphone and the same info stored on the Exchange server using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. If you are using Exchange Server 2007, or Exchange Server 2003 SP2, you may be able to take advantage of the additional features of Microsoft Direct Push. Microsoft Direct Push is a two-way wireless delivery method that keeps your Outlook information always up-to-date and provides more efficient communication between the server and your smartphone. It includes features like Global Address List, Tasks Over the Air (OTA), and IP-based push updating of Calendar and Messaging. S E T T I N G U P W I R E L E S S S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N 89 5 R E T P A H C S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N DID YOU KNOW? Because your desktop copy of Outlook also syncs with the server, whatever is synchronized to the server from your smartphone also shows up in Outlook on your computer; and whatever you enter or change in Outlook on your computer syncs to the server and then shows up on your smartphone. BEFORE YOU BEGIN To synchronize wirelessly, you need to set up an Exchange server account on your smartphone. Work with your system administrator to gather the following info, and then follow the steps in this section to set up an account.
Mail server address and domain name.
The username and password you use to access your corporate mail server.
Security connection: Does your server use an encrypted (SSL) connection?
Security measure: Is it OK to store your corporate email password on your smartphone?
90 S E T T I N G U P W I R E L E S S S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N TIP If you installed ActiveSync desktop software on a Windows XP computer, you may have already set up your smartphone to synchronize wirelessly with the server. To check, press Start, select Programs, and then select ActiveSync. Press Menu (right softkey). If Configure Server appears instead of Add Server Source, wireless sync is already set up, and you can skip this procedure. and select Programs. 1 Press Start 2 Select ActiveSync 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select
. Add Server Source. 4 Enter the email address you use to access email from your corporate Exchange server. Check the box to have the setup process get your Exchange server settings from the Internet. 5 Press Next (right softkey). 6 Enter the username and password you use to access your corporate mail server, and enter the Exchange server domain. 5 R E T P A H C S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N TIP If you found out from your system administrator that it is not OK to store your corporate email password on your smartphone, dont check the Save password box; you must synchronize manually (see Initiating a wireless sync manually). 8 Press Next (right softkey). 9 If prompted, enter the server address. Check the This server requires an encrypted (SSL) connection box if your server uses an encrypted connection. S E T T I N G U P W I R E L E S S S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N 91 NOTE You cant see your password as you enter it, so be careful. Be sure that Caps Lock and Option Lock are not on unless you need them. For info on how to enter characters, see Entering lowercase and uppercase letters and Entering numbers punctuation and symbols. TIP The Exchange server settings are case-
sensitive. Be sure to enter uppercase and lowercase letters properly. 7 Check the Save password box. 5 R E T P A H C S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N 10 Press Next (right softkey) and check the boxes for the types of information you want to synchronize with the Exchange server. 11 (Optional) Highlight an item and select Settings to change the synchronization settings for that type of information. Settings are not available for all items. TIP To automatically download more of an incoming email message than the default setting, select E-mail in step 11 and select a higher number from the Download size limit list. If you dont increase this setting, you can manually download the rest of the message at your convenience. 92 S E T T I N G U P W I R E L E S S S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N TIP To set the rules for fixing sync conflicts, press Menu (right softkey) and select Advanced. 12 Press Finish (left softkey). Synchronization with your Exchange server begins automatically. A status bar appears onscreen indicating sync progress. You can set a schedule for synchronization to take place anytime info is updated on either your smartphone or the server or at certain intervals (see Setting the synchronization schedule), or allow synchronization to take place only when you initiate it manually (see Initiating a wireless sync manually). Setting the synchronization schedule You can set a synchronization schedule in either of the following situations:
If you use Microsoft Exchange Server 2007, or Exchange Server 2003 SP2: By default, wireless sync takes place anytime info is updated on either your smartphone or the server using Microsoft Direct Push. To save battery life, however, you can set S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N synchronization to take place at intervals that you specify. you are at work or when email volume is high. 5 R E T P A H C If you use Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 that is not upgraded to Service Pack 2: By default, wireless sync does not take place automatically. Set a synchronization schedule to have the sync take place either anytime info is updated on your smartphone or the server, or at certain intervals. and select Programs. 1 Press Start 2 Select ActiveSync 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select
. Schedule. 4 Set any of the following options:
Peak times: Sets the frequency for high-traffic time periods such as when Off-peak times: Sets the frequency for low-traffic time periods such as late at night. Use above settings when roaming:
Sets the frequency while you are roaming outside your wireless service providers network. You should keep this box checked to ensure that wireless sync works properly. Send/receive when I click Send: Sets whether items are sent as soon as you select Send in the Messaging application, or whether they are held until the next synchronization. 5 Press OK
. Initiating a wireless sync manually If you want to control exactly when a wireless sync takes place, or if it is not OK to store your corporate email password on your smartphone, you can initiate a sync manually. 1 To set up manual sync, follow the preceding procedure, Setting the S E T T I N G U P W I R E L E S S S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N 93 5 R E T P A H C S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N synchronization schedule. In the Peak times and Off-peak times lists, select Manually. 2 To initiate a manual sync, press and select Programs. Start 3 Select ActiveSync
. 4 Press Sync (left softkey). Other ways to synchronize Synchronizing over a Bluetooth connection You can synchronize your computer and smartphone using Bluetooth wireless technology. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your computer is equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology. You may need to go to your computer manufacturers website to download required software. Check the documentation that came with your computer for information. 94 O T H E R W A Y S T O S Y N C H R O N I Z E 1 Do one of the following:
Windows XP: On your computer, icon in right-click the ActiveSync the taskbar in the lower-right corner of the screen, and select Connection Settings. Windows Vista: Click Start > All Programs > Windows Mobile Device Center. Select Connect without setting up your device (if necessary), and then select Connection settings. 2 Check the Allow connections for one of the following box and select Bluetooth. 3 On your smartphone, press Start and select Settings. 4 Select the Connections tab, and then select Bluetooth
. 5 Select the Mode tab and check the Turn on Bluetooth box. and select Programs. 6 Press Start 7 Select ActiveSync 8 Press Menu (right softkey) and select
. Connect via Bluetooth. 5 R E T P A H C S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N 9 If this is the first time youre making a Bluetooth connection to this computer, follow the onscreen prompts to set up a Bluetooth partnership with this computer. See Connecting to devices with Bluetooth wireless technology for more information on partnerships. 10 Select Sync. 11 When synchronization has finished, press Menu (right softkey) and select Disconnect Bluetooth. Synchronizing over an infrared connection If your computer has an IR (infrared) port, you can synchronize with your computer wirelessly using the IR port on your smartphone. BEFORE YOU BEGIN
Make sure your computer is equipped with an IR port.
Turn on the feature to receive beamed information on your smartphone (see Turning on the option to receive beamed information). 1 Set up your computer to receive infrared beams. See ActiveSync Help on your computer for details. 2 Point the IR port on your smartphone directly at your computers IR port. 3 On your smartphone, press Start and select Programs. 4 Select ActiveSync 5 Press Menu (right softkey) and select
. Connect via IR. 6 Select Sync. Synchronizing with multiple computers You can set up your smartphone to synchronize with up to two computers as well as with Exchange Server 2003 SP2 or 2007. When synchronizing with multiple computers, the items that you synchronize appear on all the computers. For example, if you set up to sync your smartphone with two computers named C1 and C2, when you sync Contacts and Calendar on your smartphone with both computers, you get the following results:
The contacts and calendar appointments that were on C1 are now also on C2. O T H E R W A Y S T O S Y N C H R O N I Z E 95 5 R E T P A H C S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N
The contacts and calendar appointments that were on C2 are now also on C1.
The contacts and calendar appointments from both computers are on your smartphone. NOTE Microsoft Office Outlook email can synchronize with only one computer. Changing which applications sync You must select sync options if you want to synchronize notes, pictures, and other types of files. and select Programs. 1 Press Start 2 Select ActiveSync 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select
. Options. 96 C H A N G I N G W H I C H A P P L I C A T I O N S S Y N C 4 Do any of the following:
Check the box next to any items you want to synchronize. If you cannot check a box, you might have to uncheck a box for the same information type elsewhere in the list.
Uncheck the box next to any items you want to stop synchronizing. TIP To end the sync relationship between your smartphone and a computer so that items are no longer synchronized with that computer, select the computer name on the ActiveSync screen on your smartphone, and then select Delete. S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N
Highlight an item and select Settings to customize the settings for that item. Settings are not available for all items. Stopping synchronization 5 R E T P A H C If you ever need to manually stop a synchronization thats in progress, follow these steps:
and select Programs. 1 Press Start 2 Select ActiveSync
. 3 Press Stop (left softkey). NOTE If you cannot check or uncheck a box because it is disabled, try doing so from ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center on your computer. For detailed information on synchronizing Word documents, Excel spreadsheets, and PowerPoint presentations, see Synchronizing your Microsoft Office files. For detailed information on synchronizing pictures, videos, and music files, see Synchronizing your pictures, videos, and music. For information on changing email sync options, see Changing email download settings: Outlook email accounts. S T O P P I N G S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N 97 S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N 5 R E T P A H C 98 S T O P P I N G S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N Your email You already know how efficient email is for staying in touch. Now your Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm brings you a new level of convenience: email on the go. Enjoy the ease and speed of communicating with friends, family, and colleagues anywhere you can access your wireless service providers data network. You can send photos to your friends and family, or create Microsoft Word or Excel files and send them to your colleagues. You can also receive attachments to view and edit at your convenience. Benefits
Receive photos, sound files, Word and Excel files, and more
Attach and send files of almost any type
Save messages from your computer to view at a convenient time CHAPTER 6 99 In this chapter Setting up email . 101 Sending and receiving messages . 110 Working with email messages. 115 Customizing your email settings . 121 Working with meeting invitations . 129 Sending email messages from within another application. 130 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L Setting up email organization uses Exchange Server 2007, or Exchange Server 2003 SP2. BEFORE YOU BEGIN
Before you use your smartphone to send or receive messages, consult your wireless service provider for pricing and availability of email services and data rate plans.
Make sure your phone is on and youre inside a coverage area before you send or receive messages. If you want delivery of Microsoft Office Outlook email using Microsoft Direct Push, make sure that your IT
Entering settings for an email account You can use the Messaging application on your smartphone to access the many kinds of email you may use: corporate, ISP, and web-based (like Gmail and Yahoo! Mail). Before you can send and receive email on your smartphone, you need to decide which type of email account you want to access. The setup process is different for each email account type, so it is very important that you select the correct type to send and receive email. Email account type Type of email you can access How to set up POP/IMAP You can obtain email from an ISP or Internet email account such as AOL, or from a small business or corporate Internet email account. See Setting up a POP/IMAP account in the Messaging application: Common email providers or Setting up a POP/
IMAP account in the Inbox application: Other email providers. S E T T I N G U P E M A I L 101 Y O U R E M A I L 6 R E T P A H C Email account type Type of email you can access How to set up Microsoft Exchange Server See Setting up wireless synchronization. You can retrieve corporate email using a Microsoft Exchange server. You can access email wirelessly if your company is using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. Hotmail Free web-based email You can use Windows Live to access mail from your web-based Hotmail account. NOTE Windows Live is not supported by all wireless service providers. You can access mail from Yahoo! and other free web-based systems. You may need to check with your IT organization to ensure that Exchange ActiveSync is supported and to obtain the configuration settings. See Using Windows LiveTM. Access the email website directly, using your smartphones web browser. DID YOU KNOW? Some web-based email providers such as Yahoo! and Gmail allow you to configure your email account so that you can access it from the Messaging application on your smartphone instead of from your web browser. Check the providers website for information. Setting up a POP/IMAP account in the Messaging application: Common email providers Follow this procedure if you have a common email provider, for example, AOL, EarthLink, or Yahoo!. If you are setting up the Messaging application to work with your corporate email account or you have a 102 S E T T I N G U P E M A I L less common email provider, see Setting up a POP/IMAP account in the Inbox application: Other email providers. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Ask your email provider or system administrator for your account username and password if you dont know them. 1 Press Messaging 2 Select Setup E-mail. 3 Enter the email address that you want to set up, and enter your password for this account. 4 If you want your password entered automatically, check the Save password box. If you want to enter your password each time you access this account, do not check this box. 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L DID YOU KNOW? Checking the Save password box makes it easier to check your email, because you dont have to enter your password each time. Leaving the box unchecked keeps your email more secure, because no one can download messages without entering your password. 5 Press Next (right softkey). 6 If the setup process finds your account settings, press Next (right softkey). If a screen appears displaying an option to try to get email settings automatically from the Internet, see Setting up a POP/
IMAP account in the Inbox application:
Other email providers and continue with step 5 of that procedure. 7 Enter your name and, if you want, change your account display name to something meaningful. For example, if this is your work email account, you can change the display name to Work or your companys name. S E T T I N G U P E M A I L 103 Y O U R E M A I L 6 R E T P A H C TIP To maximize battery life and minimize data charges, set a less frequent interval for sending and receiving email. Review all download settings: Select this option to change download settings. See Changing email download settings: Other email accounts for information. 8 Press Next (right softkey). 9 (Optional) Select either of the following:
10 Press Finish (right softkey). If prompted, select OK to download messages for this account now. Setting up a POP/IMAP account in the Inbox application: Other email providers You can set up an account in the Messaging application to send and receive email messages using an email account that you have with an Internet service provider (ISP), an email account that you access using a VPN server connection
(such as a work account; see Connecting to a VPN), or any other IMAP or POP email account. Automatic Send/Receive: Set the time interval for automatically sending and receiving email, from every 5 minutes to once a day. If you do not want to automatically download messages, select Manually. 104 S E T T I N G U P E M A I L BEFORE YOU BEGIN Work with your email provider or system administrator to gather the following info:
Account type (POP3 or IMAP).
Mail server name for receiving mail.
Your username and password.
Any special security requirements.
Password security: Find out whether its OK to store your corporate email password on your smartphone.
Mail server name for sending mail. 1 Press Messaging 2 Select Setup E-mail. 3 Enter the email address that you want to set up, and enter your password for this account. 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L 4 If you want your password entered automatically, check the Save password box. If you want to enter your password each time you access this account, do not check this box. DID YOU KNOW? Checking the Save password box makes it easier to check your email, because you dont have to enter your password each time. Leaving the box unchecked keeps your email more secure, because no one can download messages without entering your password. 5 If a screen appears with a message notifying you that the setup process has found your account settings, go to Setting up a POP/IMAP account in the Messaging application: Common email providers and continue with step 6 of that procedure. If the following screen appears, check the box if you want the setup process to try to get your account settings from the Internet. S E T T I N G U P E M A I L 105 Y O U R E M A I L 6 R E T P A H C 6 Press Next (right softkey). 7 If you did not check the box in step 5 or the setup process does not find account settings, press Next (right softkey). 8 If prompted, select one of the following as your email provider:
Internet e-mail: Select this option if you access email from any type of email account except a corporate account that uses an Exchange server. Exchange server: Select this option if you access email from a corporate email account using an Exchange server. Custom domain: Select this option if the part of your email address after the
@ symbol is not the same as your email provider name. For example, select this option if your email address is user@mycompany.com but your actual email provider is live.com. If you select this option, press Next (right softkey) and enter your actual email provider domain name. 9 Press Next (right softkey). 10 Enter your name and, if you want, change your account display name to something meaningful. For example, if this is your work email account, you can change the display name to Work or your companys name. 106 S E T T I N G U P E M A I L 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L 15 Enter your account username and password. 16 If you want your password entered automatically, check the Save password box. If you want to enter your password each time you access this account, do not check this box. DID YOU KNOW? Checking the Save password box makes it easier to check your email, because you dont have to enter your password each time. Leaving the box unchecked keeps your email more secure, because no one can download messages without entering your password. TIP If you found out from your system administrator that it is not OK to store your corporate email password on your smartphone, dont check the Save password box. 17 Press Next (right softkey). 18 Enter the name of the outgoing (SMTP) mail server, set whether the server requires authentication, and set whether the server requires you to use your account and password to send email. S E T T I N G U P E M A I L 107 11 Press Next (right softkey). 12 Enter the name of the incoming mail server. 13 Select the Account type list, and then select POP3 or IMAP4. 14 Press Next (right softkey). Y O U R E M A I L 6 R E T P A H C 21 (Optional) Select either of the following:
19 Select Advanced Server Settings, set SSL requirements for incoming and outgoing email, and select the type of connection to use for sending and receiving email. 20 Press Done (left softkey). On the outgoing mail server screen, press Next (right softkey). 108 S E T T I N G U P E M A I L Automatic Send/Receive: Set the time interval for automatically sending and receiving email, from every 5 minutes to once a day. If you do not want to automatically download messages, select Manually. TIP To maximize battery life and minimize data charges, set a less frequent interval for sending and receiving email. Review all download settings: Select this option to change download settings; see Changing email download settings: Other email accounts for information. 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L 22 Press Finish (right softkey). If prompted, select OK to download messages for this account now. DID YOU KNOW? On the Accounts tab in Messaging Options, an asterisk appears next to the account you most recently accessed. Editing and deleting accounts NOTE To delete a Microsoft Exchange email account, use the ActiveSync/
Windows Mobile Device Center application on your computer, not the Messaging application (see Deleting a Microsoft Exchange Server account). To delete a Hotmail account you set up using Windows Live, use the Windows Live application. 1 Press Messaging
. 2 Do one of the following:
To delete an account: Highlight the account you want, press Menu (right softkey), and then select Delete. To edit an account: Press Menu (right softkey), and then select Options. Select the account you want to edit and press Center screens to change the settings you want to edit. Go through the Deleting a Microsoft Exchange Server account BEFORE YOU BEGIN Be sure that your smartphone is already set up to sync with your PC (see Setting up your computer for synchronization). If you have not finished the sync setup process, you must do so before continuing. 1 Connect your smartphone to your computer with the USB cable.
(ActiveSync starts automatically.) 2 On your computer, open the appropriate synchronization software. Microsoft Windows XP: ActiveSync Microsoft Windows Vista: Windows Mobile Device Center S E T T I N G U P E M A I L 109 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L 3 Open the settings panel for the Microsoft Exchange account. ActiveSync: In the Information Type section of the window, right-click Microsoft Exchange and select Settings. (If you do not see the Information Type section, click Show Details.) Windows Mobile Device Center:
Open Mobile Device Settings and click More. Sending and receiving messages Selecting which email account to use If you set up more than one email account on your smartphone (see Setting up email), you can select the account you want to use to view or send messages in one of two ways:
By default, when you open the TIP If synchronization is in progress, the Settings menu item is inactive. Wait until synchronization finishes, or click Stop in the ActiveSync window to end it.
4 Delete the account. ActiveSync: Click Delete Server to remove the account settings from your smartphone, and then click OK. Windows Mobile Device Center: Click End Exchange Server Partnership, and then click Yes to delete the account settings from your smartphone. 110 S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G M E S S A G E S Messaging application, a list of all of your email accounts appears. Select the account you want. If you turn off the option to display the list of accounts (see Customizing your email settings), when you open the Inbox application, the last account you were using is displayed. Press Right or Left accounts until the name of the account you want appears in the title bar. to cycle through your TIP Also press Right or Left to switch to a different account after you have finished working in the first account you selected. Creating and sending an email message 1 Press Messaging 2 Select the account you want to use to
. send a message. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select New. 4 Enter the recipients email address:
Enter the first letters of the recipients first or last name, the first and last initials separated by a space, or the email address. If a match is found in your Contacts list, select the name.
If the recipients name is in an online address book, you can find the name and add it. See Using an online address book. 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L
If the recipients name and mobile number are not in your Contacts list, enter the full mobile number or email address.
Separate addresses with a semicolon (;). Enter a semicolon by pressing Option
+ K.
Need to enter an underscore? Press and select the character. Its Alt the third character in the list. TIP To display the Cc and Bcc address fields, navigate to the To field and press Up on the 5-way. 5 To confirm that the addresses you entered are valid, press Menu (right softkey) and select Check Names. An alert appears if any names or addresses youve entered are not valid. 6 Select Subject and enter a title for the message. 7 Press Down to go to the body of the message. Enter your message, or press Menu (right softkey) and select My Text. Select the phrase you want. To add a new My Text phrase, select Edit My Text Messages in the list. S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G M E S S A G E S 111 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L 8 (Optional) To attach an item to the message, press Menu (right softkey) and select Insert. Select the type of item you want to attach, and then select the file or record a voice note. TIP You can send an email message with a file attached from directly within other applications on your smartphone; see Sending email messages from within another application. 9 (Optional) Press Menu (right softkey) and do one or both of the following:
Select Spell Check. When the spell check is complete, press OK
.
Select Message Options. Select the Priority list, select a priority setting for the message, and press OK
. TIP You can use the Message Options screen to select a language for the message. For certain types of email accounts, you can also set a security level and a permission level. 10 Press Send (left softkey). TIP Press Menu (right softkey) and select Save to Drafts if you need to finish composing your message later. TIP To save memory on your smartphone, turn off the option to save sent messages in the Saved folder. In the Inbox, press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > Options. Select the Message tab and uncheck the Keep copies of sent items in Sent folder box. Receiving email messages How you receive email messages depends on the type of account you are using and how you synchronize:
If you synchronize wirelessly with your Exchange server using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, new email messages are sent to your smartphone when they appear on the server, according to the schedule you set up
(see Setting the synchronization schedule), or when you manually initiate a sync (see Initiating a wireless sync manually. 112 S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G M E S S A G E S 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L TIP If you sync email with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 SP2 or 2007, you can synchronize messages in subfolders you create. In the Inbox, press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > Manage Folders. Folders containing subfolders display a +. Select the + to view the subfolders. Check the box to the left of any subfolder you want to sync. TIP If you synchronize email with Microsoft Exchange Server 2007, and you receive a message containing a link to a document on SharePoint or an internal file server, you can view the document by selecting the link.
If you use desktop sync software to synchronize your smartphone with your computer, messages in Outlook on your computer are transferred to your smartphone when you connect your computer and your smartphone (see Synchronizing using the USB cable).
For all other types of accounts, including ISP accounts and accounts you access using a VPN server connection (typically a work account;
see Connecting to a VPN), message retrieval depends on the option you chose from the Automatic Send/
Receive list during account setup (see Setting up a POP/IMAP account in the Messaging application: Common email providers or Setting up a POP/IMAP account in the Inbox application: Other email providers), as follows:
If you chose a time interval: Your smartphone automatically checks for and downloads new messages according to that interval. If you chose Manually: Follow these steps to send and receive messages:
1 Press Messaging 2 Select the account for which you want
. to send and receive messages. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Send/Receive to synchronize your smartphone with your email server. S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G M E S S A G E S 113 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L TIP Partially downloaded messages appear in the message list with a partial envelope icon to the left of the subject. To view the full message, either press Menu (right softkey) and select Download Message, or open the message and select Get the rest of this message. The full message is downloaded the next time you manually or automatically retrieve messages. DID YOU KNOW? You can view messages sent as HTML with the HTML formatting intact. DID YOU KNOW? You can receive and open attachments in a number of different formats, including PDF. PDF file attachments open in Adobe Reader LE on your smartphone (see Adobe Reader LE). TIP To store attachments on an expansion card, insert the card into your smartphones expansion card slot, press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > Options. Select Storage and check the When available, use this storage card to store attachments box. Opening attachments Unread messages containing attachments display this icon downloaded messages and this icon for fully downloaded messages. To open an attachment, do one of the following:
for partially For fully downloaded messages: Open the message and select the attachment name. For partially downloaded messages:
Open the message and select Get the rest of this message. After the message has been downloaded, select the attachment name to open it. 114 S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G M E S S A G E S If you are synchronizing with Outlook on your computer and want to download attachments automatically, do the following:
and select Programs. 1 Press Start 2 Select ActiveSync 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select
. Options. 4 Select E-mail, and then select Settings. 5 Check the Include file attachments box. 6 (Optional) To automatically download attachments up to a certain size only, 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L check the Only if smaller than box and enter the maximum attachment size. 7 Press OK To automatically download attachments from an IMAP4 email account (typically an ISP account) or an account that you access using a VPN server connection (typically a work account; see Connecting to a VPN), do the following:
1 Press Messaging
. 2 Do one of the following:
If the account list is displayed: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Options. If the message list for a specific account is displayed: Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Tools >
Options. 3 On the Accounts tab, select the IMAP4 account name. 4 Select Download Size Settings. 5 Select the Message download limit list and select Entire message. 6 Select the Download attachments list and then select either All attachments or one of the size limit options. 7 Press Done (left softkey) twice, and then press OK. DID YOU KNOW? Embedded images and objects cannot be received as attachments unless you have an IMAP4 email account with TNEF disabled. Note that TNEF must be enabled to receive meeting requests. Working with email messages Adding a contact from an email message You can add a contact name or email address to your Contacts list directly from the To, cc, or bcc field of an email message. You can select the name or address from either an outgoing or an incoming message, and you can either create a new contact or add the information to an existing contact. 1 In an open message, press Down to highlight the name or address of the contact you want to add. 2 Press Center
. W O R K I N G W I T H E M A I L M E S S A G E S 115 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L 3 Press Save (left softkey). 4 Highlight <New Contact> and press Select (left softkey) to create a new contact entry for this name or address, or select an existing contact and press Select (left softkey) to add the name or address to that entry. 5 If you are creating a new contact, select the contact type and press Select (left softkey). 6 Enter or edit the contact information. 7 Press Save (left softkey). Adding an online address book Many email servers, including servers running Microsoft Exchange Server, can verify names with an online address book, 116 W O R K I N G W I T H E M A I L M E S S A G E S also called a directory service or a Global Address List (GAL). After you create and enable an email account, the Messaging application checks your contacts list and then the directory service to verify names that you enter in the To, cc, and bcc fields. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following:
Ask your system administrator for the name of the directory service and the server, and whether authentication is required for accessing an online address book. If your company is using Exchange Server 2007 or Exchange Server 2003 upgraded to Service Pack 2, you must first synchronize with the Exchange server to enable the GAL to find a contact.
1 Press Messaging
. 2 Do one of the following:
If the account list is displayed: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Options. If the message list for a specific account is displayed: Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Tools >
Options. 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L 3 Select the Address tab. 4 Select the address book you want to check for email addresses, and then select Add. 5 Enter the name of the directory service. 6 Enter the server name. 7 If your server requires authentication, check the box and enter your username and password. 8 (Optional) Check the Check name against this server box to enable this directory service. 9 Select OK. TIP To delete a directory service, highlight it, press and hold Center on the 5-way, and then select Delete. Using an online address book You can access contact information, such as an email address or phone number, from your organizations online address book or GAL. To access a GAL, make sure you are accessing either Exchange Server 2007 or Exchange Server 2003 upgraded to Service Pack 2. This feature is useful only if you know the exact name as it appears in the directory. DID YOU KNOW? You can use the Global Address List to find a contact. In Contacts, press Menu (right softkey) and select Company Directory. When sending a meeting request, select Attendees, press Menu (right softkey), and select Company Directory. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Add access to an online address book to your smartphone
(see Adding an online address book). 1 In a new message, select the To field. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Add Recipient. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Company Directory. 4 Enter the contact name as it appears in the directory and press Search (left softkey). You must spell the contact name correctly. W O R K I N G W I T H E M A I L M E S S A G E S 117 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L TIP When you sync with Outlook on your computer, disable your online address books to avoid errors. Press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > Options. Select Address, select each online address book, and uncheck the Check name against this server box. Be sure to turn this option back on if you synchronize other email accounts. Finding messages You can find messages containing a specific word or phrase. The find feature searches names, email addresses, and subject lines. 1 Press Messaging 2 Select the account containing the
. message you want to find. 3 Begin typing the word or phrase you want to find. This can appear in any of the address fields or the subject field. The list display changes to show only those messages containing the letters you have entered. 4 Continue entering letters to narrow the display until the message you want appears. 5 Select the message to open it. DID YOU KNOW? If you synchronize with Microsoft Outlook 2007, you can also find messages stored on your mail server. Replying to a message 1 Open the message to which you want to reply. 2 Press Reply (left softkey). 3 Enter any text you want to add. 4 (Optional) Select Edit senders message to edit the original senders message text that you include in your reply. 5 Press Send (left softkey). DID YOU KNOW? If you reply to a message sent as HTML, the reply is sent in HTML also. TIP To reply to both the sender and all other addressees, open the message, press Menu
(right softkey), and select Reply > Reply All. 118 W O R K I N G W I T H E M A I L M E S S A G E S 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L Forwarding a message 1 Open the message you want to forward. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Reply > Forward. 3 Address the message and enter any text you want to add. 4 (Optional) Select Edit senders message to edit the original senders message text that you include in your reply. 5 Press Send (left softkey). Deleting messages You can delete a message you are reading, or you can delete one or more messages from the message list. To delete messages from the message list:
1 Highlight the message(s) you want to delete. To highlight multiple consecutive messages, tap and drag the stylus across the messages in the list. 2 Press Delete (left softkey). 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. To delete all messages at once:
1 Press Menu (left softkey) and select Tools > Clear [account name]. 2 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. Messages you delete are moved to the Deleted Items folder. To remove these items from your smartphone completely, press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > Empty Deleted Items. To delete a message you are reading:
Press Menu (right softkey) and select Sorting your messages You can sort the messages in any folder. Delete. 1 Go to the Inbox or other folder you want to sort. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > Sort By. W O R K I N G W I T H E M A I L M E S S A G E S 119 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L 3 Select Message Type, From (sender), Received (date received), or Subject. Using email shortcuts You can perform common email tasks by pressing and holding certain keys on the keyboard. Highlight or open the message you want, and then press and hold any of the following:
Press and hold... L S To... Fully download a partially downloaded message Synchronize your smartphone with the server to get and send new messages Press and hold... H A R K F M O D To... View all email shortcuts Reply to the sender of a message and all other addressees Reply to the sender only Mark a message read or unread Flag a message for follow-up Move a message between folders Forward a message Delete a message Adding a signature to your outgoing messages You can use a different signature with each email account. DID YOU KNOW? The default signature text for all accounts is Sent from my Treo Pro. 1 Press Messaging
. 2 Do one of the following:
If the account list is displayed: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Options. 120 W O R K I N G W I T H E M A I L M E S S A G E S Y O U R E M A I L If the message list for a specific account is displayed: Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Tools >
Options. 7 Highlight the text in the box at the bottom of the screen, and enter the signature text you want to use. 8 Press OK
. 6 R E T P A H C 3 On the Accounts tab, select Signatures. 4 Select the account for which you want to create a signature. 5 Check the Use signature with this account box to add this signature to new messages you create with this account. 6 (Optional) Check the Use when replying and forwarding box to add this signature to messages you reply to or forward with this account. Customizing your email settings When you customize settings for an email account, the options you choose apply to that account only. 1 Press Messaging
. 2 Do one of the following:
If the account list is displayed: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Options. If the message list for a specific account is displayed: Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Tools >
Options. C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R E M A I L S E T T I N G S 121 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L 3 On the Accounts tab, highlight the account you want and set either of the following options:
TIP If the Display account picker when opening Messaging box is unchecked, repeatedly press Right or Left on the 5-way after you open the Messaging application to cycle through your accounts. 4 Select the Message tab and set any of the following options:
Security: Set whether you receive a warning message before you open a URL or file link that is not on your smartphone. Display account picker when opening Messaging: Set whether a list of your email accounts appears when you open the Messaging application, allowing you to select the one you want to use. If the box is unchecked, the Messaging application opens to the last account you used. When replying to e-mail, include body: Set whether the body of a message you received appears in your response to that message. Keep copies of sent items in Sent folder: Set whether messages you send are stored in the Sent folder. 122 C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R E M A I L S E T T I N G S Warn when deleting messages in the message list: Set whether a confirmation message appears when you delete one or more messages from the message list. After deleting or moving a message:
Set what you want to see after you delete or move an email message you are reading: the account Inbox or the next message. 5 Select the Address tab and set any of the following options:
In Contacts, get e-mail addresses from: Set whether you want to check Contacts in addition to any directory services for email addresses. 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L Check names using these address books: Set which directory services you want to check for email addresses. Add: Enables you to add directory services to the list of online address books. 6 Select the Storage tab and set either of the following options:
When available, use this storage card to store attachments: Set whether you want to automatically store email attachments on an expansion card (sold separately). You must have a card inserted into your smartphones expansion card slot to select this option. C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R E M A I L S E T T I N G S 123 1 Press Messaging
. 2 Do one of the following:
If the account list is displayed: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Options. If the message list for a specific account is displayed: Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Tools >
Options. 3 Select your Outlook email account. TIP If you select the account name and nothing happens, the Messaging application is currently synchronizing messages for that account. Wait until synchronization stops, and select the name again. 4 Select any of the following options:
6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L Empty deleted items: Select Immediately to have the Deleted folder emptied anytime you delete a message. Select On connect/disconnect to have the folder deleted anytime you open or quit the Messaging application. Select Manually to manually empty the Deleted folder. TIP If you choose to manually empty the Deleted folder, you delete messages from this folder in the same way that you delete any other messages (see Deleting messages). 7 Press OK
. Changing email download settings:
Outlook email accounts You can customize the download options for an Outlook email account you synchronize with your computer or with an Exchange server. NOTE To change options for other types of email accounts, see Changing email download settings: Other email accounts. 124 C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R E M A I L S E T T I N G S Y O U R E M A I L Download the past: Sets the number of days worth of email to be retrieved for each automatic or manual sync. exceeds the maximum size, you must download it manually (see Opening attachments). 6 R E T P A H C Message format: Sets the format for sending and receiving messages. If you select HTML, messages sent to you as HTML are received with their formatting intact. If you select Plain Text, all messages are received as plain text. Download size limit: Sets the size of an incoming message that is automatically downloaded. For any message that exceeds this size, you must manually download the rest of the message. Selecting a higher limit means that more of your messages are fully downloaded, but message retrieval might take longer. You can also choose to download message headers only, regardless of size. Include file attachments: Sets whether to download attached files with a message. Only if smaller than: Sets the maximum size of attachments that can be downloaded. If an attachment 5 (Optional) Select Advanced, and then select any of the following options:
Encrypt all outgoing e-mail messages: Sets whether outgoing messages should be encrypted for extra security. Encryption helps prevent eavesdropping, which occurs when a hacker intercepts and reads your email messages. Sign all outgoing e-mail messages:
Sets whether messages should be given a digital signature as an extra security measure. A signature helps prevent impersonation and tampering. C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R E M A I L S E T T I N G S 125 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L Choose Certificate: Sets the certificate to use as a digital signature. My e-mail addresses: Sets the addresses to which the security measures should be applied. 6 Press OK
. If the message list for a specific account is displayed: Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Tools >
Options. 3 Select the email account you want, and press Center
. Changing email download settings: Other email accounts You can customize the download options for each email account that you have with an Internet service provider (ISP) or that you access using a VPN server connection
(typically a work account). NOTE To change options for a Microsoft Office Outlook E-mail account, see Changing email download settings:
Outlook email accounts. 1 Press Messaging
. 2 Do one of the following:
If the account list is displayed: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Options. TIP If you select the account name and nothing happens, the Messaging application is currently synchronizing messages for that account. Wait until synchronization stops, and select the name again. 4 Select Send/Receive Schedule. 5 Select either of the following:
Automatic Send/Receive: Sets the time interval for automatically 126 C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R E M A I L S E T T I N G S 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L downloading email, from every 5 minutes to once a day. If you do not want to automatically download messages, select Manually. Download messages: Sets the number of days worth of email to be retrieved for each automatic or manual retrieval. TIP To save memory, limit the number of emails that are downloaded to your smartphone by selecting a larger time interval for automatically downloading messages or a smaller time interval for how many days worth of messages are downloaded. 6 Select Advanced Settings, and then select any of the following:
Send/receive when I click Send: Sets whether you can manually send and receive messages, in addition to automatically downloading them. Use automatic send/receive schedule when roaming: Sets whether automatic downloading takes place when you are roaming. This may result in higher connection charges than downloading while in your home network. When deleting messages: Sets whether messages should be deleted from the mail server when you delete them on your smartphone, or whether messages you delete on your smartphone should remain on the server. 7 Press Done (left softkey) twice. 8 Select Download Size Settings. C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R E M A I L S E T T I N G S 127 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L 9 Select either of the following:
Message format: Sets the format for sending and receiving messages. If you select HTML, messages sent to you as HTML are received with their formatting intact. If you select Plain Text, all messages are received as plain text. DID YOU KNOW? Messages sent to you as plain text are always received as plain text, even if you select HTML. 128 C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R E M A I L S E T T I N G S Message download limit: Sets the size of an incoming message that is automatically downloaded. For any message that exceeds this size, you must manually download the rest of the message. Selecting a higher limit means that more of your messages will be fully downloaded, but message retrieval might take longer. You can also choose to download message headers only, regardless of size. 10 Press Done (left softkey). Selecting which folders sync: Outlook email accounts When you synchronize Outlook email either using the USB cable or wirelessly with an Exchange server, messages in the following folders sync by default: Inbox, Outbox, Drafts, Sent, and Deleted Items. You can set other folders to sync, or turn off sync for certain folders. 1 Press Messaging 2 Select your Outlook email account. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Manage Folders. 4 Check the box next to any folder name to sync that folder. Uncheck the box to remove that folder from synchronization. If the folder name does not have a box next to it, the folder syncs by default and you cannot turn off synchronization for that folder. 5 (Optional) If a + appears next to a folder name, that folder contains subfolders. Tap the + to display the subfolders, and check or uncheck the box next to any subfolder name to include or remove it from synchronization. 6 Press OK
. 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L Working with meeting invitations You can receive meeting invitations on your smartphone in the same way that you receive email messages. NOTE Use the Calendar application to create meeting invitations on your smartphone; see Sending a meeting request. Here are the key features of meeting invitations:
Meeting invitations appear on your smartphone in the Messaging application, and will also appear in the Calendar application as tentative until you accept.
From within the Messaging application, you can accept, decline, or tentatively accept a meeting invitation. If you accept an invitation, the meeting shows up as an appointment in the Calendar application.
W O R K I N G W I T H M E E T I N G I N V I T A T I O N S 129 6 R E T P A H C Y O U R E M A I L
You can reply to and forward meeting invitations in the same way as email messages. 1 Press Messaging 2 Select the account you want. 3 Select a meeting invitation to open it. Meeting invitations are displayed with this icon:
. 4 Do one of the following:
To accept the invitation: Press Accept (left softkey), select whether to edit (include comments with) your response, and then select OK. To decline or tentatively accept the invitation: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Decline or Tentative. You can also use menu items to propose a new time, reply to the sender, and flag the invitation for follow-up. TIP If you receive an updated meeting invitation, you can again choose to accept, decline, or tentatively accept. If you receive a meeting cancellation, you dont need to do anything. Sending email messages from within another application You can send files such as pictures, videos, and ringtones as attachments to email messages (see Creating and sending an email message). You can send certain files as attachments from within the application where the file is created or stored. For example, if you take a picture with the camera on your smartphone, you can select an option to send the picture as an attachment to an email message. You can also use this feature with videos and sound files. For details, see the chapter on the specific application. 130 S E N D I N G E M A I L M E S S A G E S F R O M W I T H I N A N O T H E R A P P L I C A T I O N Your text and multimedia messages If you need to get a short message to a friend or a co-worker fast, send a text message from your Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm to their mobile phone or email address. If you need more than text to express yourself, use multimedia messaging to give your message extra impact by adding a photo, video, or sound file. Benefits
Enjoy quick communication
Use text messaging to chat with friends
Share pictures and videos
Be as simple or as creative as you want CHAPTER 7 131 In this chapter Sending and receiving text and multimedia messages . 133 Setting message preferences . 145 Using Windows LiveTM. 146 7 R E T P A H C Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S BEFORE YOU BEGIN
Before you use your smartphone to send or receive messages, consult your wireless service provider for pricing and availability of text messaging services.
Make sure that your phone is on and that youre inside a coverage area (see Turning your phone on). 1 Press Messaging 2 Select SMS\MMS. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select New > SMS. 4 Enter the recipients name, mobile phone number, or email address:
Sending and receiving text and multimedia messages You can use the Messaging application to send and receive brief text messages
(SMS) and multimedia messages (MMS). Creating and sending a text message Each text message can have up to 160 characters. You can send a message of more than 160 characters, but the message may be split into several messages. If you send a text message to an email address, the email address is deducted from the 160-character count. DID YOU KNOW? You can send and receive text messages even while you are on a phone call. This is easiest when using a hands-free headset or the speakerphone.
Enter the first letters of the recipients first or last name, the first and last initials separated by a space, or the S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S 133 7 R E T P A H C Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S email address. If a match is found in your Contacts list, select the name.
If the recipients name is in an online address book, you can find the name and add it. See Using an online address book. TIP To add a new My Text phrase, select Edit My Text Messages in the list. TIP Some symbols cant be used in text messages. Invalid characters are automatically replaced by the Messaging application.
If the recipients name and mobile 7 (Optional) To attach a file to the number are not in your Contacts list, enter the full mobile number or email address. message, press Menu (right softkey), select Insert, and then select the file type you want to insert.
Separate addresses with a semicolon (;). Enter a semicolon by pressing Option
+ K.
Need to enter an underscore? Press and select the character. Its Alt the third character in the list. 5 To confirm that the addresses you entered are valid, press Menu (right softkey) and select Check Names. An alert appears if any names or address youve entered are not valid. 6 Enter your message, or press Menu
(right softkey), select My Text, and then select a predefined phrase you want to insert. DID YOU KNOW? A vCard is a Contact entry. A vCalendar is a Calendar appointment or a task. DID YOU KNOW? If you attach a file to a text message, you can convert it to a multimedia message. Press Menu (right softkey), select Advanced Composer, and then see Creating and sending a multimedia message for instructions. 8 (Optional) Press Menu (right softkey) and select Spell Check. 9 (Optional) To receive a notification that the message has been delivered, press Menu (right softkey), select Message 134 S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S Options, and check the Request message delivery notification box. 10 Press Send (left softkey). TIP Press Menu (right softkey) and select Save to Drafts if you need to finish composing your message later. Previewing a message with an attached file When you attach a file to a message, you can preview the message and view detailed information about the attached file. If you are sending the message to a contact, you can also view information about the contact. 1 Create a message and attach a file to it
(see Creating and sending a text message). 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Preview. 3 Do either of the following. Press when you have finished. OK Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S 7 R E T P A H C
To view detailed information about the message, press Menu (right softkey) and select Show > Message Detail.
To view detailed information about a recipient who is in your Contacts list, press Menu (right softkey) and select Show > Contact Details. TIP When you have a contacts details displayed, press Menu (right softkey) to see several other options, like permanently blocking future messages from this contact. 4 To view detailed information about the attached file, press Contents (left softkey), and then press Properties (left softkey). S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S 135 7 R E T P A H C Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S TIP When you are viewing a messages contents, press Menu (right softkey) to see several other options, like saving the attached file with a new name. 5 Press OK message. until you return to the Creating and sending a multimedia message Multimedia messages consist of pictures, videos, text, and sounds presented as one or more slides. You can include any of the following items:
Ringtones: MIDI Sound clips: AMR, WAV Pictures: JPG, GIF, BMP Videos: 3GPP, 3GPP2, MPEG4 Outgoing multimedia messages can be up to 2.0MB by default, but your wireless service provider may have a different maximum message size. IMPORTANT If your smartphone is enrolled with a Microsoft System Center Mobile Device Manager server, you cannot send and receive multimedia messages from your smartphone. BEFORE YOU BEGIN
Before you use your smartphone to send or receive messages, consult your wireless service provider for pricing and availability of multimedia messaging services.
Make sure that your phone is on and that youre inside a coverage area (see Turning your phone on). 1 Press Messaging 2 Select SMS\MMS. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select New > Picture Message or Video Message. 4 Select an existing picture or video, or select Custom to start with a blank MMS layout. 136 S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S 7 R E T P A H C Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S
Separate addresses with a semicolon (;). Enter a semicolon by pressing Option
+ K.
Need to enter an underscore? Press and select the character. Its Alt the third character in the list. TIP To display the Cc and Bcc address fields, navigate to the To field and press Up on the 5-way. 6 Select Subject and enter a title for the message. 7 If you selected Custom in step 4, tap one or more of the following:
Insert photo/video: Enables you to insert a photo or video. You can take a new picture or video with the built-in camera or insert an existing item. Insert text here: Enables you to enter a text caption or message for the slide you inserted. You can also tap any of the following icons:
Insert an emoticon. Insert a web favorite. 5 Enter the recipients mobile phone number or email address:
Enter the first letters of the recipients first or last name, the first and last initials separated by a space, or the email address. If a match is found in your Contacts list, select the name.
If the recipients name is in an online address book, you can find the name and add it (see Using an online address book).
If the recipients name and mobile number are not in your Contacts list, enter the full mobile number or email address. S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S 137 7 R E T P A H C Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S Insert a predefined phrase. 8 (Optional) Press Menu (right softkey) Insert a Contacts entry. Insert a Calendar appointment or task. Press Done (left softkey) when you have finished. TIP On the text entry screen, select menu items for text size and color and for the background color. Insert audio: Enables you to record a message, such as a voice caption for a picture, or to insert an existing sound, such as a ringtone. To record a new sound, tap the record icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, select Record, and record the sound. Select Add when you have finished recording. TIP To remove an inserted item, press Menu
(right softkey), select Remove, and then select the item you want to remove. and select Slides > Insert Slide. Repeat this step to add additional slides. TIP If you add more than one slide to a message, tap the arrows in the lower-right corner of the screen to scroll among the slides. To delete a slide, scroll to the slide you want, press Menu (right softkey), and select Slides > Delete Slide. 9 (Optional) To add a vCard (Contacts entry), vCalendar (Calendar appointment or task), or other file type to a message, press Menu (right softkey) and select Attachment. Press Menu (right softkey) again and select the type of file you want to add. Press OK to return to the message after you finish adding attachments. TIP To remove an attachment, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Attachment. Highlight an attachment, press Menu (right softkey), and select Delete. To remove all attachments, press Menu (right softkey) and select Delete All. 138 S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S 10 To change the background color for the message, press Menu (right softkey), select Options, select Background, and then select the color you want. 11 To change the positioning of text and graphics in the message, press Menu
(right softkey), select Options, and then select Text Layout. Select the positioning that you want, and press Done (left softkey). 12 Press Send (left softkey). TIP You can send your message as a text message. This may save on data charges, but you may lose some formatting, and the message text may be truncated. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Send via SMS. TIP To save your message as a template for future messages, press Menu (right softkey) and select Template > Save as Template. Organizing slides within a multimedia message If your message contains more than one slide, you can change the order of the slides and change the duration for each slide during playback. Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S 1 On the message compose screen, press Menu (right softkey) and select Slides > Organize Slides. 7 R E T P A H C 2 Do any of the following:
Move a slide: Highlight the slide, press Menu (right softkey), and select Move Forward or Move Backward. Change display time for slides: Tap a black arrow beneath a slide to increase or decrease the duration. The minimum duration is two seconds. Insert slides: Press Insert (left softkey). Remove slides: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Delete. 3 Press OK
. S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S 139 7 R E T P A H C Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S Setting options for an outgoing multimedia message You can set send options for a single multimedia message. You can also set options for all multimedia messages you send and receive (see Customizing settings for text messages). 1 Press Messaging 2 Select SMS\MMS. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select
. New > Video Message or Picture Message. 4 Select Custom to create your own message, or select a template. 5 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Options > Send Options. 6 Select the message priority: High, Normal, or Low. TIP To set the priority option you select as the default for all outgoing multimedia messages, press Menu (right softkey) and select Set as default. To restore the original default settings, press Menu (right softkey) and select Restore factory default. 7 Press Done (left softkey). Receiving text messages When your phone is on and you are in a wireless coverage area, you automatically receive new text messages. When a new message notification appears, select one of the following options:
Reply (left softkey): Opens the message in chat view so you can view its full contents and reply to the sender (see Using Messaging to chat). 140 S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S 7 R E T P A H C Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S Menu (right softkey) > Delete: Deletes the new message. Hide (left softkey): Dismisses the notification. Menu (right softkey) > Call sender: Dials the senders phone number. Menu (right softkey) > Save as read: Puts the message in your SMS\MMS Inbox as read. Menu (right softkey) > Dismiss:
Dismisses the notification and puts the message in your SMS\MMS Inbox as unread. If you have multiple messages, the notification includes the number of messages. Receiving multimedia messages You can set your smartphone to automatically download new multimedia messages or to notify you that messages are ready to download. When a new message notification appears, select one of the following options:
Menu (right softkey) > View: Opens the message in chat view so you can view its full contents and reply to the sender (see Using Messaging to chat). Menu (right softkey) > Dismiss:
Dismisses the notification and puts the message into your SMS\MMS Inbox as unread. If you have multiple messages, the notification includes the number of messages. Viewing a text message To open a text message, do one of the following:
Press Messaging and select SMS\MMS. From the Inbox, select the message you want to view.
From a notification, select Reply. The message opens in chat view so you can view its full contents and reply to the sender (see Using Messaging to chat). S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S 141 7 R E T P A H C Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S Viewing a multimedia message 1 To open a multimedia message, do one of the following:
Press Messaging and select SMS\MMS. From the Inbox, select the message you want to view.
From a notification, press Menu (right softkey) and select View. The message opens in chat view, displaying the sender and subject (see Using Messaging to chat). 2 Select the message in chat view to view the full message with any inserted images or files. 3 With the message open, do any of the following:
Forward the message: Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Forward. Reply to the message: Press Menu
(right softkey), select Reply, and then select a reply method: Picture Message, Video Message, or SMS. View detailed information about the message: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Show > Message Detail. View detailed information about a recipient who is in your Contacts list:
Press Menu (right softkey) and select Show > Contact Details. TIP When you have a contacts details displayed, press Menu (right softkey) to see several other options, like permanently blocking future messages from this contact. View detailed information about the attached file: Press Contents (left softkey), and then press Properties (left softkey). 142 S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S 7 R E T P A H C 4 Enter your message. You can use any of the menu commands described in Creating and sending a text message. 5 Press Send (left softkey). 6 If an incoming message has a file attached, it appears in the chat list with this icon:
open it and view the attachment. Select the message to 7 To close the chat session and return to the account Inbox, press OK
. NOTE In the Inbox, all messages from a chat session are displayed as one item: a single conversation. To view individual messages within the conversation, select it to reopen the chat session. TIP When you are viewing a messages contents, press Menu (right softkey) to see several other options, like saving the attached file with a new name. DID YOU KNOW? When viewing a multimedia message containing multiple slides, you can press Right on the 5-way to move to the next slide, or press Left on the 5-way to move to the previous slide. 4 Press OK
. Using Messaging to chat When you exchange more than one message with a single contact, the messages you exchange with that person are grouped into a chat session. When you select a chat session from your message list, the upper part of the screen displays all messages youve exchanged with this contact, and the lower part provides a text entry area. 1 Press Messaging 2 Select SMS\MMS. 3 To start a new chat or continue an
. existing chat, select the message to which you want to reply. The message opens in chat view. S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S 143 7 R E T P A H C Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S DID YOU KNOW? While chat view remains open, any new messages you receive from your chat partner appear directly on the screen, and you do not get a new message notification. Using links in messages When you receive a text message that contains a telephone number, email address, or URL, you can dial the number, send an email message, or go to the web page immediately. Your smartphone automatically opens the appropriate application from the link. 1 Open a message in the Inbox or another folder. 2 Use the 5-way to select the phone number, email address, or URL (appears as underlined blue text). 3 For phone numbers, confirm or change the number and press Call (left softkey). If you receive a multimedia message that contains a phone number, email address, or URL, tap the item to open a menu of actions you can perform. Adding a contact from a message You can add a contact name, phone number, or email address to your Contacts list directly from a received message. You can either create a new contact or add the information to an existing contact. 1 In an open message or chat session, select the name, phone number, or address of the contact you want to add. 2 Select Yes. 3 Select <New Contact> and press Select (left softkey) to create a new contact entry for this name or address, or select an existing contact to add the name or address to that entry. 4 Enter or edit the contact information. 5 Press Save (left softkey). 144 S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S 7 R E T P A H C Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S Sorting your messages You can sort the messages in any folder. 1 Go to the Inbox or other folder you want to sort. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > Sort By. 3 Select Message Type, From (sender), Received (date received), or Subject. Deleting messages 1 Go to the Inbox or other folder containing the message you want to delete. 2 Do one of the following:
To delete one message, highlight it. NOTE If you highlight a conversation containing multiple messages, all the chat messages are marked for deletion.
To delete all messages at once, press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools
> Clear SMS\MMS and skip to step 4. 3 Press Delete (left softkey). 4 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. Messages you delete are moved to the Deleted Items folder. To remove these items from your smartphone completely, press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > Empty Deleted Items. Setting message preferences You can set options for both text and multimedia messages in the Messaging application. You can set options for all messages and for multimedia messages only. You can also set send options for a single text message (see Creating and sending a text message) and for a single multimedia message (see Setting options for an outgoing multimedia message). Customizing settings for text messages 1 Press Messaging 2 Select SMS\MMS. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select
. New > SMS. S E T T I N G M E S S A G E P R E F E R E N C E S 145 7 R E T P A H C Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S 4 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Message Options. 5 Select either or both of the following:
Using Windows LiveTM NOTE Windows LiveTM is not supported by all wireless service providers. Windows Live is a set of services that combines online search features, email, and instant messaging:
Live Search: Enables you to search for text on the web directly from your smartphone. Windows Live Mail: The next generation of the Hotmail web-based email application. Windows Live Mail offers more storage, greater message security, and easier filing of messages. Windows Live Messenger: Enables you to see whos online and exchange instant messages (IM). Make calls to phones and computers (including video calls) and exchange pictures and other files. Request delivery notifications:
Indicates whether you want to receive a confirmation when a message is delivered. Always send a callback number:
Includes a callback number to include with your messages 6 Press OK
. 146 U S I N G W I N D O W S L I V E T M Using Live Search Live Search is displayed by default on your Today screen. 1 If necessary, press End to go to the Today screen. 2 In the search bar, enter the text you
. want to find. 3 Press Center 4 Select the item you want from the search results. If the item you want does not appear, select More to see more results. Setting up Windows Live Mail BEFORE YOU BEGIN You must have an existing Windows Live, MSN, or Hotmail account to use Windows Live Mail. If you do not have an account, use the web browser on your smartphone to go to hotmail.com, and follow the steps you find there to set up an account. 1 Press Start 2 Select Windows Live
. and select Programs. Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S 3 Select Sign in to Windows Live. 7 R E T P A H C NOTE If you are roaming when setting up Windows Live Mail, the smartphone will ask you if Windows Live can be used while roaming, and inform you that this may incur extra charges. The check boxes are enabled by default, so if you dont want Windows Live to be enabled while roaming, uncheck the boxes and press Done (right softkey). 4 The first time you sign in to Windows Live, press Accept (left softkey). 5 Enter your Windows Live, MSN, or Hotmail email address and password. Leave the Save password box checked if you want to have your password entered automatically. U S I N G W I N D O W S L I V E T M 147 Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S 7 R E T P A H C 8 Press Next (left softkey). 9 Select any of the following:
6 Press Next (left softkey). 7 Check the Live Search bar box to have the Live Search bar appear on your Today screen, if it doesnt already. Check the Windows Live services box to have Windows Live Email and Windows Live Messenger appear on your Today screen. Store Windows Live contacts in your mobile phones contact list: Sets whether you want your Windows Live contacts to appear in Contacts. If you do not check this box, only your Windows Live email messages are synchronized with your smartphone. Merge duplicate contacts: Sets whether you want to merge any synchronized Windows Live contact with any duplicate contact thats already in Contacts, so that there is only one entry for this contact. If you leave the box unchecked, two entries appear for any duplicate entry in Contacts. 148 U S I N G W I N D O W S L I V E T M Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S Sync e-mail: Sets whether you want to download your Windows Live Mail messages to your smartphone (see Using Windows Live Mail.
Press Center
. Information is synchronized for any of the applications you selected during setup. 7 R E T P A H C 10 Press Next (left softkey). Synchronization of Windows Live email and contacts (if selected) takes place. After synchronization has finished, your most recently received email message is displayed. Using Windows Live Mail BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure that your phone is on and that youre inside a coverage area (see Turning your phone on). and select Programs. 1 Press Start 2 Select Windows Live 3 To synchronize email, contact, and/or
. Windows Live Messenger information, do the following:
Press Down to move the highlight to the field directly beneath the Live Search bar.
Press Right or Left until Sync appears. 4 To read your email, do the following:
With the same field highlighted, press or Left Right Live Hotmail appears. until Windows
Press Center
. The Messaging application opens, displaying your Windows Live Hotmail Inbox. You can view, send, and work with messages in your Windows Live Hotmail account in the same way as with messages for any other account. DID YOU KNOW? You can also access your Windows Live Hotmail Inbox by opening the Messaging application and selecting your Windows Live Hotmail email account. TIP You can set an option to have messages pushed to Windows Live Mail on your smartphone as they arrive on the server. Open Windows Live, press Menu (right softkey), and select Options. Select Sync schedule, select the Sync frequency list, and then select As items arrive. U S I N G W I N D O W S L I V E T M 149 7 R E T P A H C Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S Using Windows Live Messenger BEFORE YOU BEGIN
You must have an existing Windows Live, MSN, or Hotmail account to use Windows Live Messenger. If you do not have an account, use the web browser on your smartphone to go to hotmail.com, and follow the steps to set up an account.
Make sure that your phone is on and that youre inside a coverage area (see Turning your phone on). and select Programs. 1 Press Start 2 Select Messenger 3 Press Sign in (left softkey). 4 If you have not already set up a
. TIP If the contact you want is offline, send an email message instead. Highlight the contact name and press Send e-mail (left softkey). Enter a subject and body text for the email message and press Send (left softkey). 7 Do one of the following:
Windows Live Mail account on your smartphone (see Setting up Windows Live Mail), the first time you sign in to Windows Live Messenger, press Accept (left softkey). 5 If prompted, enter your Windows Live, MSN, or Hotmail email address and password. 6 To send an instant message to a contact who is online, highlight the contact name and press Send IM (left softkey).
*
* Text entry bar 150 U S I N G W I N D O W S L I V E T M 7 R E T P A H C Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S
Highlight the text entry bar and enter 10 (Optional) To exchange messages with your message text.
Press Voice clip (left softkey) and record a voice note by speaking clearly with your smartphone held up facing you. 8 (Optional) To add an emoticon to your message, press Menu (right softkey), select Add emoticon, and then select the emoticon you want. 9 (Optional) To send a picture or other file, press Menu (right softkey), select Send, and then select the type of file you want to send. Capture or select the picture or other file you want. more than one person, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Options >
Add participant. Select the participant you want to add. 11 To end the messaging session, press Menu (right softkey) and select End conversation. If you are exchanging messages with more than one person, select End all conversations to stop all the sessions at once. TIP From the Messenger contacts list screen, press Menu (right softkey) and select options to add, block, or remove a contact; change your status to Busy, Away, and so on; add a display picture or personal message; and more. U S I N G W I N D O W S L I V E T M 151 Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S 7 R E T P A H C 152 U S I N G W I N D O W S L I V E T M Your connections to the web and wireless devices You use the web for so many things: finding driving directions, getting news, buying gifts, checking web-based email. With your wireless service providers network and your smartphones web browser, you can take the web with you almost anywhere you go. The Bluetooth wireless technology on your Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm helps you easily set up wireless connections to a number of devices. You can also use your smartphone to connect your computer to the Internet and to share contacts or your favorite photos. Or use the Wi-Fi feature to connect to a public, work, or home network. Benefits
Carry the web with you
Enjoy cable-free connectivity:
Connect to Bluetooth headsets and car kits
Connect your computer to the Internet through your smartphone
Choose the method of connecting to the Internet thats most convenient for you CHAPTER 8 153 In this chapter Browsing the web . 155 Getting online travel information and tools. 163 Connecting to a Wi-Fi network . 164 Connecting to devices with Bluetooth wireless technology . 173 Using your device as a modem . 177 8 R E T P A H C Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S Browsing the web Internet Explorer Mobile provides quick and easy access to web pages. You can view most sites on your smartphone that you can view on your computer, including those with security and advanced features, such as JavaScript and frames. Internet Explorer Mobile supports JavaScript, Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), cookies, and the Flash plug-in, but does not support other plug-ins (Shockwave, VBScript, WML script, and so on) or Java applets. TIP For additional information on features supported by Internet Explorer Mobile, visit microsoft.com. DID YOU KNOW? The Security certificates and 128-bit SSL strong encryption enable you to browse secure sites, such as online shopping, banking, and email. Remember that some secure sites also require a specific browser and may not work with Internet Explorer Mobile. Ask the organization for an alternate web address (URL) that is compatible with Internet Explorer Mobile. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following:
Be sure to subscribe to data services from your wireless service provider. This is necessary for browsing the web.
Make sure your phone is on and that
youre inside a coverage area (see Turning your phone on). If you have access to a Wi-Fi network, verify that Wi-Fi is on and gather any necessary network connection settings
(see Connecting to a Wi-Fi network). Viewing a web page By default, Internet Explorer Mobile scales web page content to fit your smartphone screen so that you can view most of the information without scrolling left or right. This is referred to as Mobile Mode. If you want to view the website as you would on a desktop computer screen, you can change to Desktop Mode (see Customizing your Internet Explorer Mobile settings). DID YOU KNOW? You can also start a web search from your Today screen by selecting the Live search field, entering the item you want to find, and pressing Center on the 5-way. B R O W S I N G T H E W E B 155 8 R E T P A H C Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S 1 Press Start and select Internet 3 (Optional) Press Menu (right softkey), Explorer. TIP If your Today screen is displayed, press Internet (right softkey) to open Internet Explorer Mobile. 2 Highlight the address line, enter the address of the web page you want to view, and press Center a recently viewed page, select the address line list, and then select the web address. To return to DID YOU KNOW? If you browse to a secure web page, the lock icon in the address line appears closed instead of open. select View, and then select one of the following:
Full Screen: Hides the status and navigation areas and fills the entire screen with the web page. To exit full screen mode, press the right softkey, or tap and hold anywhere on the screen and uncheck Full Screen. Mobile: Maintains a layout similar to what you see on a desktop computer, but it makes items smaller and arranges the content so that you can see most of it without scrolling horizontally. Desktop: Keeps the same layout and size as on a desktop computer, which requires both horizontal and vertical scrolling. Use this mode to view embedded videos on websites and other content that doesnt display well in Mobile mode. 4 Press OK to close Internet Explorer Mobile. 156 B R O W S I N G T H E W E B 8 R E T P A H C Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S Navigating web pages Here are some tips on viewing web pages and moving around in them:
To zoom out to see more of the page at a reduced magnification: Press Menu >
Zoom Out. View the previous page: Press Back (left softkey) or Backspace
. Move forward through viewed pages after having moved back to a previous page: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Forward. Go to your home page: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Home Page. Refresh a page: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Refresh. Send email from a web page: Select the address link. You need to configure an email application on your smartphone before you can use this feature (see Your email). Adjust text size: Press Menu (right softkey), select View > Text Size, and then select the size you want. View page properties: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > Properties. View items in a list: Highlight the list, press Center
, and then scroll using Up or Down
. Interact with a form: Press Center interact with the form, and then press Center the form. again to stop interacting with to Move the pointer around the screen without using the stylus: Press Up Down directions.
, or Right
, Left to scroll in all
, Follow a link: Use the 5-way to position the pointer over the link, and then press to go to the selected page. You Center can also tap the link on the screen with the stylus. Send a link: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > Send Link. Select the option you want to use to send the link:
SMS\MMS (text message), Video Message (multimedia message), Picture Message (multimedia message), or an email account. B R O W S I N G T H E W E B 157 8 R E T P A H C Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S Creating a favorite Favorites let you bookmark a web page so that you can instantly access it without entering the web address. BEFORE YOU BEGIN First, create the folders where you want to store your favorites first. After you create a favorite, you cannot move it to another folder (see Organizing your favorites). 1 Go to the page you want to mark as a favorite. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Favorites. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) again, and select Add Favorite. 5 Select Address (URL) and enter the address of the favorite you are creating. 6 Select Folder, and then select the folder where you want to create the favorite. 7 Select Add. TIP To delete a favorite or folder, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Favorites. Highlight the folder or favorite, and then press Menu again. Highlight Delete and press Center. Select Yes to confirm the deletion, and press OK. Viewing a favorite 1 Press Start Explorer. and select Internet 2 Press Menu (right softkey), highlight Favorites, and then press Center
. TIP When you first open Internet Explorer, press Favorites (left softkey) to view your favorites. 3 Select the page you want to view in the list, and then press Open (left softkey). 4 Select Name and enter a description. 158 B R O W S I N G T H E W E B 8 R E T P A H C Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S Organizing your favorites You can create folders to organize your favorites. For example, you can store travel links in one folder, stock links in another, and business links in a third folder. To download any other type of file:
Tap and hold on the link to the file with the stylus, and then select Save Target As. 3 Select Name and enter a new name for 1 Press Start and select Internet the file. Explorer. 2 Press Menu (right softkey), highlight Favorites, and then press Center
. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) again, and then select New Folder. 4 Enter a name for this folder and select Add (left softkey). Downloading files and images from a web page You can download files that are usable on your smartphone, such as new applications, MIDI ringtones, or pictures. 1 Go to the page that contains the link to the file you want to download. 2 Do one of the following:
To download a picture: Tap and hold on the image with the stylus, and select Save Image As. 4 Select the Folder list, and then select the folder where you want to save the file. 5 Select the Type list, and then select the file type you want to save the file as. 6 Select the Location list, and then select where you want to store the file: Main memory or Storage card. The Storage card option appears only if you have an expansion card (sold separately) inserted into your smartphone. 7 Select Save. Copying text from a web page You can copy text from a web page and paste it into other applications. 1 Press Menu (right softkey) > Copy/
Paste > Make Selection. 2 Use the stylus to highlight the text you want to copy. B R O W S I N G T H E W E B 159 8 R E T P A H C Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S 3 Press Copy (left softkey). 4 Go to the application in which you want to paste the text, and then position the cursor where you want to paste the text. Customizing your Internet Explorer Mobile settings 1 Press Menu (right softkey) > Tools >
Options. 2 Select Homepage and press Open (left 5 Press Menu (right softkey) > Copy/
softkey). Paste > Paste. 3 Select one of the following:
TIP If Internet Explorer Mobile does not recognize a phone number as dialable, you can copy the phone number (as text) and paste it into the phone Keypad. Returning to recently viewed pages The History list stores the addresses of the pages you visited recently. 1 Press Menu (right softkey) > History. 2 Use Up to highlight an or Down entry in the History list. 3 Press Open (left softkey). 160 B R O W S I N G T H E W E B Default Home page: Sets your home page to the default page assigned by your wireless service provider. Current page: Sets your home page to the web page currently open in Internet Explorer Mobile. Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S Custom page: Sets your home page to the address you enter in the text field. 7 Press Done (left softkey). 8 Select Languages and press Open (left 4 Press Done (left softkey). 5 Select Privacy and Security and press Open (left softkey). softkey). 8 R E T P A H C 6 Select any of the following:
Enable scripts: Allows scripts to run in pages you visit. Enable cookies: Allows websites to save cookies on your device. Warn when changing to an unsecured page. 9 Select the default Language and Encoding method for websites you visit, and whether a website can automatically select these values for you. 10 Press Done (left softkey). 11 Select Other and press Open (left softkey). B R O W S I N G T H E W E B 161 Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S 8 R E T P A H C 12 Select how you want the browser to behave:
Mobile Device or Desktop Computer:
The browser identifies itself as either a mobile device or a standard desktop computer, which affects whether websites send content scaled to fit your mobile screen. The default display mode is Mobile Device. Play Sounds: When checked, the browser will play any sounds embedded in websites. Show Pictures: Uncheck this option to disable pictures and images on websites, which can improve loading speeds. 162 B R O W S I N G T H E W E B 13 Press Done (left softkey). 14 Press Close (right softkey). Clearing temporary Internet files, cookies, and browsing history 1 Press Menu (right softkey) > Tools >
Options. 2 Select Browsing History and press Open (left softkey). 3 Select Temporary Files, Cookies, or History, and then press Clear (right softkey). 4 Press Done (left softkey). 5 Press Close (right softkey). 8 R E T P A H C Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S Getting online travel information and tools With WorldMate, you can gain access to your travel itinerary details, global weather forecasts, world clocks, currency, clothing size and measurement converters, a tip and tax calculator, and more. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following:
Be sure to subscribe to data services from your wireless service provider. This is necessary for browsing the web.
Make sure your phone is on and that
youre inside a coverage area (see Turning your phone on). If you have access to a Wi-Fi network, verify that Wi-Fi is on and gather any necessary network connection settings
(see Connecting to a Wi-Fi network). Downloading the WorldMate application 1 Press Start and select Programs. 2 Select Get WorldMate Pro 3 Follow the onscreen instructions to
. download and install the software. and select Programs. Using WorldMate 1 Press Start
. 2 Select WorldMate 3 Press Next (left softkey). 4 The first time you open the app, press Accept (left softkey). 5 Enter your email address, and then enter it again to confirm it. 6 Make up and enter a password of your choice. This does not need to be your email account password. 7 Press Submit (left softkey). 8 Select the city nearest to your home city. 9 Press Next (left softkey). G E T T I N G O N L I N E T R A V E L I N F O R M A T I O N A N D T O O L S 163 8 R E T P A H C Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S 10 Select any of the WorldMate features:
Weather Center, Flight Center, My Itinerary, Travel Tools, or Converters. Connecting to a Wi-Fi network Many environments, such as corporate offices, coffee shops, airports, and libraries, offer access to a Wi-Fi network. A Wi-Fi network is a wireless local area network
(WLAN) based on the 802.11 standard. When youre within range of an accessible Wi-Fi network, you can use your smartphones Wi-Fi feature to connect to that network and access the web. KEY TERM Wi-Fi access point Also called a hotspot. A network device with an antenna that provides wireless connections to a larger network. Why use a Wi-Fi connection?
A Wi-Fi connection is especially helpful in the following situations:
Youre outside a coverage area and you want to access the web.
Your wireless service providers plan incurs additional charges for data services and you want to minimize data NOTE For each feature, some options are available to WorldMate Professional subscribers only. WorldMate Professional is a paid service. To subscribe, select Go Pro. TIP From any screen, press Menu (right softkey) and select Options to set the interval for automatically updating weather and other information, set the temperature display format, and set whether to automatically preview your itinerary. 164 C O N N E C T I N G T O A W I - F I N E T W O R K 8 R E T P A H C Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S service charges by using a Wi-Fi connection instead.
Youre inside a coverage area but outside your wireless service providers EVDO or 1X coverage area. (A Wi-Fi connection may provide faster throughput than an EVDO or 1X data connection.)
You want to maintain a web connection while talking on the phone. Are there different types of Wi-Fi networks?
There are two types of Wi-Fi networks:
Open networks: These networks broadcast their name (SSID) and do not require you to enter a password or other settings. To learn how to connect to an open network, see Connecting to an open network. Secure networks: These networks may broadcast their name, but at the very least, they require you to enter a password that you get from an administrator (who may be, for example, the librarian or the person behind the counter at the coffee shop). You may also have to get other network settings from the system administrator. To learn how to connect to a secure network, see Connecting to a secure network. If youve already set up a connection to a secure network and want to reconnect to it, follow the steps in Connecting to an open network. Turning the Wi-Fi feature on and off BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your smartphone screen is on (see Waking up the screen and turning it off).
To turn Wi-Fi on, press Wi-Fi
(on the side of your smartphone near the stylus slot).
To turn Wi-Fi off, press and hold Wi-Fi
. When Wi-Fi is on, your Today screen displays Wi-Fi: Available. TIP By default, when your screen turns off, the Wi-Fi feature turns off to save power. Wi-Fi does not turn back on automatically when your screen turns back on. You can adjust the Wi-Fi settings to keep Wi-Fi on all the time. See Customizing Wi-Fi settings for details. C O N N E C T I N G T O A W I - F I N E T W O R K 165 8 R E T P A H C Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S Connecting to an open network You can connect to an open network or to a secure network for which you have already set up a connection. If you have access to multiple Wi-Fi networks, you can select the network to which you want to connect. NOTE The WEP (wired equivalent privacy) encryption method is enabled by default and may interfere with your ability to connect to a network that broadcasts its name. See Connecting to a secure network to learn how to disable WEP encryption. 1 Press Wi-Fi
(on the side of your smartphone near the stylus slot). What happens next depends on the state of Wi-Fi before you pressed the button:
Wi-Fi was already on: Your smartphone scans for available networks and automatically connects when possible. If your smartphone does not automatically connect and the Configure Wireless Networks screen appears, highlight the network you want, and press Connect (left softkey). Wi-Fi was off: A notification appears listing three available networks. If the network you want appears, highlight it and press OK (left softkey) to connect. If the network you want does not appear, select Show all networks, highlight the network you want, and press Connect
(left softkey). TIP To dismiss the notification without connecting to a network, press Menu (right softkey) and select Dismiss. To turn off the notification feature, press Menu (right softkey) and select Dont show this message again. You can turn the feature back on later (see Customizing advanced Wi-Fi settings). 2 When the connection message appears, press Dismiss (right softkey). TIP Narrow the list of networks that appear on the Configure Wireless Networks screen by selecting Networks to access and then selecting Only access points or Only computer-to-computer. Some locations, such as airports or coffee shops, provide an open network but charge a fee to use it. After you connect your smartphone to the network, you need to open Internet Explorer Mobile and register 166 C O N N E C T I N G T O A W I - F I N E T W O R K Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S 8 R E T P A H C NOTE As you continue with this procedure, some screens are not displayed, and you can skip those steps. 2 Enter the following settings and press Next (right softkey):
with the Wi-Fi service provider before you can check email or browse the web. Connecting to a secure network To set up a connection to a secure network for the first time, do the following:
1 Press Wi-Fi
(on the side of your smartphone near the stylus slot). What happens next depends on the state of Wi-Fi before you pressed the button:
Wi-Fi was already on: Your smartphone scans for available networks and automatically connects when possible. If your smartphone does not automatically connect and the Configure Wireless Networks screen appears, highlight the network you want, and press Connect (left softkey). Wi-Fi was off: A notification appears listing three available networks. If the network you want appears, highlight it and press OK (left softkey) to connect. If the network you want does not appear, select Show all networks to open the Configure Wireless Networks screen, highlight the network you want, and press Connect (left softkey). Network name: Specifies the SSID provided by the system administrator. C O N N E C T I N G T O A W I - F I N E T W O R K 167 8 R E T P A H C Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S Connects to: Sets whether this connection connects to the Internet or to Work. (You may need to select Work to access a corporate intranet.) This is a hidden network: Sets whether the network broadcasts its name. Check this box to connect to hidden networks now and in the future. This is a device-to-device (ad-hoc) connection: Leave this box unchecked to connect to a Wi-Fi access point
(network). Check this box if youre connecting to another device. 3 Enter the following settings and press Next (right softkey):
Authentication: Sets the method used to identify devices that connect to the network:
Open: Indicates that the network uses open authentication.
Shared: Indicates that the network uses shared authentication.
WPA: Indicates that the network is a WPA network that uses 802.1x protocols.
WPA-PSK: Indicates that the network is a WPA network that requires a password that is shared between the network and your smartphone. This password is also known as a preshared key (PSK).
WPA2: Indicates that the network provides government-grade security with an AES encryption algorithm.
WPA2-PSK: Indicates that the network is a WPA2 network that requires a preshared key (password). 168 C O N N E C T I N G T O A W I - F I N E T W O R K Data Encryption: Sets the encryption method. (The options in this list vary based on your Authentication setting.)
Disabled: Turns data encryption off.
WEP: Turns on the Wired Equivalent Privacy encryption method.
TKIP: Turns on the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol encryption method. This method is often used to encrypt WPA and WPA-PSK connections.
AES: Turns on the Advanced Encryption Standard protocol. (This method is often used to encrypt WPA and WPA-PSK connections.) The key is automatically provided:
Indicates whether you need to specify the network key and key index provided by your system administrator, or whether the network provides this information. The availability of these options varies based on your Authentication and Data Encryption settings. 4 Enter the following settings and press Finish (right softkey):
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S 8 R E T P A H C Use IEEE 802.1x network access control: Lets you set these parameters if required by the network. EAP type: Specifies the Extensible Authentication Protocol type. 5 Press OK
. Disconnecting from a network To disconnect from a Wi-Fi network, do one of the following:
To save any settings you entered, so that your smartphone automatically connects to this network the next time you are within range and the Wi-Fi feature is turned on, press and hold Wi-Fi to turn off the Wi-Fi feature. C O N N E C T I N G T O A W I - F I N E T W O R K 169 8 R E T P A H C Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
To remove the network settings from memory, so that your smartphone does not automatically connect to this network the next time you are within range and the Wi-Fi feature is turned on, press Menu (right softkey) and select Remove Settings. and select Settings. Customizing Wi-Fi settings 1 Press Start 2 Select the Connections tab, and then select Wi-Fi Prefs
. The Main and Advanced tabs show the status of the Wi-Fi feature and display information about an active Wi-Fi connection. 3 Select the Power Mode tab and set any of the following:
Power Save Mode: Adjusts power consumption between maximizing network connection performance and maximizing battery life. Connection: Sets when the Wi-Fi feature is on and when your smartphone attempts to search for networks.
On button press: Leaves the Wi-Fi feature off until you press Wi-Fi to turn it on. After you turn the Wi-Fi feature on, your smartphone searches for available networks. If a network to which you previously connected is available, your smartphone automatically connects to that network.
Always On: Leaves the Wi-Fi feature on, and your smartphone searches for available networks whenever the screen is awake. If a network to which you previously connected is available, your smartphone automatically connects to that network. When this mode is enabled, you can prevent 170 C O N N E C T I N G T O A W I - F I N E T W O R K Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S your smartphone from searching for networks by pressing and holding Wi-Fi off. to turn the Wi-Fi feature 4 Select the LEAP tab and do any of the following:
5 Select the Enroll tab and set any of the following:
NOTE Ask your network administrator for the username, password, and server name for the Wi-Fi network you want to access. 8 R E T P A H C Create a new LEAP entry: Select New. A LEAP entry is a security feature that protects the WEP key. Modify an existing entry: Highlight the entry and select Modify. Enter the new information. Delete an entry: Highlight the entry and select Delete. User: Specifies your username for this Wi-Fi network. Password: Specifies the password associated with the username you specified on this screen. Server: Specifies the name of the Internet Information Server (IIS) that stores the security certificate information for this Wi-Fi network. C O N N E C T I N G T O A W I - F I N E T W O R K 171 8 R E T P A H C Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S Retrieve Certificate: Obtains a certificate based on the information your entered. 6 Press OK
. Turn off Wi-Fi if not connected in:
Sets the time interval for turning off the Wi-Fi feature if your smartphone does not connect to a network. Customizing advanced Wi-Fi settings 1 Press Start 2 Select the Connections tab, and then and select Settings. select Wi-Fi
. 3 On the Wireless tab, press Menu (right softkey) and select Advanced. 5 Press Save (right softkey). 6 Press OK
. Customizing network adapter settings 1 Press Start and select Settings. 2 Select the Connections tab, and then select Wi-Fi
. 3 Select the Network Adapters tab and set any of the following:
4 Select either of the following:
Turn on available network notification: Sets whether a list of networks appears when you turn on the Wi-Fi feature. My network card connects to: Sets the default network connection type for your smartphone: Work or The Internet. 172 C O N N E C T I N G T O A W I - F I N E T W O R K 8 R E T P A H C Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S Tap an adapter to modify settings:
Lets you edit network adapter information. Select the adapter you want, and then select either of the following tabs:
IP Address: Sets whether the server assigns an IP address, or whether you enter a specific IP address.
Name Servers: Lets you enter the addresses of primary and alternate DNS and WINS servers. 4 Press OK
. Connecting to devices with Bluetooth wireless technology With the Bluetooth wireless technology on your smartphone, you can connect to a number of Bluetooth devices such as a headset or hands-free car kit, as well as to other phones, handhelds, or piconets. When you connect to another device, you create a partnership (also referred to by terms such as trusted pair, trusted device, or pairing) with that device. If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can also synchronize wirelessly or use your phone as a wireless modem. C O N N E C T I N G T O D E V I C E S W I T H B L U E T O O T H W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y 173 8 R E T P A H C Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S to your trusted device list. Follow the steps in this section to add other devices to your trusted device list, such as your computer. DID YOU KNOW? Check your battery level before establishing a Bluetooth connection. If the battery level is low, you cant make a Bluetooth connection. Entering basic Bluetooth settings 1 Press Start 2 Select the Connections tab, and then and select Settings. select Bluetooth. 3 Select the Mode tab and check the Turn on Bluetooth box. KEY TERM Partnership Two devicesfor example, your smartphone and a hands-free devicethat can connect because each device finds the same passkey on the other device. After you form a partnership with a device, you dont need to enter a passkey to connect with that device again. KEY TERM Piconet An ad-hoc network of devices that uses Bluetooth wireless technology to connect one master device with up two seven active slave devices. You can create a list of Bluetooth devices that you trust to communicate with your smartphone. When communicating with trusted devices, your smartphone skips the discovery process and creates a secure link as long as the device is within range. Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet
(10 meters) in ideal conditions. Performance and range are affected by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors. When you configure a headset (see Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free device), the headset is automatically added 174 C O N N E C T I N G T O D E V I C E S W I T H B L U E T O O T H W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S DID YOU KNOW? You can also turn the Bluetooth feature on and off from your Today screen. Select your wireless service provider name or Phone off to open Comm Manager, select Bluetooth, and then press Exit (left softkey). 3 Select the Connections tab, and then select Bluetooth. 4 Select the Mode tab and check the Turn on Bluetooth box. 5 Select the Devices tab, and then select Add new device. 8 R E T P A H C 4 Check or uncheck the Make the device visible to other devices box. Check this box to allow Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Device list to request a connection with your device. Your device remains accessible to other devices until you uncheck the box. Requesting a connection with another Bluetooth device 1 If necessary, prepare the device with which you want to connect to accept a new connection. Check the devices documentation for details. Be sure to find out if the device has a predefined passkey that you need to enter on your smartphone in step 8. 2 On your smartphone, press Start and select Settings. 6 Wait for your smartphone to search for devices and to display the device list. C O N N E C T I N G T O D E V I C E S W I T H B L U E T O O T H W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y 175 8 R E T P A H C Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S 7 Highlight the device with which you 10 Press Done (left softkey). want to connect, and press Next (right softkey). If the device you want does not appear, select Refresh. 8 Enter an alphanumeric passkey between 1 and 16 characters long and press Next (right softkey). IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices have a predefined passkey. If your device has a predefined passkey, you can find it in the documentation for that device. Other devices provide a screen where you enter a passkey that you make up. In either case, you must use the same passkey on both your smartphone and the other device. We recommend that, where possible, you make up a passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters (letters and numerals only) to improve the security of your smartphone. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered. 9 If the passkey is not built-in, enter the same passkey on the other Bluetooth device. You can now communicate with this device whenever it is within range and the Bluetooth feature on your smartphone is turned on. The range varies greatly depending on environmental factors. The maximum is about 30 feet (10 meters). TIP To delete the established partnership with a device, go to the Bluetooth Settings screen and select the Devices tab. Highlight the connection you want to remove, press and hold Center on the 5-way, and then select Delete. Select Yes to confirm the deletion. The deleted device can no longer automatically connect with your smartphone. Accepting a connection from another Bluetooth device 1 Press Start 2 Select the Connections tab, and then and select Settings. select Bluetooth. 3 Select the Mode tab and check the Turn on Bluetooth box. 176 C O N N E C T I N G T O D E V I C E S W I T H B L U E T O O T H W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y 8 R E T P A H C Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S 4 If you have already set up a partnership with the transmitting device, your smartphone is ready to receive the info. If you havent set up a connection, check the Make this device visible to other devices box to let the device find your smartphone and request a connection. 5 When prompted to add this device, select Yes. 6 Enter the same passkey on your smartphone and on the Bluetooth device. 7 (Optional) To give the partnership a more meaningful name, select Display Name and enter a new name. 8 Press Finish (right softkey). 9 When your smartphone is receiving info, a notification tells you that a transmission is in progress. To stop the transmission, press Cancel (right softkey). To close the notification, press Hide (left softkey). Using your device as a modem Your smartphone comes with software that allows you to use it as a modem to connect your computer to the Internet. To use the software, refer to the instructions provided by your wireless service provider. U S I N G Y O U R D E V I C E A S A M O D E M 177 Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S 8 R E T P A H C 178 U S I N G Y O U R D E V I C E A S A M O D E M Your photos, videos, and music Do you have a wallet bulging with photos of friends, family, pets, and your most recent vacation?
Are you tired of carrying both your MP3 player and your phone?
Your Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm solves both problems. You can keep your favorite photosvideos, tooright on your smartphone. And theres no need to carry an expensive MP3 player, because you can play music on your smartphone. Simply transfer songs onto your smartphone or an expansion card (sold separately) and then listen through your stereo headphones. Benefits
Never be far from your favorite people, places, and songs
Arrange your photos, videos, and songs
Avoid having to use a separate photo viewer, MP3, CD, or mini-disc player CHAPTER 9 179 In this chapter Synchronizing your pictures, videos, and music. 181 Camera. 183 Pictures & Videos. 190 Windows Media Player Mobile . 195 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C Synchronizing your pictures, videos, and music You can synchronize pictures, videos, and music files between your smartphone and your computer so that changes you make show up on both your computer and your smartphone. How synchronization happens depends on two conditions:
Operating system: Do you use Windows XP or Windows Vista?
Sync direction: Are you transferring files from your smartphone to your computer, or from your computer to your smartphone?
NOTE The following procedures do not apply to Windows Media Player. To sync files that are in a Windows Media Player library on either your smartphone or your computer, see Synchronizing Windows Media Player library files. For information about installing desktop sync software and about synchronizing with your computer, see Installing Desktop Sync Software: Windows XP and Windows Vista. Windows XP NOTE We strongly recommend using Windows Media Player for synchronizing music files. Do the following to synchronize pictures, videos, and music files that you originally captured on or copied to your smartphone. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Turn on the option to synchronize files (see Changing which applications sync). 1 Sync as you normally would with the desktop sync software. 2 To find synchronized pictures, videos, and music on your computer, go here:
C:\Documents and Settings\<Username>\My Documents\Treo My Documents. This folder has subfolders for My Music, My Pictures, and My Videos. Do the following to synchronize pictures, videos, and music files that originate on your computer. S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G Y O U R P I C T U R E S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C 181 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C 1 Connect your smartphone to your computer with the USB cable. NOTE Most ActiveSync desktop software options are available only when your smartphone is connected to your computer. 2 On your computer, double-click the icon in the taskbar in ActiveSync the lower-right corner of your computer screen to open the ActiveSync desktop software window. TIP If the ActiveSync icon does not appear in the taskbar, click Start > Programs >
Microsoft ActiveSync to open the ActiveSync window. 3 Under Information Type, double-click Files to view a list of all synchronized files. TIP If Files doesnt appear under Information Type, open the Tools menu and select Options. Make sure the Files box is checked. 4 Do either of the following:
To copy a file from your computer to your smartphone, click Add, browse to and highlight the file, and then click Open.
To delete a file from the Treo My Documents folder on your computer and from your smartphone, highlight the file name and click Remove. NOTE If you receive an error while synchronizing files, make sure that all the files youre trying to sync are closed on both your computer and your smartphone. TIP If a Treo My Documents sync folder has been created on your computer, you can also synchronize by dragging files into the appropriate subfolder under that folder. 182 S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G Y O U R P I C T U R E S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C Windows Vista NOTE We strongly recommend using Windows Media Player for synchronizing music files. To synchronize pictures, videos, and music files that originate on your computer, use Windows Media Player (see Synchronizing Windows Media Player library files). Do the following to synchronize pictures, videos, and music files that you originally captured on or copied to your smartphone. 1 Connect your smartphone to your computer, using the USB cable. 2 To find synchronized pictures, videos, and music on your computer, go to Start > Documents > Documents on
<User>s Treo Pro. This folder has subfolders for My Music, My Pictures, and My Videos. 3 On your computer, click Start > All Programs > Windows Mobile Device Center. 4 Select Connect without setting up your device. 5 Select Pictures, Music and Video. 6 Select X new pictures/video clips are available for import. Camera Your smartphone comes with an easy-to-use, built-in, 2-megapixel camera with up to 8x digital zoom. You can use the camera to take and view pictures and videos and send them to your friends and family. To add a personal touch to your smartphone, use your pictures as your Today screen background and as caller ID images, or use your videos to create video ringtones. You can receive and view pictures and videos, and send pictures and videos as attachments or multimedia messages (see Sending a picture or video). Or add a picture to a contact (see Adding a contact). You can also move pictures and videos to a computer by synchronizing your smartphone with your computer. C A M E R A 183 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C Selecting camera modes By default, the camera on your smartphone is in picture mode, to capture standard still images (see Taking a picture). You can change modes to any of the following:
Video: Captures video clips. MMS video: Captures video clips suitable for sending as attachments to multimedia messages. Contacts picture: Captures still images and immediately gives you the option to assign them to a contact. Panorama: Captures a sequence of still images continuously and allows you to combine them into a panoramic view. Sports: Captures a sequence of 3, 5, 7, or 10 still images with a single button press. Burst: Captures a sequence of up to 30 still images while you hold down the Center button. 184 C A M E R A To switch camera modes, do the following:
1 Press and hold the Side button. 2 Press Left until the icon for the mode you want appears in the upper-left corner of the screen. or Right
*
* Mode icon Taking a picture By default, pictures are stored in the My Pictures folder on your smartphone. If you want to store your pictures on an expansion card, you can change where pictures are stored (see Customizing your Camera settings). For information on accessing your pictures on your computer, see Windows XP or Windows Vista. Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C DID YOU KNOW? Pictures are captured and stored in 16-bit color, JPG format. Resolution settings range from a low end of QQVGA (120 x 160 pixels) to a high end of 2 megapixels
(1600 x 1200 pixels). You can change the default setting. See Customizing your Camera settings for details. 3 (Optional) If the onscreen controls are not displayed, press Up to display the controls, and tap the screen with the stylus to open the Quick Settings. Tap any of the following settings repeatedly to toggle among the options for that item:
1 Press and hold the Side button. 9 R E T P A H C TIP If you see the Video or MMS Video icon in the upper-left corner of the screen, press Left or Right on the 5-way until one of the camera icons appears. 2 Aim your smartphone as you would any camera to frame your subject in the smartphone screen. Resolution: Sets the image quality. White balance: Specifies the light conditions. Brightness: Sets the brightness level. TIP When the Quick Settings are open, press Left or Right on the 5-way to adjust the brightness setting. If you use the stylus, tap the + or - icon to increase or decrease the brightness setting. C A M E R A 185 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C Storage: Specifies whether to save the picture to your smartphone or to an expansion card (sold separately) inserted into your smartphone. The expansion card option appears only if you have an expansion card inserted into your smartphone. Self-timer: Lets you set a self-timer with a delay of 2 seconds or 10 seconds. TIP You can set additional options for the camera (see Customizing your Camera settings). 4 (Optional) In all modes except picture mode, with the controls displayed, press Up to change the zoom level. The zoom indicator appears on the left side of the screen. or Down 5 Do the following for the mode you are using:
Picture or Contacts picture: Press to capture the picture or Center start the self-timer. Panorama: Press Center picture you want to take. for each Sports: Press and hold Center while following the movement of your subject. Burst: Press and hold Center the camera takes consecutive shots. while 6 Hold your smartphone still until the picture is rendered. After the picture has been captured, it appears on the Review screen. Select one of the following:
Go back to the Camera screen to take another picture. Delete the picture. Send the picture as an attachment to a multimedia or email message. View the picture in the Pictures &
Videos application (see Pictures &
Videos). NOTE In Contacts picture mode only, a prompt appears, asking if you want to assign the picture to a contact. Select Yes, and then select a contact from the list or 186 C A M E R A press New (left softkey) to create a new contact for the picture. TIP Check the Dont show again box to turn off the prompt. If you turn the prompt off, you cannot save a picture to contacts. To turn the prompt back on, see Customizing your Camera settings. Recording a video Videos can be any length, provided you have enough storage space available. By default, videos are stored in the My Pictures folder on your smartphone. If you want to store your videos on an expansion card (sold separately), see Customizing your Camera settings to change where videos are stored. For information on accessing your videos on your computer, see Windows XP or Windows Vista. 1 Press and hold the Side button. 2 Press Left or Right or MMS video until the video icon appears in the upper-left corner of the screen. 3 Adjust the position of your smartphone until you see the subject you want to record on the screen. 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C 4 (Optional) If the onscreen controls are to display not displayed, press Up the controls, and tap the screen to open the Quick Settings. Tap any of the following settings repeatedly to toggle among the options for that item:
Resolution: Sets the image quality. White balance: Specifies the light conditions. Brightness: Sets the brightness level. TIP When the Quick Settings are open, press Left or Right on the 5-way to adjust the brightness setting. If you use the stylus, first tap the + or - icon to specify whether you want to increase or decrease the brightness setting. Storage: Specifies whether to save the video to your smartphone or to an expansion card (sold separately) inserted into your smartphone. The expansion card option appears only if you have an expansion card inserted into your smartphone. C A M E R A 187 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C TIP You can set additional options for the camera (see Customizing your Camera settings). 5 (Optional) With the controls displayed, press Up to change the zoom level. The zoom indicator appears on the left side of the screen. or Down 6 Press Center to start recording. 7 When you have finished recording, to stop recording. press Center 8 After the video has been captured, it appears on the Review screen. Select one of the following icons:
Go back to the Camera screen to capture another video. 188 C A M E R A Delete the video. Send the video as an attachment to a multimedia or email message. View the video in Windows Media Player Mobile (see Playing media files on your smartphone). Customizing your Camera settings 1 Press and hold the Side button. 2 Tap the Menu 3 On the Capture Settings tab, set any of icon. the following options. Not all options appear in all camera modes. Effect: Sets a special effect such as grayscale or sepia. Time Stamp (camera, sports, and burst modes only): Sets whether the date and time are displayed on your captured pictures. Direction (panorama mode only):
Sets the direction in which images are to be combined into a panorama. 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C Stitch Count (panorama mode only):
Sets the number of pictures that you want to be combined. Shutter Sound: Sets whether the camera makes a sound when you press Center
. Capture Speed (sports and burst modes only): Sets the speed for capturing still pictures. Snapshots (sports mode only): Sets the number of shots to be captured with each press of Center
. Quality: Sets the JPG image quality for still pictures. Metering Mode: Sets whether the camera measures the amount of light around the center of the image or the average amount of light around the entire image to determine the best exposure value. Storage: Sets whether to save items to your smartphone or to an expansion card (sold separately). 4 Select the Advanced tab and set any of the following options. Not all options appear in all camera modes. Capture Format: Sets the format you want for captured still images. Grid (camera mode only): Sets whether an onscreen grid appears to help position the subjects of still pictures. Keep Backlight: Sets whether to turn the backlight on or off when using the camera. This overrides your smartphone backlight settings when you are using the camera. Review Duration: Sets the time length that a captured picture or image is displayed before it is automatically saved and you return to the Camera screen. Select No Limit if you dont want a time limit. Select No Review if you want captured items to be saved immediately. Flicker Adjustment: Sets the rate to reduce flicker on the camera screen. Record with Audio (video and MMS video modes only): Sets whether to include audio when recording. C A M E R A 189 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C Prefix: Sets whether to include the date or the date and time as the prefix in the file names of captured items. When Default is selected, the prefix for pictures is IMAGE and the prefix for videos is VIDEO. NOTE If you save pictures to an expansion card (sold separately), you cannot select a prefix. Pictures saved to a card are always given the IMAGE prefix. Counter: Resets the file-naming counter to 1. Recording Limit (video mode only):
Sets whether there is a maximum size or length for recorded videos. Image Properties: Adjusts properties such as contrast, saturation, hue, and sharpness for capture images. After you select the property you want, press Right decrease the value. to increase or or Left Show Reminder (Contacts picture mode only): Sets whether an alert appears, asking whether you want to assign the captured picture to a contact. 5 Press OK
. 190 P I C T U R E S & V I D E O S Pictures & Videos Viewing a picture In addition to viewing the pictures you capture with the built-in camera, you can view pictures captured on many popular digital cameras or downloaded from the Internet. Your smartphone supports the following picture formats:
JPG
PNG
BMP
GIF 1 Press Start Videos. and select Pictures &
2 If your pictures are not displayed in Thumbnail View, tap the Show list in the upper-left corner, select My Documents, and then select My Pictures. 3 Select the picture you want to view. 4 Press OK to return to Thumbnail View. Viewing a video In addition to viewing the videos you capture with the built-in camera, you can view videos captured on many popular digital cameras or streamed from websites. Your smartphone supports and streams the following types of video files:
MPEG-4
3GPP2
3GPP
WMV, WMA, AVI
RTSP Streaming 1 Press Start and select Pictures &
Videos. 2 If your pictures are not displayed in Thumbnail View, tap the Show list in the upper-left corner, select My Documents, and then select My Videos. 3 Select the video you want to view. For more info on viewing videos, see Playing media files on your smartphone. 4 Press OK to return to Thumbnail View. 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C TIP To view pictures or videos in a different folder, tap the Show list in the upper-left corner, and then select the album you want to view. Viewing a slide show 1 Press Start and select Pictures &
Videos. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Play Slide Show. The slide show plays automatically. 3 Press Center to display the slide show toolbar, which includes the following options: Rotate Pause and Stop the slide show.
, Forward
, Reverse
, Play
,
, Sending a picture or video You can send a picture or video to other picture-enabled mobile smartphone devices or to an email address by attaching the picture or video to a message. You cannot send copyrighted pictures or videos that appear with a lock icon in Thumbnail View. 1 Highlight the picture or video you want to send. P I C T U R E S & V I D E O S 191 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Send. 3 Select the option you want to use to send the picture or video: an email account, a multimedia message (MMS), or a voice multimedia message
(VoiceMail). 4 When the Messaging application opens, address and send the message
(see Creating and sending an email message or Creating and sending a multimedia message). TIP You can also beam an item to a nearby device. Press Menu (right softkey) and select Beam. TIP If you have set up Windows Live on your smartphone (see Using Windows LiveTM), you can send a picture to the web storage space of your Windows Live account. From there, you can share the picture with other web users. Highlight the picture, press Menu (right softkey), and select Send to your space. Creating a caller ID picture You can add a picture to a contact entry when you create the entry (see Adding a contact). Follow these steps if you want to add a picture to an existing contact, or to replace an existing contacts picture. 1 Highlight the picture you want to use as a caller ID picture. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Save to Contact. 3 Select the contact to whom you want to assign the picture, or press New (left softkey) to create a new contact to whom you want to assign the picture. Organizing pictures and videos You can move or copy pictures and videos to other folders or between your smartphone and an expansion card. 1 Highlight the picture or video you want to move or copy. 2 Do one of the following:
Move the picture or video: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit >
Cut. Copy the picture or video: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit > Copy. 192 P I C T U R E S & V I D E O S 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C TIP To create a new location for storing the picture or video, press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit > New Folder. 3 Tap the Show list in the upper-left corner, and select the location where you want to place the picture or video. 4 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit > Paste. You can also view a specific folder or expansion card and arrange the pictures and videos by name, date, or size. 1 Tap the Show list in the upper-left corner, and select the folder you want to view. 2 Tap the Sort By list in the upper-right corner, and select the sort method:
Name, Date, or Size. Using a picture as the Today screen background 1 Highlight the picture you want to use. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Set as Today Background. 3 Select the Transparency level list and select the appropriate level. Use a higher percentage for a more transparent picture and a lower percentage for a more opaque picture. to return to Thumbnail 4 Press OK View. Editing a picture For more extensive edits, download your picture or video to your computer and edit it in your favorite graphics program. Then sync the picture or video back to your smartphone. 1 Select the picture you want to edit. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit. 3 Do any of the following:
To rotate the picture 90 degrees, press Rotate (left softkey).
To crop the picture, press Menu (right softkey) and select Crop. Tap and drag the stylus to highlight the area to crop. Tap inside the box to crop the picture.
To adjust the brightness and contrast levels of the picture, press Menu
(right softkey) and select AutoCorrect. P I C T U R E S & V I D E O S 193 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
To undo an edit, press Menu (right softkey) and select Undo. Customizing picture playback settings 1 Press Start and select Pictures &
To cancel all unsaved edits you made to the picture, press Menu (right softkey) and select Revert to Saved. 4 To save your edited picture, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Save As. Enter a new name for the picture and press OK
. Deleting a picture or video 1 Highlight the picture or video you want to delete. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Delete. 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. Renaming a picture or video 1 Highlight the picture or video you want to rename. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > Properties. 3 Enter a new name for the picture or video. 4 Press OK to return to Thumbnail View. Videos. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > Options. 3 On the General tab, set any of the following options:
Use this picture size: Sets the size of pictures you send with the Messaging application. When rotating a picture, rotate 90 degrees: Sets the direction in which pictures rotate. 194 P I C T U R E S & V I D E O S Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C 4 Select the Slide Show tab, and set any of the following options:
Windows Media Player Mobile 9 R E T P A H C Windows Media Player Mobile can play music, audio, and video files that are stored on your smartphone or on an expansion card (sold separately) in any of the following file formats:
WMA
WMV
MP3
3GP
AAC
AAC+
MPEG-4 DID YOU KNOW? You can also download animated GIF files and view them in Internet Explorer Mobile. IMPORTANT You must have QuickTime Player version 6.5 or later installed on your computer to play videos recorded by your smartphone. You can download the videos During slide shows, optimize for viewing: Sets whether pictures are optimized for portrait or landscape format during slide shows. Play screensaver when connected to my PC and idle for 2 minutes: Sets whether the pictures in your My Pictures folder are used as a screensaver when your smartphone is connected to your computer and ActiveSync desktop software is not running. 5 Press OK to return to Thumbnail View. W I N D O W S M E D I A P L A Y E R M O B I L E 195 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C from an expansion card or you can click the video thumbnail after synchronizing the files. You can listen to these music, audio, and video files through the speaker on the back of your smartphone or through stereo headphones. Synchronizing Windows Media Player library files Use the Sync feature in the desktop version of Windows Media Player to transfer digital music, audio, video, and playlist files between your computer and an expansion card or your smartphone. Using the Sync feature ensures that the files are transferred correctly. TIP For tips on using the desktop version of Windows Media Player, go to the Help menu in Windows Media Player on your computer. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following:
Be sure you have Windows Media Player 10 or later installed on your computer. On a Windows XP computer, Windows Media Player 10 must be installed on your computer before you install ActiveSync desktop software. You can install ActiveSync desktop software from your smartphone. (If you are having trouble, see My video and music files wont sync.) If you need to install Windows Media Player, you can download it for free from microsoft.com. NOTE Windows Media Player 11 is already installed on Windows Vista computers.
To sync Windows Media Player files with your computer, set the Media sync option on your smartphone (see Changing which applications sync). 1 On your computer, open Windows Media Player. 2 (Optional) If youre transferring media files to an expansion card, insert an expansion card into your smartphone. 3 Connect your smartphone to your computer with the USB cable. 4 Do one of the following:
Windows Media Player 10: When the Device Setup Wizard opens on your computer, click Automatic. Check the 196 W I N D O W S M E D I A P L A Y E R M O B I L E 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C Customize the playlists that will be synchronized box. Windows Media Player 11: Select the arrow below the Library tab, and then select the type of item you want to synchronize: pictures, music, or videos. Select the arrow below the Sync tab, and then select Treo > Set Up Sync. Check the Sync this device automatically box. To sync with an expansion card, select the arrow below the Sync tab, and then select Storage Card > Set Up Sync. 5 Select the playlists you want to sync. On a Windows Vista computer, select the All Photos and All Videos playlists to synchronize pictures and videos between your smartphone and your computer. NOTE If the playlist you want does not appear, the items you want to synchronize may reside in a folder that does not sync with Windows Media Player. Sync those items by following the correct sync procedure described in Synchronizing your pictures, videos, and music. 6 Click Finish to begin the transfer. If you are transferring files to an expansion card, be patient; transferring media files to an expansion card can take several minutes. To find your synchronized files, update the library in Windows Media Player. The files appear in the updated libraries. Playing media files on your smartphone 1 Press Start
> Programs and select Windows Media. 2 If the Library screen is not displayed, press Menu (right softkey) and select Library. 3 Tap the Library list in the upper-left corner, and select the library you want to use. TIP To play a file that is not in a library, go to the Library screen, press Menu, and select Open File. 4 Select the category containing the media file you want to play. Continue selecting categories until the list of individual items (videos, songs, albums, or artist names) appears. W I N D O W S M E D I A P L A Y E R M O B I L E 197 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C TIP If you cant find an item you want, update the library (see Working with libraries). 5 Select the item you want to play (such as a song, album, or artist name). 6 Press Play (left softkey). See the next page for playback controls. 7 Press Menu (right softkey) and select any of the following during playback:
Library: Displays the Library screen so you can select a different song to play. Shuffle/Repeat > Shuffle: Plays the Now Playing playlist in random order. A checkmark appears next to this command when it is on. Shuffle/Repeat > Repeat: Plays the Now Playing playlist repeatedly. A checkmark appears next to this command when it is on. Stop: Ends playback. Playback controls Use any of the following onscreen controls during playback:
or Center plays the current file. or Center pauses the current file. or Left skips to the beginning of the current file or to the previous file. or Right skips to the next file. sets the point from which playback begins. Tap and drag the slider to change the current position. or Volume button increases the volume level. or Volume button decreases the volume level. turns the sound on or off. displays a video using the full screen. displays a website where you can find music and videos to play. indicates the rating of the current file. Select the star to change the rating. 198 W I N D O W S M E D I A P L A Y E R M O B I L E 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C DID YOU KNOW? You can play streaming files from the web. To play an MMS (Microsoft Media Streaming) file, press Menu on the Library screen and select Open URL. Select URL and enter the website address, or select History and select a site youve visited before. DID YOU KNOW? If you close the Windows Media Player Mobile window, your music continues to play in the background. 1 Press Start and select Windows Media Player. 2 If the Library screen is not displayed, press Menu (right softkey) and select Library. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Update Library. 4 Wait for the files to be added, and then select Done. Working with libraries A library represents each of the storage locations available to Windows Media Player Mobile, such as your smartphone
(My Device) or an optional expansion card, sold separately (My Storage Card). Each library contains links to the media files in that location. Windows Media Player Mobile usually updates the My Device library automatically, but you must manually update the My Storage Card library. TIP If you dont see a media file that you added, manually update the library. TIP To delete an item from a library, highlight the item and then press and hold Center on the 5-way to open the shortcut menu. Select Delete from Library, and select Yes to confirm the deletion. DID YOU KNOW? If you move files between your smartphone and an expansion card, be sure to update your libraries, or you wont be able to see the files in their new location. Working with playlists A playlist is a list of media files that play in a specific order. You can use playlists to group audio files together or video files together for convenient playback. For example, in the desktop Windows Media Player, you can create a playlist of upbeat songs for when you exercise and a playlist W I N D O W S M E D I A P L A Y E R M O B I L E 199 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C of soothing songs for a long flight. When you synchronize, your favorite playlists are automatically copied to your smartphone. Your playlists appear in your libraries (in the My Playlists category). A temporary playlist, called Now Playing, appears on the Now Playing menu. It lists the currently playing file, as well as any files that are queued up to play next. You can add to, modify, or clear the files on the Now Playing playlist. 1 Go to the Now Playing screen:
If you are on the Library screen, select the Now Playing category.
If you are on the Playback screen, press Now Playing (left softkey). 200 W I N D O W S M E D I A P L A Y E R M O B I L E 2 Do any of the following:
To move a file up or down one slot, highlight the file and select Move Up or Move Down
. TIP You can also move a file in the Now Playing playlist by tapping and dragging it to a new position.
To add a file, select Add
, highlight the file, press Menu (right softkey), and select Queue Up.
To delete a file from the playlist, highlight the file and select Remove
.
To view more info about a file, highlight the file and select Properties
.
To remove all items from the Now Playing playlist, press Menu (right softkey) and select Clear Now Playing. Customizing Windows Media Player Mobile 1 If you are on any screen other than the to go to Playback screen, press OK the Playback screen. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Options. 3 On the Playback tab, you can set the following option:
Show time as: Sets whether the time remaining or the time elapsed appears in the Playback screen. 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C 4 Select the Video tab and set one of the following options:
Play video in full screen: Sets whether videos automatically play in full screen format. Scale to fit window: Sets whether videos are automatically scaled to fit the Playback screen. 5 Select the Network tab and set the following options:
Protocol: Enables and disables the available protocols. You must select at least one protocol. You can also set a UDP Port. Internet connection speed: Specifies the speed of your network connection, and specifies whether you want the device to detect connection speed. 6 Select the Library tab and set whether you want to see the Library or Playback screen when you open Windows Media Player Mobile. 7 Select the Skins tab and select Previous or Next to set the players background. W I N D O W S M E D I A P L A Y E R M O B I L E 201 9 R E T P A H C Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C 8 Select the Buttons tab to change any of the available button settings:
To restore an items factory setting, highlight the item and select Reset.
To unassign an item, highlight the item and select None. 9 Press OK
.
To assign a button, highlight the item you want to set, select Assign, and press the button you want to use for that item. 202 W I N D O W S M E D I A P L A Y E R M O B I L E
1 2 | User manual revised 2 of 2 | Users Manual | 2.75 MiB |
Your personal information organizer Say good-bye to paper calendars and throw away those scribbled to-do lists. Your Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm is all you need to organize your personal information and keep it with you wherever you go. You never lose your information, even if your battery is completely drained. All your personal information is backed up each time you synchronize, and your information is kept private when you use the security features available on your smartphone. Also, you can easily share info with others electronically. Benefits
Track current, future, and past appointments
Make to-do lists that get done
Set reminders for appointments, birthdays, important tasks, and more CHAPTER 10 203 In this chapter Contacts. 205 Calendar . 208 Tasks . 215 Notes . 218 Contacts Adding a contact 1 Go to your Today screen and press Contacts (left softkey). 2 Press New (left softkey). TIP If you have set up a Windows Live account
(see Using Windows LiveTM), you can save the contact as a Windows Live contact. A Windows Live contact synchronizes with your Windows Live contacts list but not with Microsoft Outlook on your computer. 3 Use the 5-way navigator to move between fields as you enter information. 10 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R TIP Take some time to scroll down through all the fields in a new contact. There are fields for multiple addresses, phone numbers, email addresses, and much more. TIP Be sure to enter mobile numbers and email addresses in the correct fields so that Messaging can find this info when you address a message and Calendar can find your contacts when you want to invite them to meetings. Here are some helpful tips for entering info:
To enter complete name or address
(work, home, or other) information, tap the arrow on the right side of the line and enter the information in the box that appears. When finished, tap outside the box to accept the information and close the box.
To add a caller ID picture that is displayed when that person calls, select Picture, and then select Camera and take a picture, or select an existing picture from Thumbnail View.
To assign a ringtone to the entry, select Ring tone and select a tone. C O N T A C T S 205 10 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
To assign the entry to one or more categories, select Categories and then check the categories under which you want this entry to appear. To add a new category, press New
(left softkey), enter the category name, and press OK
. 4 (Optional) To add a note to an entry, select the Notes tab. 5 After you have entered all the information, press OK
. DID YOU KNOW? If you want to create a new contact that shares information with an existing contactfor example, they both work at the same companyyou can make a copy of the first contact and then edit only the fields you need to change for the new contact. In the contacts list, highlight the first contact, press Menu (right softkey), and then select Copy Contact. Viewing or changing contact information 1 Go to your Today screen and press Contacts (left softkey). 2 In the Contacts list (viewed by name), begin entering any combination of letters from the contacts first and/or last name. If you use both first- and last-name letters, separate them by a space. You can type letters from the last name first. For example, entering SM finds both Smilla Anderson and John Smith. Entering SM AN finds both Smilla Anderson and Ann Smith. 3 Select the entry you want to open. TIP You can also find a contact by tapping the first letter of the first or last name in the alphabetical index at the top of the Contacts list screen. DID YOU KNOW? When you select a contact entry, you are presented with several options for contacting the person, depending on what information you have entered for the contact. For example, you may see options for calling a number associated with the contact, sending an email to the contacts email address, or calling the last number you dialed to call the contact. Select a phone number to dial, or select a messaging option to create a new message addressed to the contact. 4 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit. 206 C O N T A C T S 10 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R 5 Make changes to the entry as necessary. 6 Press OK
. DID YOU KNOW? You can find a contact by company name. Open Contacts, press Menu
(right softkey), and select View By >
Company. Select a company name to see the contacts who work there. TIP To view a particular group of contacts, press Menu (right softkey), select Filter, and then select the category you want to view. TIP You can quickly send a text message to a contact from within the Contacts application. Select the contact name, press Menu (right softkey), and select Send Text Message. Deleting a contact 1 Go to your Today screen and press Contacts (left softkey). 2 In the Contacts list, highlight the contact you want to delete. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Delete Contact. 4 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. Customizing Contacts 1 Go to your Today screen and press Contacts (left softkey). 2 Go to the Contacts list. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Options. 4 Set any of the following options:
Show alphabetical index: Displays the alphabet at the top of the Contacts list. You can use this index to find a contact. Show contact names only: Enables you to fit more names on the Contacts list by hiding everything but the contacts name. Area code: Specifies the default area code for new contact entries. 5 Press OK
. Finding a contact in an online address book In addition to having contacts on your device, you can also access contact information from your organizations online address book or Global Address List (GAL). C O N T A C T S 207 10 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following:
Make sure you are accessing Exchange Server 2007, or Exchange Server 2003 upgraded to Service Pack 2.
Add access to the online address book to your smartphone. See Adding an online address book.
After adding the online address book, you must synchronize with the Exchange server in order for the Company Directory option to appear. 1 Go to your Today screen and press Contacts (left softkey). 2 Press Menu (right softkey), select Company Directory, enter the name of the contact, and select Search. Sending a contact Your smartphone provides multiple options for sending a contacts information to someone else. 1 Go to your Today screen and press Contacts (left softkey). 2 In the Contacts list, highlight the contact you want to send. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select one of the following options:
Beam a contact to a nearby device:
Select Send Contact > Beam, and then select the receiving device. Send a multimedia message containing the contact information:
Select Send as vCard. Address the multimedia message and press Send
(left softkey). TIP You can also send a message to the highlighted contact. Press Menu (right softkey) and select Send video message by mobile or Send picture message by mobile. These options appear only if the contact you select has a mobile telephone number associated with it. Calendar Displaying your calendar 1 Press Calendar 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select
. View. 3 Select one of the following views:
208 C A L E N D A R Agenda: Shows your daily schedule in list format. Upcoming appointments are bold; past appointments are dimmed. Agenda View displays a horizontal time strip at the top to show at a glance when you have an appointment. Day: Shows your daily schedule in day-planner format. Week: Shows your schedule for an entire week. DID YOU KNOW? If your schedule contains a conflicttwo appointments that overlapyou can see the conflict in both Day View and Week View. Month: Shows your schedule for a whole month. A morning appointment An afternoon appointment Both morning and afternoon appointments An all-day event Year: Shows a calendar for a six-month period. 10 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R TIP To switch views, press the left softkey. Dont confuse the view name displayed above the left softkey with the current view. The left softkey displays the name of the next view you see when you press the key. 4 Use the 5-way to move to another day, week, month, or year (depending on the current view). Creating an appointment 1 Press Calendar 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select
. New Appointment. 3 Enter a subject (description) and a location. C A L E N D A R 209 10 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R 4 Select Starts and select the starting date and time. 5 Select Ends and select the ending date and time. 6 Press OK
. TIP To pencil in an appointment, open the appointment, select Status, and then select Tentative. 1 2 TIP You can display your appointments on your Today screen (see Selecting which items appear on your Today screen). 1 Number of time units 2 Type of time units 5 Press OK
. Adding an alarm reminder to an event 1 Create an event and then select it. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit. 3 Select Reminder, and then select Remind me. 4 Enter the number of minutes, hours, days, or weeks before the event you would like to receive the alarm. Creating an untimed event An untimed event, such as a birthday, anniversary, or vacation, does not occur at a particular time of day. These events appear as banners at the top of your calendar; they dont occupy blocks of time. For example, Submit Final Draft in the following illustration is an untimed event. DID YOU KNOW? An untimed event can last longer than a day. 210 C A L E N D A R 1 Press Calendar
. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select New Appointment. 3 Enter a subject (description). 4 Select the starting and ending dates. 5 Select All Day, and then select Yes. 6 Press OK
. Scheduling a repeating appointment 1 Create an appointment or untimed event and then select it. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit. 3 Select Occurs, and then select a repeat pattern. To create a repeat pattern, select Edit pattern and follow the onscreen instructions. 10 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R TIP To enter a birthday or an anniversary, create an untimed event that repeats every year. 4 Press OK
. Sending a meeting request You can email meeting invitations to contacts who use Outlook or Outlook Mobile. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Create contact entries with email addresses for the people you want to invite to a meeting (see Adding a contact). You cannot access contact entries without email addresses from your calendar. 1 Create an event and then select it. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit. 3 Select Attendees. 4 Select Add Required Attendee, and then select the name of the contact you want to invite. To invite other attendees, select Add Required Attendee, and then select the names. C A L E N D A R 211 10 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R 5 (Optional) To invite optional attendees, select Add Optional Attendee, and then select the names. DID YOU KNOW? If you are using Exchange Server 2007, or Exchange Server 2003 SP2, you can use your corporate Global Address List to find contact information for an attendee. Select Attendees, select Add Required Attendee or Add Optional Attendee, press Menu (right softkey), and then select Company Directory. Enter the name of the attendee and select Find. 6 Press OK The next time you synchronize, the meeting request is sent to the attendees. When attendees accept your request, the meeting is automatically added to their schedules. When you receive their response, your calendar is updated as well. Replying to a meeting request You receive and reply to meeting requests in the Messaging application (see Working with meeting invitations). If you accept or tentatively accept an invitation, it shows up as an appointment in your Calendar. Marking an event as sensitive If other people have access to your Outlook calendar on your computer and you dont want them to see an appointment, you can mark that appointment as private to hide it from other Outlook users. 1 Create an event and then select it. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit. 3 Select Sensitivity, and then select one of the following:
Personal: Displays the event on your smartphone and on your computer. Meeting attendees or recipients see Please treat this as Personal near the top of an open appointment. Private: Displays the event on your smartphone and on your computer. Meeting attendees or recipients see Please treat this as Private near the top of an open appointment. If you sync with an Exchange server, other users who can access your folders cant see your private events; they see private events as unavailable time slots. 212 C A L E N D A R Confidential: Displays the event on your smartphone and on your computer. Meeting attendees or recipients see Please treat this as Confidential near the top of an open appointment. TIP If you dont see an option on the screen, press Down on the 5-way to scroll to other options. For example, when editing an event, you dont see the Sensitivity option until you scroll toward the bottom of the entry. 4 Press OK
. Organizing your schedule Use categories to view various types of events. 1 Create an event and then select it. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit. 3 Select Categories and check the categories that apply to this event. To add a new category, press New (left softkey), enter the category name, and press OK
. Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R 10 R E T P A H C two more times. 4 Press OK 5 After you assign events to categories, press Menu (right softkey) and select Filter. 6 Select the type of events you want to view. TIP Wonder why youre not seeing all the events in your day? Check to make sure that the filter is set to All Appointments. Deleting an event 1 Highlight the event you want to delete. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Delete Appointment. 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. C A L E N D A R 213 10 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R Customizing Calendar 1 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > Options. Show week numbers: Specifies whether week numbers (1 through 52) appear in Week View. 2 On the General tab, set any of the 3 Select the Appointments tab and set following options:
any of the following options:
Start in: Specifies which view is displayed when you open Calendar. 1st day of week: Specifies Sunday or Monday as the first day of the week for all Calendar views. Week view: Specifies whether five, six, or seven days appear in Week View. Show half hour slots: Specifies whether time slots appear in hour or half-hour increments in Day View and Week View. Set reminders for new items:
Specifies whether a reminder is automatically added to new events and how long before the event the reminder appears. You can override this setting for individual events. Show icons: Specifies which icons appear next to events. The event has a reminder. 214 C A L E N D A R 10 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R The event repeats in a specified pattern. The event has a note attached. A location has been assigned to the Send a multimedia message containing the appointment: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Send as vCalendar. Address the multimedia message and press Send (left softkey). event. The event is a meeting. The event is marked private. Tasks You can use Tasks to remind you of tasks you need to complete and to keep a record of completed tasks. Adding a task 1 Press Start 2 Select Tasks 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select and select Programs. New Task. 4 Enter a description of the task in the Subject field. TIP Not all icons appear in all Calendar views. Send meeting requests via: Specifies the email account used to send meeting requests. 4 Press OK
. Sending an appointment 1 Press Calendar 2 Highlight the appointment you want to
. send. 3 Select one of the following:
Beam an appointment to a nearby device: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Beam Appointment. Select the receiving device. T A S K S 215 10 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R 5 Set any of the following:
Priority: Specifies the priority level for this task. Later you can arrange your tasks based on the importance of each task. Status: Indicates whether the task is now completed. Starts: Specifies when the task begins. Due: Specifies the due date for the task. Occurs: Indicates if the task repeats at regular intervals and how often it repeats. 216 T A S K S Reminder: Sets an alarm for this task and indicates when you want to be reminded. Categories: Assigns the task to one or more categories. To add a new category, press New (left softkey), enter the category name, and press OK
. Sensitivity: Marks this task as Normal, Personal, Private, or Confidential (see Marking an event as sensitive for descriptions of these terms). 6 (Optional) Select the Notes tab and enter additional text for the task. 7 Press OK
. TIP You can also add a task by selecting the Tasks entry bar at the top of the task list screen, entering the task description, and pressing Center on the 5-way. Select the icons to the left of the bar to set the task as high or low priority. TIP You can display your tasks on your Today screen (see Selecting which items appear on your Today screen). Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R Checking off a task 1 Highlight the task you want to check off. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Sort By. 10 R E T P A H C 4 Select the sort method: Status, Priority, Subject, Start Date, or Due Date. Deleting a task 1 Highlight the task you want to delete. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Delete Task. 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. Customizing Tasks 1 Go to the Tasks list. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Options. 3 Set any of the following options:
Set reminders for new items:
Automatically adds a reminder to new tasks. The default reminder is set to 8:00 on the morning the task is due. You can override this setting for individual tasks by using the Reminder field on the task entry screen. T A S K S 217 2 Press Complete (left softkey). TIP You can also mark a task complete by tapping the check box next to the task on the Tasks list. DID YOU KNOW? Overdue tasks appear in red. Organizing your tasks 1 In the Tasks list, press Menu (right softkey) and select Filter. 2 Select which tasks you want to view:
All Tasks, Recently Viewed, No Categories, Active Tasks, Completed Tasks, or a specific category, such as Business or Personal. 10 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R Show start and due dates: Displays task start and due dates in the Tasks list. Show Tasks entry bar: Displays the Tasks entry bar at the top of the Tasks list. 3 Press New (left softkey). 4 Do one of the following:
4 Press OK
. Notes Notes are a great way to capture thoughts, questions, and meeting notes on your smartphone. You can also create a voice note or add a recording to an existing note. BEFORE YOU BEGIN On a Windows XP computer, to take advantage of all the sync features available in the Notes application, install ActiveSync desktop software from your smartphone (see Installing Desktop Sync Software: Windows XP and Windows Vista). Creating a note 1 Press Start 2 Select Notes and select Programs.
Type the text by using the keyboard.
If you turned on writing mode (see Customizing Notes), write the text with the stylus.
Press Menu (right softkey), select Draw, and draw a sketch with the stylus, crossing at least three ruled lines. 5 Press OK
. Creating a voice note 1 Press Start 2 Select Notes 3 Do one of the following:
and select Programs. 218 N O T E S To create a new voice note: Press New (left softkey). To add a voice recording to an existing note: Open the note to which you want to add the recording. 4 If the voice note controls are not visible at the bottom of the screen, press Menu (right softkey) and select View Recording Toolbar. 5 Tap the Record icon.
*
* Voice note controls 6 Speak into the microphone on your smartphone, or hold it close to another sound source. Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R 7 After you finish recording, tap the icon. A Recording Stop appears in the note or note list, depending on where you recorded the note. icon 10 R E T P A H C 8 Press OK
. DID YOU KNOW? You can add several voice notes within a single note. TIP To play a recording, select the voice note in the Notes list, or open the note containing the recording and tap the Recording icon. Tap the controls at the bottom of the screen to control playback and volume. Creating a note from a template 1 Go to the Notes list. 2 Tap the Show list in the upper-left corner and select Templates. If you do not see the Templates folder, select More Folders. 3 Open the template you want to use. 4 Enter the information. 5 Press OK 6 Rename the note and move it to the
. appropriate folder. See Organizing your notes for details. N O T E S 219 10 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R TIP To create a new template, open the note you want to save as a template. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Tools > Rename/
Move. Select Name and enter a name for the template. Select the Folder list and select Templates. Press OK. Organizing your notes You can rename your notes, move notes to another folder, and move notes between your smartphone and an expansion card
(sold separately) inserted into your smartphone. 1 Go to the Notes list and highlight a note you want to move or rename. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Rename/Move. 3 Select Name and enter a new name for the note. 4 Select Folder, and then select the folder in which you want to store the note. 5 Select Location, and then select Main memory or Storage Card. The Storage Card option appears only if you have an expansion card (sold separately) inserted into your smartphone. 6 Press OK
. TIP To create a new folder, go to the Notes list, tap the Show list in the upper-left corner, and select Add/Delete. Select New, enter a name for the folder, and press OK. Deleting a note 1 Go to the Notes list and highlight the note you want to delete. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Delete. 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. Customizing Notes 1 Go to the Notes list. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Options. 3 Set any of the following options:
Default mode: Makes the default entry mode either Writing or Typing. The default is Typing; if you change it to Writing, you can write notes directly on the screen using the stylus. 220 N O T E S Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R Default template: Specifies the default template for new notes. Save to: Indicates the default location where new notes are stored. Record button action: Specifies what happens when you press and hold the Side button to record a voice note while in another application: whether the Notes application opens or whether you stay in the current application. This option applies only if you have changed the function of the Side button to open Notes (see Reassigning buttons). TIP Tap Global Input Options to set options for entering text in any application (see Setting input options). 4 Press OK
. 10 R E T P A H C N O T E S 221 Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R 10 R E T P A H C 222 N O T E S Your Microsoft Office and other document tools Your Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm enables you to take your office with youincluding your Microsoft Office files. With Microsoft Office Mobile, you can carry, create, view, and edit Microsoft Word, Excel, and OneNote files directly on your smartphone. You can also view, carry, and manage PowerPoint files on your smartphone. You can keep updated copies of the files on both your smartphone and your computer so that you can work on them in the most convenient location at any time. You can also use Adobe Reader to view PDF files on your smartphone. Benefits
Manage Word, Excel, PowerPoint,
and OneNote files on your smartphone Improve productivity by taking important docs, spreadsheets, and presentations with you
Work with PDF files CHAPTER 11 223 In this chapter Synchronizing your Microsoft Office files. 225 Word Mobile. 227 PowerPoint Mobile . 234 Excel Mobile. 235 OneNote Mobile . 246 Adobe Reader LE . 249 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S Synchronizing your Microsoft Office files You can create and edit Microsoft Office files on your computer or on your smartphone and then synchronize the files so that changes you make show up on both your computer and your smartphone. How synchronization happens depends on two conditions:
Operating system: Do you use Windows XP or Windows Vista?
Sync direction: Are you transferring files from your smartphone to your computer, or from your computer to your smartphone?
For information about installing desktop sync software and about synchronizing with your computer, see Installing Desktop Sync Software: Windows XP and Windows Vista. Synchronizing files that are on your smartphone: Windows XP or Windows Vista BEFORE YOU BEGIN Turn on the option to synchronize files (see Changing which applications sync). To synchronize files that you capture on or copy to your smartphone, simply follow one of the procedures for synchronizing with your computer described in Synchronizing with desktop sync software. After you synchronize, you can view and edit the items on your computer (see Where are the changes I made to my file?). Synchronizing files that are on your computer: Windows XP 1 Connect your smartphone to your computer with the USB cable. NOTE Most ActiveSync desktop software options are available only when your smartphone is connected to your computer. S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E F I L E S 225 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S 2 On your computer, double-click the ActiveSync icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen to open the ActiveSync desktop software window. TIP If the ActiveSync icon does not appear in the taskbar, click Start > Programs >
Microsoft ActiveSync to open the ActiveSync window. TIP If Files doesnt appear under Information Type, open the Tools menu and select Options. Make sure the Files box is checked. 4 Do either of the following:
To copy a file from your computer to your smartphone, click Add, browse to and highlight the file, and click Open.
To delete a file from the file sync folder on your computer and from your smartphone, highlight the file name and click Remove. NOTE If you receive an error while synchronizing files, make sure that all the files youre trying to sync are closed on both your computer and your smartphone. TIP If a Treo My Documents sync folder has been created on your computer, you can also synchronize by dragging files into the appropriate subfolder under that folder. 3 Under Information Type, double-click Files to view a list of all synchronized files. 226 S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E F I L E S 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S Synchronizing files that are on your computer: Windows Vista 1 On your computer, copy or save the file to the Documents\Documents on usernames Smartphone folder. DID YOU KNOW? The Documents on usernames smartphone folder is created when you select the option to sync Files. 2 Connect your smartphone to your computer with the USB cable. Synchronization takes place automatically. Synchronization Settings dialog box (under On this computer, synchronize the files in this folder). Windows Vista: Open the Documents\
Documents on usernames Smartphone folder. On your smartphone, you can find the synchronized file by doing either of the following:
Press Start and select Office Mobile. Select the application that opens the file: Word Mobile Mobile OneNote Mobile
, PowerPoint Mobile
.
, Excel
. or Where are the changes I made to my file?
Dont look for the changed file in its original location on your computer. Only the synchronized version contains the changes, and that version is in the file sync folder. To find this folder, do one of the following:
Windows XP: On your computer desktop, double-click the file sync folder icon. This is a shortcut to the file sync folder. Windows XP: In ActiveSync desktop software, double-click Files. The location of the file sync folder appears in the File
Press Start
, select Programs, and then select File Explorer
. Tap the Show list in the upper-left corner and select My Device > My Documents. Word Mobile With Microsoft Office Word Mobile, you can create and edit documents and templates and save them as DOC, RTF, TXT, and DOT files. You can also edit W O R D M O B I L E 227 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S Microsoft Office Word documents and templates that you create on your computer. However, keep in mind that some of the information and formatting may be lost when you save the document on your smartphone. DID YOU KNOW? If you have a PDF file (.pdf), you can view the file using Adobe Reader. Press Start, select Programs, and then select Adobe Reader (see Adobe Reader LE). The following features are not supported in Word Mobile:
Backgrounds.
Bidirectional text.
Document protection.
Metafiles.
Artistic page borders. Lined page borders are supported.
Password-protected files. Remove password protection on your computer before opening the file on your smartphone.
Shapes and text boxes.
Smart tags. The following features are partially supported in Word Mobile:
Picture bullets: Regular bullets are supported. Revision marks: Documents appear as though all revisions were accepted; if the document is saved, revision marks are lost. Table styles: Some or all of the formatting is lost if the document is saved. Underline styles: Unsupported styles are mapped to one of the four supported styles: regular, dotted, wavy, or thick/bold/
wide. Legacy Pocket Word files: You can open PSW files, but if you edit a file, you need to save it in DOC, RTF, TXT, or DOT format. The following features are not supported on your smartphone, but they remain in the file so that when you open the file on your computer, they appear as expected:
Fonts and font sizes: Original fonts are listed on your smartphone and are mapped to the closest font available. Footnotes, endnotes, headers, and footers. 228 W O R D M O B I L E 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S Lists: Indented lists are mapped to the closest indentation level supported by Word Mobile. Page breaks: Although not displayed, all page breaks, except a break placed at the end of a document, are retained in the document. Creating a document 1 Press Start and select Office Mobile. 2 Select Word Mobile 3 The first time you open Word Mobile, a
. new document opens. Otherwise, press New (left softkey). 4 Enter the text of the document. 5 Press OK to save the file. When you save a new document, it is automatically named after the first several words in the file. Opening an existing document 1 Press Start and select Office Mobile. 2 Select Word Mobile
. 3 In the document list, select the document you want to open. TIP To zoom in or out, press View (left softkey), select Zoom, and then select the zoom level. Creating a document from a template 1 Go to the documents list. 2 Tap the Show list in the upper-left corner and select Templates. If you dont see Templates in the Show list, select More Folders to access this folder. 3 Open the template you want to use. 4 Press Menu (right softkey) and select File > Save As. 5 Select Name and enter a new name for the file. 6 Select the Folder list, and then select the folder where you want to save the file. 7 Select the Type list, and then select the format in which you want to save the file. 8 Select the Location list, and then select whether you want to store the file on W O R D M O B I L E 229 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S your smartphone (Main memory) or on an expansion card (Storage card). The Storage card option appears only if you have an expansion card (sold separately) inserted into your smartphone. 9 Select Save. TIP To create a new template, open the document you want to save as a template. Press Menu (right softkey) and select File >
Rename/Move. Select Name and enter a name for the template. Select Folder, and then select Templates. Press OK. Finding or replacing text in a document 1 Open the document containing the text you want to find. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit > Find/Replace. 3 Select Find what and enter the text you want to find. 4 (Optional) Check the Match case box to find text that matches the capitalization in the text you entered step 3. 5 (Optional) Check the Match whole words only box to find only full words that match the text you entered in step 3. 6 Select Find to locate the first instance of the text you entered in step 3, or select Replace and enter the replacement text. 7 Select Next to find the next instance of the text, or select Replace to replace it. To replace all instances of the text, select Replace All. 8 When you see a message indicating that the search is done, press OK
. Moving or copying text 1 Open the document containing the text you want to move or copy. 2 Highlight the text you want to move or copy. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Copy to copy the text, or select Cut to move the text. 4 Open the document where you want to insert the text, and position the cursor where you want the text to appear. 5 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Paste. 230 W O R D M O B I L E 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S Saving a copy of a document NOTE If a document was previously saved on a computer, any unsupported formatting may be lost when you save the file. 1 Open the document you want to copy. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select File > Save As. 3 Select Name and enter a new name for the file. 4 Select the Folder list, and then select the folder where you want to save the file. 5 Select the Type list, and then select the format in which you want to save the file. 6 Select the Location list, and then select whether you want to store the file on your smartphone (Main memory) or on an expansion card (Storage card). The Storage card option appears only if you have an expansion card (sold separately) inserted into your smartphone. 7 Select Save. Formatting text 1 Open the document you want to format. 2 Highlight the text you want to format. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Format > Font. 4 Set any of the following options for the highlighted text:
Font: Specifies the typeface. Font color: Specifies the color. Size: Specifies the point size. Bold: Indicates whether the text appears normal or thick. Italic: Indicates whether the text appears upright or slanted. Underline: Indicates whether the text appears with an underscore. Highlight: Indicates whether the text appears with a yellow highlight. Strikethrough: Indicates whether the text appears with a line through it. 5 Press OK document. to return to the W O R D M O B I L E 231 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S Formatting paragraphs and lists 1 Open the document you want to format. 2 Position the cursor in the paragraph you want to format. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Format > Paragraph. 4 Set any of the following options:
Alignment: Aligns the text paragraph with the left, right, or center of the page. List: Creates a bulleted or numbered list. Indentation: Changes the paragraph margins.
Left: Sets the left margin for the entire paragraph. TIP You can also use the Formatting toolbar to create a list and to align text. To indent text in lists, you must use the Formatting toolbar. Checking spelling in a document 1 Open the document you want to check. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > Spelling. To check the spelling of specific text, highlight it before you select Spelling. 3 If an unknown or misspelled word is encountered, do one of the following:
Select the correct word in the list if the word is spelled incorrectly.
Select Ignore if the word is spelled correctly. Select Ignore All to skip all instances of the word.
Select Add to add a new word to the
Right: Sets the right margin for the spelling dictionary. entire paragraph.
Special: Lets you indent the first line or set a hanging indent.
By: Sets the size of the special indentation. 5 Press OK document. to return to the Organizing your documents You can rename your documents, move your documents to another folder, and move your documents between your smartphone and an expansion card (sold separately) inserted into your smartphone. 232 W O R D M O B I L E 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S 1 Go to the documents list. 2 Highlight a file. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Deleting a document 1 Go to the documents list. 2 Highlight the document you want to Rename/Move. delete. 4 Select Name and enter a new name for 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select the document. Delete. 5 Select the Folder list, and then select the folder to which you want to move the document. 6 Select the Location list, and then select whether you want to store the file on your smartphone (Main memory) or on an expansion card (Storage card). The Storage card option appears only if you have an expansion card (sold separately) inserted into your smartphone. 7 Press OK
. TIP To create a new folder, go to the documents list, tap the Show list in the upper-left corner, and select Add/Delete. Select New, enter a name for the folder, and press OK. TIP When you go to a folder, you can easily search your documents by sorting by type. 4 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. Customizing Word Mobile 1 Go to the document list. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Options. 3 Set any of the following options:
Default template: Sets the default template for new documents. Save to: Sets the default location where new documents are stored. Display in list view: Sets the types of files that appear in the documents list. 4 Press OK
. W O R D M O B I L E 233 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S PowerPoint Mobile With Microsoft Office PowerPoint Mobile, you can open and view slide show presentations created on your computer. Many presentation elements such as slide transitions, animations, and URL links are also supported. Microsoft Office PowerPoint features not supported on your smartphone include the following:
Notes written for slides
Rearrangement or editing of slides
Files created in PPT format earlier than Microsoft PowerPoint 97
HTML files in HTM and MHT formats Playing a presentation 1 Press Start and select Office Mobile. 2 Select PowerPoint Mobile 3 In the presentation list, select the
. presentation you want to play. 4 Do any of the following:
Press Right slide, or Left slide. to advance to the next to view the previous NOTE If a presentation is set up as a timed slide show, the slides advance automatically. Presentations pause during zooming.
Press Center
, select Go to Slide, and then select the slide you want to view.
Press Center and select Next or Previous to play animations.
To zoom in, press Center and select Zoom In. Tap and drag the slide to scroll it. 5 To end the slide show, press Center and select End Show. Setting presentation playback options 1 Highlight the presentation for which you want to change the settings. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Set up show. 3 On the Orientation tab, select the orientation you want. To select the orientation that best fits your smartphone screen, select Default. 234 P O W E R P O I N T M O B I L E 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S 4 Select the Playback tab, and check the Override playback options for all files box. 5 Set any of the following options:
Show without animation: Turns off builds and other animations. Show without slide transition: Turns off transition effects between slides. Use timings, if present: Enables the timings recorded with each slide in a presentation. If a presentation is set up as a timed slide show, the slides advance automatically. Presentations pause during zooming. Loop continuously: Advances to the first slide after playing the last slide in a presentation. 6 Press OK
. TIP To turn the presentation into a continuously looping slide show, check both the Use timings, if present and the Loop continuously boxes. Excel Mobile With Microsoft Office Excel Mobile, you can create and edit workbooks and templates on your smartphone. You can also edit workbooks and templates that you create on your computer. However, you may lose some of the information and formatting when you save the workbook on your smartphone. Note the following formatting considerations:
Alignment: Vertical text appears horizontal. Borders: Appear as a single line. Cell patterns: Patterns applied to cells are removed. Fonts and font sizes: The original font is listed on your smartphone and mapped to the closest font available. Original fonts reappear on your computer. Number formats: Microsoft Office Excel 97 conditional formatting is displayed in Number format. E X C E L M O B I L E 235 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S Formulas and functions: Unsupported functions are removed, and only the returned value of the function appears. Formulas containing the following are also converted to values:
An array or array argument, for example,
=SUM({1;2;3;4}).
External link references or an intersection range reference.
References past row 16384 are replaced with #REF!. Protection settings: Most protection features are disabled but not removed. However, password protection is removed. You must remove the password protection in Microsoft Office Excel on your computer before opening the file on your smartphone. Zoom settings: Worksheet-specific zoom settings are not retained. The zoom setting applies to the entire workbook. Worksheet names: Names that refer to other workbooks, arrays, array formulas, or intersection ranges are removed from the name list, causing those formulas to be resolved as #NAME? All hidden names are not hidden. AutoFilter Settings: AutoFilters that cause rows to be hidden are supported. Use the Unhide command to display hidden rows. Other AutoFilters are removed, but you can use the AutoFilter command in Excel Mobile to perform similar functions. Chart Formatting: All charts are saved as they appear in Excel Mobile. Unsupported chart types are changed to one of these supported types: Column, Bar, Line, Pie, Scatter, and Area. Background colors, gridlines, data labels, trend lines, shadows, 3D effects, secondary axes, and logarithmic scales are turned off. The following features arent supported in Excel Mobile and are removed or modified when you open a workbook on your smartphone:
Hidden, dialog, and macro sheets
VBA modules
Text boxes
Drawing objects and pictures
Lists
Conditional formats and controls
Pivot table data (converted to values) 236 E X C E L M O B I L E 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S Creating a workbook 1 Press Start and select Office 3 Open the template you want to use. 4 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Mobile. File > Save As. 2 Select Excel Mobile
. If this is your first time to open Excel Mobile, a new workbook appears, and you can go to step 4. 3 Press New (left softkey). 4 Highlight a cell where you want to enter text or other info. 5 Enter the info into the cell and press 5 Select Name and enter a new name for the workbook. 6 Select the Folder list, and then select the folder where you want to save the workbook. 7 Select the Type list, and then select the format in which you want to save the workbook. Return
. 8 Select Save. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter the remaining info. 7 Press OK to save the file. When you save a new workbook, it is automatically named and placed in the workbook list. Creating a workbook from a template 1 Go to the workbook list. 2 Tap the Show list in the upper-left corner and select Templates. If you dont see Templates in the Show list, select More Folders to access this folder. TIP To create a new template, highlight the workbook you want to save as a template. Press Menu (right softkey), select Rename/
Move, select Name, and then enter a name for the template. Select the Folder list, and then select Templates. Press OK. Viewing a workbook 1 Press Start and select Office Mobile. 2 Select Excel Mobile 3 In the workbook list, select the
. workbook you want to view. E X C E L M O B I L E 237 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S 4 Press View (left softkey) and select any of the following:
Full Screen: Shows as much data as possible on the screen. To return to the normal view, tap Restore in the upper-right corner. Zoom: Sets the magnification level so that you can easily read the worksheet. Sheet: Lets you switch to a different worksheet. DID YOU KNOW? You can also switch worksheets by tapping the sheet list at the bottom of the screen. Split: Divides the window into two scrollable areas. To move the split bar, tap and drag it. To remove the split bar, press View (left softkey) and select Remove Split. Freeze Panes: Locks rows and columns so that they remain visible while you scroll. Highlight the cell at the point at which you want to lock before you select this command. To unlock the rows or columns, press View (left softkey) and select Unfreeze Panes. Toolbar: Indicates whether the toolbar appears onscreen. Status Bar: Indicates whether the status bar appears onscreen. Show: Indicates whether headings and scroll bars appear onscreen. TIP To jump to a cell or region, press Menu and select Edit > Go To. Select Cell reference or name and enter the target cell info, or select Current region. Select OK. Calculating a sum 1 Press View (left softkey) and select Toolbar. 2 Highlight the cell where you want to insert the sum. 3 Tap 4 Tap and drag the stylus across the cells you want to add. 5 Press Return TIP For simple calculations, use the Calculator
(see Calculator). 238 E X C E L M O B I L E 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S 4 Finish entering the formula and press OK
. TIP To refer to a cell from another worksheet in your formula, enter the worksheet name followed by an exclamation point (!) and the cell, range, or name reference. Example: =Sheet1!Earnings TIP To create a 3-D reference in your formula, specify two or more sheets in a workbook. Use a colon between the first and last worksheet names. Example: =SUM(Sheet2:Sheet6!$A$2:$C$5) Inserting a function 1 Open the workbook where you want to insert the function. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Insert > Function. Entering a formula 1 Highlight the cell where you want to enter the formula. 2 Enter an equals sign ( = ) followed by any values, cell references, name references, operators, and functions. Examples:
=(B4/25)+100
=Revenue-Expenses 3 Press Return
. TIP Use the Alt key to insert an equals sign. TIP To insert a symbol, place the cursor where you want the symbol. Press Menu (right softkey) and select Insert > Symbol. Highlight the symbol you want to insert, and select Insert. Referring to a cell or range in a formula 1 Open the workbook where you want to refer to a cell or range in a formula. 2 Begin entering a formula in a cell. 3 Navigate to the cell you want to refer to in the formula. To refer to a range, tap and drag the stylus over the cells you want to include in the range. E X C E L M O B I L E 239 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S 3 Select the Category list, and then select the type of function you want to insert. 4 Select the Function list, and then select the specific function you want to insert. 5 Select OK. Entering a sequence automatically 1 Tap and drag with the stylus to highlight both the cells containing the info you want to automate and the adjacent destination cells. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit > Fill. 3 Select the Direction list, and then select the direction you want to populate. 4 Select the Fill type list, and then select Series. 5 Select the Series type list, and then select the type of series you want. If you select Date or Number, enter a Step value increment. TIP Select Autofill as the series type to quickly fill cells with repetitive data such as numbers or repeated text. Autofill takes the content of the first cell in the highlighted row or column and copies it down or across the rest of the selection. 6 Select OK. Adding cells, rows, and columns 1 Open the workbook you want. 2 Highlight the area where you want to insert elements. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Insert > Cells. 4 Select how you want to insert the elements:
Shift cells right: Inserts the same number of new cells as the number of cells you highlighted horizontally in step 2. For example, if you selected an area containing two cells horizontally (A1 and B1), selecting Shift cells right inserts two horizontal cells; so the original A1 and B1 (and their contents) are now C1 and D1. The highlighted area and all cells on the right move the same 240 E X C E L M O B I L E 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S number of columnstwo in this exampleto the right. Shift cells down: Inserts the same number of new cells as the number of cells you highlighted vertically in step 2. For example, if you selected an area containing two cells vertically (A1 and A2), selecting Shift cells down inserts two vertical cells; so the original A1 and A2 (and their contents) are now A3 and A4. The highlighted area and all cells below it move the same number of rowstwo in this exampledown. Entire row: Inserts the same number of new rows as the number of cells you highlighted vertically in step 2. For example, if you selected an area containing two cells vertically (A1 and A2), selecting Entire row inserts two rows; so the original rows 1 and 2 (and their contents) are now rows 3 and 4. The rows containing the highlighted area and all rows beneath it move the same number of rowstwo in this exampledown. Entire column: Inserts the same number of new columns as the number of cells you highlighted horizontally in step 2. For example, if you selected an area containing two cells horizontally
(A1 and B1), selecting Entire column inserts two columns; so the original columns A and B (and their contents) are now columns C and D. The columns containing the highlighted area and all columns on the right move the same number of columnstwo in this exampleto the right. 5 Select OK. TIP To add a new worksheet, press Menu and select Format > Modify Sheets. Select Insert, enter a name for the worksheet, and press OK. To change the order of the worksheets, highlight a worksheet you want to move, select Move Up or Move Down, and press OK. Formatting cells 1 Open the workbook you want to format. 2 Highlight the cells you want to format. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Format > Cells. E X C E L M O B I L E 241 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S 4 Select any of the following tabs:
Size: Sets the row height and column width. Number: Sets the type of information the cells contain. Align: Sets whether text wraps within the highlighted cells, and sets horizontal and vertical alignment position. Font: Sets the typeface, color, size, and style attributes. Borders: Turns borders on and off for various cell edges, and sets the border and background colors. 5 Press OK
. TIP To name the highlighted cell or range of cells, press Menu and select Insert > Define Name. Enter the name and select Add. Press OK. Formatting rows and columns 1 Open the workbook you want to format. 2 Highlight the rows or columns you want to format. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Format > Row or Format > Column. 4 Select any of the following:
AutoFit: Adjusts the size of the highlighted rows or columns to their contents. Hide: Hides the highlighted rows or columns. Unhide: Displays hidden rows or columns in the highlighted area. DID YOU KNOW? You can adjust the column and row size by tapping and dragging the right edge of the column or the bottom edge of the row. To automatically fit rows and columns to their contents, double-tap the lower edge of the row heading or the right edge of the column heading. Renaming a worksheet 1 Open the workbook containing the worksheet you want to rename. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Format > Modify Sheets. 3 In the Sheets list, highlight the worksheet you want to rename. 242 E X C E L M O B I L E 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S 4 Select Rename, enter a new name for 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select the worksheet, and press OK twice. Sorting info in a worksheet 1 Highlight the cells you want to sort. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > Sort. 3 Select the Sort by list, and then select the primary sort column. 4 Check the Ascending box to sort in ascending (AZ or 09) order. Leave the box unchecked to sort in descending (Z A or 90) order. 5 (Optional) Select the Then by lists, and then select second- and third-level sorting options. 6 Check or uncheck the Exclude header row from sort box to indicate whether you want to sort the header row. 7 Select OK. Filtering info in a worksheet 1 Tap and drag the stylus to highlight the cells that contain the info you want to filter. Tools > AutoFilter. In each column containing a highlighted cell, an arrow appears on the right side of the cell nearest the top of the column. 3 Tap the arrow to open a list and select a filter. This hides all rows that do not include the selected filter. 4 (Optional) Do any of the following:
Open the other lists, and select other filters.
To display all rows again, open the filter lists and select All.
To turn off filtering, press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > AutoFilter again. DID YOU KNOW? You can also create custom filters where you specify comparisons. Open a filter list and select Custom. Creating a chart 1 Open the workbook in which you want to create a chart. 2 Highlight the cells you want to include in the chart. E X C E L M O B I L E 243 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Insert > Chart. appears, and the placement of the legend. 4 Select the type of chart, and press Next
(right softkey). 5 Confirm the area you want the chart to include, and press Next (right softkey). 6 Select the data layout, and press Next
(right softkey). 7 Check the boxes to indicate whether the first row and column represent labels. 8 Select whether you want the chart to appear as a separate worksheet within the current workbook, or as part of the current worksheet. 9 Press Finish (right softkey). Formatting or changing a chart 1 Open the workbook that contains the chart you want to format. 2 Open the chart. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Format > Chart. 4 Select any of the following tabs:
Titles: Specifies the title of the chart and headings, whether a legend Scale: Specifies the minimum and maximum scales for charts with x and y axes. Type: Specifies the chart style. You can use this setting to convert your chart to a different format. Series: Lets you add, modify, format, or delete related data points without affecting the info in your worksheet. 5 Press OK
. Finding or replacing info in a workbook 1 Open the workbook containing the info you want to find. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit > Find/Replace. 3 Select Find what and enter the info you want to find. 4 (Optional) Check the Match case box to find text that matches the capitalization in any text you entered. 5 (Optional) Check the Match entire cells box to find only cells whose contents exactly match the text you entered. 244 E X C E L M O B I L E 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S 6 Select Find to locate the first instance 6 Select the Location list, and then select of the info you entered, or select Replace and enter the replacement info. 7 Select Next to find the next instance of the info, or select Replace to replace it. To replace all instances of the info, select Replace All. 8 When you see a message that the search is done, press OK
. Organizing your workbooks You can rename your workbooks. You can also move them to another folder or move them between your smartphone and an expansion card (sold separately) inserted into your smartphone. 1 Go to the workbook list. 2 Highlight a file. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Rename/Move. 4 Select Name and enter a new name for the workbook. 5 Select the Folder list, and then select the folder to which you want to move the workbook. whether you want to store the file on your smartphone (Main memory) or on an expansion card (Storage Card). The Storage Card option appears only if you have an expansion card (sold separately) inserted into your smartphone. 7 Press OK
. TIP When you go to a folder, you can easily search your files by sorting by type. Deleting cells, rows, and columns 1 Open the workbook containing the elements you want to delete. 2 Highlight the area you want to delete. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit > Delete Cells. 4 Select how you want to remove the elements:
Shift cells left: Deletes the highlighted cells and moves all cells on their right to the left. Shift cells up: Deletes the highlighted cells and moves all cells below them up. E X C E L M O B I L E 245 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S Entire row: Deletes the entire row(s) in which the highlighted cells are located, and moves all rows below up. Entire column: Deletes the entire column(s) in which the highlighted cells are located, and moves all columns on their right to the left. NOTE Excel Mobile adjusts formulas to reflect the new cell locations. However, a formula that refers to a deleted cell displays the #REF! error value. 3 Set any of the following options:
Template for new workbook:
Specifies the default template for new workbooks. Save new workbooks to: Specifies where new workbooks are stored. Files to display in list view: Specifies which types of files appear in the workbook list. 4 Press OK
. 5 Select OK. TIP To delete a workbook, go to the workbook list and highlight the workbook you want to delete. Press Menu (right softkey) and select Delete. Select Yes to confirm. TIP To delete a worksheet, press Menu (right softkey) and select Format > Modify Sheets. Highlight the worksheet you want to delete and select Delete. Select Yes and press OK. Customizing Excel Mobile 1 Go to the workbook list. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Options. OneNote Mobile OneNote Mobile lets you create digital notes that contain text, pictures, and audio and video. You can then synchronize these notes with Microsoft Office OneNote 2007 on your computer. During synchronization, all the notes you create on your smartphone are copied to a notebook called OneNote Mobile on your computer;
you can then drag your notes to other 246 O N E N O T E M O B I L E 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S locations on your computer. You can use OneNote Mobile to do any of the following:
Take pictures of business cards and then insert them into OneNote.
Take pictures of flip charts and whiteboards in conference rooms, and then insert them into OneNote.
Create text notes and voice recordings
(for example, reminders of important events, ideas for projects, price comparisons, recommendations, blog ideas, and so on) and synchronize them with your notes.
Prepare meeting or travel information in OneNote on your computer and then transfer it to your smartphone so you can access the information on the road. Creating a note 1 Press Start Mobile. and select Office 2 Select OneNote Mobile 3 Press New (left softkey). 4 Begin typing your note text, or do any of the following:
Format text: Press Menu (right softkey), select Format, and then select the formatting option you want: Bold, Italic, Underline, or Strikethrough. Enter the text you want formatted. To resume entering unformatted text, press Menu (right softkey), select Format, and then select the formatting option again. TIP You can apply more than one formatting style to text. Press Menu (right softkey) and select Format for each style you want to apply to the text you are going to enter. TIP To clear the formatting from entered text, highlight the text with the stylus, press Menu
(right softkey), and select Format > Clear All. Enter a list: Press Menu (right softkey), select List, and then select Numbered or Bulleted. When you have finished entering the list items, press Menu
(right softkey), select List, and then select the list option again to turn off list formatting. O N E N O T E M O B I L E 247 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S TIP To remove list formatting from entered text, highlight the text with the stylus, press Menu (right softkey), and select List > Clear. Create a hyperlink: Enter the website address for which you want to create the hyperlink. For example, to create a hyperlink to the Microsoft website, enter http://www.microsoft.com. Insert a picture: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Take Picture to take a picture with your smartphones camera or Insert Picture to insert an existing picture. Insert an audio recording: Press Menu (right softkey) and select Insert Recording. Tap the onscreen controls to create your recording. Tap OK to accept the recording and add it to the note. 5 When you have finished creating your note, press Done (left softkey). TIP While you are composing the note, use menu items to undo and redo your last action, and to cut, copy, and paste text. After you have completed the note and pressed Done, use menu commands to delete or rename the note. Viewing or editing an existing note 1 Press Start and select Office Mobile. 2 Select OneNote Mobile 3 In the OneNote Mobile list, select the
. note that you want to open. 4 Do any of the following:
Open a hyperlink: Place the cursor anywhere in the link, and then press Center
. View picture detail: Highlight the picture, press Center
, and then press Menu (right softkey) and select Zoom In. To zoom in further, press Menu (right softkey) and select Zoom In again. Use the 5-way to view different parts of the picture. To zoom out, press Menu (right softkey) and select Zoom Out; you can also select Actual Size or Fit to Screen. 248 O N E N O T E M O B I L E 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S Play a voice note: Highlight the voice note and press Center
,. 5 Press Done (left softkey) to close the note. Renaming a note 1 In the OneNote Mobile list, select the note that you want to rename. 2 Press Menu (right softkey), and then select Rename. 3 Enter the new name. 4 Press Done (left softkey) to accept the new name. Sorting your notes 1 Press Start and select Office Mobile. 2 Select OneNote Mobile 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select
. Options. 4 In the Sort notes by list, press Up to select Name or Date Down modified. or 5 Press Done (left softkey). Deleting a note 1 In the OneNote Mobile list, select the note that you want to delete. 2 Press Menu (right softkey), and then select Delete. 3 Select Yes to confirm deletion. Adobe Reader LE Adobe Reader LE lets you view PDF files whether they are saved to your smartphone, attached to email messages, stored on an expansion card (sold separately) inserted into your smartphones expansion card slot, or downloaded from the web. You can customize the document display. Viewing a file Adobe Reader LE supports password-protected PDF files with up to 128-bit encryption. When you open a password-protected PDF file, you must enter the password to open the file. A D O B E R E A D E R L E 249 5 Tap any of the following to move around within the PDF file:
Move to the next page. Move to the previous page. Jump to the first page of the file. Jump to the last page of the file. 6 To open another file, press Menu (right softkey) and select Open. Select a recently opened file, or select Browse and navigate to the file you want. Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S 11 R E T P A H C and select Programs. 1 Press Start 2 Select Adobe Reader 3 Navigate to and select the file you want
. to open. TIP To open additional files, press Menu (right softkey) and select Open. Select the file you want from the list, or select Browse to navigate to and select the file. 4 Press Down to scroll to the next page (in Single Page mode) or to scroll the display down (in Continuous mode). Press Up to scroll to the preceding page or to scroll the display up. 250 A D O B E R E A D E R L E 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S TIP To go to a specific page, press Tools (left softkey) and select Go To. DID YOU KNOW? If the file was created with bookmarks, Adobe Reader LE displays the bookmarks pane on the left side of the screen. Select a heading in the bookmarks pane to jump to that section. DID YOU KNOW? To view detailed information about the file you are viewing, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Details. Changing display options You can change the display size, the scroll option, and more. 1 Press Tools (left softkey), select View, and then select any of the following:
Rotate Right/Left: Rotates the page in the selected direction. Single Page: Displays the pages so that when you use Up scroll the file, the display jumps a page at a time. or Down to Continuous: Displays the pages so that when you use Up scroll the file, the display scrolls continuously up or down without jumping. or Down to 2 Press Tools (left softkey), select Zoom, and then select one of the following options:
In: Increases the file display size to enlarge font and image size. Out: Decreases the file display size to fit more of the file on the screen. To %: Specifies a specific zoom level for the display. Fit screen: Sizes the display so an entire page fits on the screen from top to bottom. Fit width: Sizes the display so that the width of the page fills the display from side to side. Finding text in a file 1 With the file open, press Tools (left softkey) and select Find > Text. 2 Enter the text you want to find. 3 (Optional) Check the Match case box to find text that matches the capitalization in the text you entered. 4 (Optional) Check the Whole word box to find only full words that match the text you entered. A D O B E R E A D E R L E 251 11 R E T P A H C Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S 5 (Optional) Check the Backwards box to search the file backward. 6 Press Find (left softkey). 7 To find the next occurrence of the text, press Tools (left softkey) and select Find > Next. 252 A D O B E R E A D E R L E Your application and info management tools Your Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm comes equipped with a variety of tools for managing and organizing your information. Find nearby businesses and driving directions. Get the most out of your smartphone: Install some of the thousands of business, education, or leisure-time applications available. Use one of several options to share business and personal info with others. Insert expansion cards (sold separately) for a compact and virtually limitless answer to the storage dilemma. And because theres one on your smartphone, you never need to carry a separate calculator. Benefits
Locate info in any application, or locate any address on a map Install applications, games, and other software
Keep others up-to-date with meaningful business and personal information
Store, carry, and exchange info
Always have a calculator with you CHAPTER 12 253 In this chapter Finding information . 255 Installing applications . 257 Removing applications . 260 Sharing information . 261 Beaming information . 261 Using expansion cards . 264 Accessing information on a remote computer. 268 Calculator . 270 Finding information Quickly find who or what youre looking for by using one of these search features:
Search: Look through the text in all the applications on your smartphone. File Explorer: Browse through the files and folders on your smartphone or on an expansion card. Lookup: Find and dial your contacts by name or phone number. See Dialing by contact name for details. Global Address List Lookup: Look up names in your online corporate address list
(see Finding a contact in an online address book). Email message search: Display only those messages whose senders, recipients, or subjects match the text you enter (see Finding messages). TIP For information on opening and closing apps, see Opening and closing applications. Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S 12 R E T P A H C Using Search Search for files and other items stored in the My Documents folder on your smartphone or on an expansion card (sold separately) inserted into your smartphone. You can search by file name or by words located in the item. For example, you can search for words within notes, appointments, contacts, and tasks. 1 Press Start 2 Select Search and select Programs. DID YOU KNOW? You can also open Search by pressing Option + left Shift. 3 Select Search for and enter the file name, word, or other info you want to find. F I N D I N G I N F O R M A T I O N 255 12 R E T P A H C Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S TIP If youve looked for an item before, select the Search for list, and then select the item in the list. TIP When two or more words are entered in the Search for field, the search results contains only items that contain all the words. 4 Select the Type list, and then select the kind of information you want to find. TIP If you are searching for information in certain applications, such as Messaging or Word Mobile, press Advanced (right softkey) for more search options. 5 Press Search (left softkey). 6 Use the 5-way to select and view an item from the results of the search. A storage card symbol appears next to the names of files that are located on an expansion card. Exploring files and folders You can use File Explorer to browse the contents of folders on your smartphone or on an expansion card (sold separately) inserted into your smartphone. The root folder on your smartphone is named My Device. My Device is similar to My Computer (Windows XP) or Computer
(Windows Vista) on your computer. and select Programs. 1 Press Start 2 Select File Explorer 3 Select the folder you want to explore. If the folder you want is not displayed, tap the Show list in the upper-left corner and select My Device to view all folders. 1 2 1 Show list 2 Sort by list 256 F I N D I N G I N F O R M A T I O N 12 R E T P A H C Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S TIP When the items in a folder are displayed, you can sort them by name, date, size, or type. Select the Sort by list in the upper-right corner, and then select the sort method. DID YOU KNOW? The storage card symbol appears next to the names of files that are stored on an expansion card. 4 Do any of the following:
To open an item: Select it. To quickly delete, rename, beam, or email an item: Highlight the item, press and hold Center shortcut menu, and then select the appropriate command. to open the IMPORTANT Do not delete any files that you cannot identify. These files may be required for your smartphone to function properly. to open the shortcut menu, To move a file to another folder:
Highlight the item, press and hold Center and select Cut or Copy. Open the destination folder, press and hold Center and then select Paste. to open the shortcut menu, To highlight multiple items: Tap and drag the stylus. Installing applications Your smartphone comes with several built-in and ready-to-use applications. You can also install third-party applications that are compatible with Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.1 Professional edition devices, such as business software, games, and more. Applications you download to your computer are likely to be in a compressed format such as ZIP. If the file is compressed, you need to decompress the file before you install the application on your smartphone. You can decompress the file on your smartphone in File Explorer or on your computer using a decompression utility such as WinZip. TIP You can also send the file to yourself as an email attachment, and then open the attachment on your smartphone to automatically decompress the file (see Opening attachments). I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S 257 12 R E T P A H C Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S The following instructions tell you how to install basic files onto your smartphone. Some software uses an installer or wizard to guide you through the process. For details, consult the documentation that came with the software. NOTE If you encounter a problem with a third-party application (such as an error message), contact the applications vendor. For general troubleshooting of third-party applications, see Third-party applications. TIP If an application does not have a Microsoft Mobile to Market certificate, you see a message indicating that the application is untrusted. If this occurs, you can indicate whether you want to continue the installation. Installing third-party applications When installing third-party applications, note the following:
Install only apps that are designed for Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.1 Professional. Apps designed for other versions of Microsoft Windows Mobile may not be compatible with your smartphone. If you can try a free or trial version of the software before purchasing it, you can test it first to make sure it works properly. DID YOU KNOW? You can purchase a third-party application that lets you run Palm OS by ACCESS applications on your smartphone. Installing applications from the Internet You can use Internet Explorer Mobile to install Windows Mobile apps in the CAB file format directly from the Internet. For files in the ZIP file format, you must unzip the files in File Explorer or on your computer before you install them. For files in any format other than CAB or ZIP, you must first download the files to your computer and then install them to your smartphone by synchronizing. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your phone is on and that you are in a coverage area (see Turning your phone on). 258 I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S 12 R E T P A H C Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S 1 Press Start and select Internet Explorer. 2 Go to the page that contains the link to the application you want to download. 3 Highlight the link to the file, and then press Center process. to start the download 4 If prompted, select the folder where you want to store the file. 5 When the download has finished, press Start and select Programs. 6 Select File Explorer 7 Go to the folder you selected in step 4. If you did not select a folder, go to the My Documents folder. 8 Select the file you downloaded to start the installation program. Installing applications from your computer There are many applications available for your smartphone. To get started, check out the selection at palm.com/treopro. BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an application from your computer to your smartphone, you must first install the desktop sync software on your computer
(see Installing Desktop Sync Software:
Windows XP and Windows Vista). 1 Connect your smartphone to your computer to synchronize and install the application(s) on your smartphone. 2 Open My Computer or Windows Explorer on your computer. 3 Double-click the icon representing your smartphone. 4 Copy the application file(s) into the folder. Installing applications onto an expansion card BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an application from your computer to an expansion card, you must first install the desktop sync software on your computer
(see Installing Desktop Sync Software:
Windows XP and Windows Vista). 1 Insert the expansion card (sold separately) into the expansion card slot
(see Inserting and removing expansion cards). I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S 259 12 R E T P A H C Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S 2 Connect your smartphone to your computer using the USB cable. 3 Open My Computer or Windows Explorer on your computer. 4 Double-click the icon representing your smartphone. 5 Navigate to the folder representing the expansion card. 6 Copy the application file(s) into the expansion card folder. Installing Java games and applications You can install Java application files called Midlets onto your smartphone, either from your computer or from the Internet. Removing applications To free up memory on your smartphone, you can remove applications that you no longer use. You can remove only applications, patches, and extensions that you install; you cannot remove the built-in applications that reside in the Read-Only Memory (ROM) portion of your smartphone. 1 Press Start 2 Select the System tab, and then select and select Settings. Remove Programs
. and select Programs. 1 Press Start 2 Select Java 3 Press Menu (right softkey), select
. Install, and then select Local (to install a file from your computer) or Internet. After you install the file, press Menu (right softkey) to perform various tasks using the file. 260 R E M O V I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S 3 Select the application that you want to remove. 12 R E T P A H C Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S DID YOU KNOW? Built-in applications that cannot be deleted are not listed in the Remove Programs list. 4 Select Remove. 5 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. Sharing information Your smartphone comes equipped with a variety of options for sharing information, so that you can choose the quickest, most convenient way to send your info or to receive info from another device.
In many applications, you can send a file or an entry by email or by beaming. Open the app to the file or entry list and highlight the item you want to send. Press Menu (right softkey) and select the Send or Beam option. In the Messaging application, you can insert a picture or attach a note or other file to an email. You can also receive pictures and attachments (see Your email).
You can attach a picture, video, or sound file to a multimedia message (see Creating and sending a multimedia message).
You can synchronize to share info between your smartphone and your computer or between your smartphone and Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 SP2 or 2007 (see Synchronizing information). If you are near someone, you can beam files and applications between your smartphone and your neighbors device using the IR port or Bluetooth wireless technology (see Beaming information).
You can also store files on an expansion card and share the expansion card (see Using expansion cards). Beaming information Your smartphone is equipped with an IR
(infrared) port that enables you to beam information to another device with an IR port. The IR port is located on the side of your smartphone closest to the stylus, near S H A R I N G I N F O R M A T I O N 261 12 R E T P A H C Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S the top. You can also beam using the Bluetooth wireless technology on your smartphone. The normal range for beaming with IR is about eight inches (20 centimeters). The maximum range for beaming with Bluetooth technology is about 30 feet (10 meters). Performance and range are affected by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors. TIP For best results, the path between the two devices must be clear of obstacles, and both devices must be kept stationary. If you have difficulty beaming, shorten the distance and avoid bright sunlight. DID YOU KNOW? The type of information you can beam depends on the type of device you are beaming to. Other Windows Mobile 6 Professional devices are always compatible with your Treo Pro smartphone. Beaming an entry or file BEFORE YOU BEGIN To beam using Bluetooth technology, make sure your smartphone has the Bluetooth feature turned on (see Entering basic Bluetooth settings). 1 Highlight the entry or file you want to beam. 2 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Beam (the menu item changes names based on the type of item you highlighted). In Contacts, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Send Contact
> Beam. 3 Select one of the following options:
Bluetooth: When the name of the receiving device appears, select it to begin the transfer. A blue icon indicates a Bluetooth connection. 262 B E A M I N G I N F O R M A T I O N 12 R E T P A H C Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S IR: Select Infrared. Point the IR port on your smartphone directly at the IR port of the receiving device. A red icon indicates an IR connection. 4 Wait for Done to appear next to the name of the receiving device before you continue using your smartphone. TIP The regional setting determines the list of characters that can be used when info is beamed between devices. If you try to send or receive a character that is not on the list, it appears as a question mark (see Setting display formats). Turning on the option to receive beamed information By default, the option to receive beamed information on your smartphone is turned off. You need to turn the beam option on before you can receive information being beamed from another device. 1 Press Start 2 Select the Connections tab, and then and select Settings. select Beam
. 3 Check the Receive all incoming beams box. Receiving beamed information 1 Press End to turn on your screen if it is not already on. 2 If you are beaming over an IR connection, point the IR port on your smartphone directly at the IR port of the transmitting device. 3 When the Receiving Data message appears, select Yes to receive the beam. B E A M I N G I N F O R M A T I O N 263 12 R E T P A H C Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S Inserting and removing expansion cards 1 With the back panel facing you, press the lower-right corner of the panel with your right thumb. Then use both thumbs and firmly slide the panel away from you to release it. Using expansion cards The expansion card slot on your smartphone enables you to add microSD cards to extend the storage capacity of your smartphone. For example, microSD expansion cards can store the following:
Pictures
Videos
MP3 audio files
Email attachments
Games
Applications
Databases Expansion cards are sold separately. TIP We recommend that you purchase preformatted expansion cards. To format a card on your own, you may need to connect a card reader (sold separately) to your computer. 264 U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S 12 R E T P A H C Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S 2 Insert a microSD card (sold separately) into the expansion card slot. 1 2 1 Notch 2 Wi-Fi button 4 Replace the back panel. 5 To remove an expansion card, repeat step 1 to remove the back panel, and then push the card in to release it. 6 Replace the back panel. Opening applications on an expansion card After you insert an expansion card into the expansion card slot, you can open any of the applications stored on the expansion card. TIP To run an application on an expansion card, your smartphone must have enough free space in the internal memory to run the application. 3 Push the card into the slot until you feel the card click into place. 1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. TIP The expansion card slot has a push-push mechanism: push in gently to insert a card;
push in gently to remove it. and select Programs. 2 Press Start 3 Select File Explorer 4 Tap the Show list in the upper-left
. corner and select Storage Card. U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S 265 12 R E T P A H C Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
*
* Show list 5 Select the application you want to open. Saving files to an expansion card You can save space on your smartphone by saving files to an expansion card. For example, when you create new Word Mobile documents, notes, Excel Mobile workbooks, pictures, videos, and audio files, you can save them directly to an expansion card. Saving files to an expansion card also makes it easy to share those files with others. (Some applications may not support this feature.) 1 Insert an expansion card into the expansion card slot. 2 Open the application from which you want to save the info. 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Options or Tools > Options. 4 Select the option for where to save info, and then select Storage Card. The option name changes depending on the application you are in. TIP If you dont see a Save to option on the Options screen, look on the other tabs (if present). If you still cant find a Save to list, the application may not support this feature. 5 Press OK
. Moving info between your smartphone and an expansion card from within an application In certain applicationsfor example, Pictures & Videos and the Office Mobile applicationsyou can move files directly to another location. For applications that do not support this feature, see Moving info between your smartphone and an expansion card using File Explorer. 266 U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S 12 R E T P A H C Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S 1 Insert an expansion card into the 5 Press Menu (right softkey) and select expansion card slot. Edit > Copy or Edit > Cut. 2 Open the application from which you 6 Go to the folder where you want to want to move the info. place the selected item. 3 Go to the list view, tap the Show list in the upper-left corner, and highlight the file or application you want to move. 4 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Rename/Move. 5 Select the Location list, and then select where you want to move the info:
Storage card or Main memory. 6 Press OK
. Moving info between your smartphone and an expansion card using File Explorer 1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. 7 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit > Paste. 8 Press OK
. Viewing available expansion card memory 1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. 2 Press Start 3 Select the System tab, and then select and select Settings. Memory
. 4 Select the Storage Card tab. 5 Press OK
. and select Programs. 2 Press Start 3 Select File Explorer 4 Highlight the file or application you want to copy or move (see Exploring files and folders). TIP Your applications are usually located in the My Device/Program Files folder. Exploring files on an expansion card 1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. and select Programs. 2 Press Start 3 Select File Explorer 4 Tap the Show list in the upper-left
. corner and select Storage Card. U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S 267 12 R E T P A H C Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S 5 Select the folder or files you want to view. 6 Press OK
. Renaming an expansion card If you change the contents of an expansion card, you may want to rename the card to better match its contents. TIP Before copying information to or renaming the files or folders on an expansion card, or renaming the card itself, make sure the card is not write-protected. See the instructions that came with your card for details. 1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. Encrypting an expansion card When you encrypt an expansion card, the info on the card can be read only by your smartphoneso no one can see whats on the card if it gets lost or stolen. 1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. 2 Press Start 3 Select the System tab, and then select and select Settings. Encryption. 4 Check the Encrypt files when placed on a storage card box. NOTE If your organization enforces an encryption policy, you can see that the box is checked, but you cannot uncheck it. and select Programs. 2 Press Start 3 Select File Explorer 4 Tap the Show list in the upper-left
. corner and select My Device. 5 Highlight the current expansion card name (Storage Card by default). 6 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Rename. 7 Enter a new name for the card. 8 Press OK
. Accessing information on a remote computer Remote Desktop Mobile is a technology that allows you to use your smartphone to connect to a remote computer in a different location through the internet 268 A C C E S S I N G I N F O R M A T I O N O N A R E M O T E C O M P U T E R 12 R E T P A H C Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
(using a data or Wi-Fi connection). For example, you can connect to your work computer and have access to all of your applications, files, and network resources as though you were in front of your computer at work. You can leave applications running at work and then see your work computers desktop displayed on your smartphone, with the same applications running. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following:
Be sure to subscribe to data services from your wireless service provider. This is necessary for browsing the web.
Make sure your phone is on and that
youre inside a coverage area (see Turning your phone on). If you have access to a Wi-Fi network, verify that Wi-Fi is on and gather any necessary network connection settings
(see Connecting to a Wi-Fi network).
Ensure that the target computer is on and connected to the internet. Accessing a remote computer BEFORE YOU BEGIN Ask the remote computer administrator for your computer username, password, and domain if you dont know them. and select Programs. 1 Press Start 2 Select Remote Desktop Mobile
. 3 Enter the name of the computer you want to access. If you are accessing a computer youve already entered, select the computer name from the list. 4 Enter the username, password, and domain you use to access the remote computer. 5 Press OK
. Customizing Remote Desktop Mobile and select Programs. 1 Press Start
. 2 Select Remote Desktop Mobile 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select Options. 4 On the Display tab, select any of the following options:
Colors: Set how to display colors from the remote computer on your smartphone screen. A C C E S S I N G I N F O R M A T I O N O N A R E M O T E C O M P U T E R 269 12 R E T P A H C Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S Full screen: Set whether you want the remote computer display to take up your entire smartphone screen. Fit remote desktop to screen: Set whether you want to resize the remote computer display so that the entire display fits on your smartphone screen. 5 Select the Resources tab, and then select one or both of the following options:
Device storage: Set whether to map your smartphones storage memory to the remote computer. Remote desktop sound: Sets whether sounds from the remote computer are muted completely, played on the remote computer, or played on your smartphone. 6 Press OK
. Calculator You can use Calculator for basic arithmetic calculations, such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division. Performing calculations 1 Press Start 2 Enter numbers and perform and select Calculator. calculations, including the following:
Clears the last digit in a multidigit entry. Clears the current calculation or the displayed number. 270 C A L C U L A T O R 12 R E T P A H C Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S Calculates the reciprocal of a number. Calculates percentage. Calculates the square root of a number. Switches a number between negative and positive. TIP You can paste numbers into Calculator as well as copy calculation results to be pasted into another app. TIP For more advanced calculations, use Excel Mobile. See Excel Mobile for details. Using the Calculator memory
To store a displayed number, tap the box to the left of the entry box. An M appears in the box. DID YOU KNOW? When you store a number in memory, it replaces the number that is currently stored.
To add the displayed number to the number stored in memory, tap press P. or
To display the number stored in memory, tap
.
To clear the memory, tap
. C A L C U L A T O R 271 Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S 12 R E T P A H C 272 C A L C U L A T O R Your personal settings Customizing is optional. But why not personalize your Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm to make it match your lifestyle and work even harder for you?
You can easily customize the sounds, fonts, screen colors, and more on your smartphone. Take advantage of various levels of security. Prevent making an accidental (and expensive) phone call by locking the keyboard. Some preference settings can help extend the life of your battery. There are lots of ways to make your smartphone work better for you. Benefits
Conserve power
Secure your phone and your data
Make your screen easy to read
Streamline smartphone use CHAPTER 13 273 In this chapter Today screen settings. 275 System sound settings. 276 Display and appearance settings . 278 Application settings . 281 Locking your smartphone and info . 286 System settings . 290 Connection settings . 297 Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S Today screen settings Selecting your Today screen background and select Settings. 1 Press Start TIP You can also open Settings from your Today screen by pressing Settings (right softkey). 2 On the Personal tab, select Today
. TIP To change the color theme for your smartphone, select a new theme from the Appearance tab in Today Settings (see Changing the system color scheme). Selecting which items appear on your Today screen 1 Press Start 2 On the Personal tab, select Today 3 Select the Items tab. and select Settings. 13 R E T P A H C 3 On the Appearance tab, check the Use this picture as the background box. 4 Select Browse. 5 Select the picture you want to use. 6 Press OK
. 4 Check the boxes next to the items you want to appear on your Today screen, and uncheck any items that you do not want to appear. T O D A Y S C R E E N S E T T I N G S 275 13 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S 5 (Optional) Highlight an item and select Move Up or Move Down to change the order in which items appear on the Today screen. 6 (Optional) Highlight an item and select Options (if available) to configure the settings for the item. Press OK to return to Today Settings. 7 Press OK
. DID YOU KNOW? There are lots of third-party plug-ins available for your Today screen. System sound settings Silencing sounds 1 Slide the Ringer switch to Sound
. The smartphone vibrates Off briefly. 2 To hear all sounds again, slide the
. Ringer switch to Sound On When you slide the Ringer switch back to the Sound On position, it restores the previous sound settings. For example, if the smartphone ring volume is set to the loudest setting and you slide the Ringer switch to Sound Off, you do not hear the smartphone ring. When you move the Ringer switch back to Sound On, the smartphone ring volume is still set to the loudest setting. 1 2 When youre in a meeting, at the movies, or anywhere that silence is required, you can immediately silence all sounds on your smartphone, including Calendar notifications and system sounds. This does not mute the speaker during phone calls. 1 Sound On 2 Sound Off 276 S Y S T E M S O U N D S E T T I N G S TIP Cant get music to play out of the built-in MP3 player? Check the Ringer switch. If its set to Sound Off, you wont be able to hear music. DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a silent alarm that can vibrate even when the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off. Selecting Sounds & Notifications 1 Press Start 2 On the Personal tab, select Sounds &
and select Settings. Notifications
. 3 On the Sounds tab, set any of the following options:
Events: Turns sounds on/off for system warnings and error messages. 13 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S Programs: Turns sounds on/off in the applications on your smartphone. Notifications: Turns alarms and reminders on/off in the applications on your smartphone. Screen taps: Turns sounds associated with tapping the screen on/off, and sets the volume level when this sound is turned on. Hardware buttons: Turns sounds associated with pressing buttons on/off, and sets the volume level when this sound is turned on. TIP To add, preview, delete, and send sounds, select the Manage tab. To add a sound, press Menu (right softkey), select Add, and navigate to the sound file. To play a sound, select it and press Play (left softkey). To delete a sound, highlight it and press Backspace. To send a sound, highlight it, press Menu (right softkey), and select Beam Sound or Send Sound. S Y S T E M S O U N D S E T T I N G S 277 13 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S 4 Select the Notifications tab and set any of the following options:
Repeat: Indicates whether the sound plays more than once, if turned on. Display message on screen: Indicates whether a notification message appears onscreen for the selected event. Vibrate when ringer switch off/on:
Indicates whether your smartphone vibrates to notify you about the selected event. 5 Press OK
. Event: Specifies the action for which you want to change the settings. NOTE The settings described here apply to all event types except phone calls. To set notifications for the various phone call types, see Selecting ringtones and display notices. Play sound: Lets you turn the sound on/off for the selected event. To select a different sound, select the list to the right of this setting, and then select a different sound. To preview the sound, select Play Sound, and then select Play. 278 D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E S E T T I N G S Display and appearance settings Adjusting the brightness 1 Press Option 2 Press Left and then press and Right to adjust the brightness for when your smartphone is running on battery power and when it is running on external power. 3 Press OK
. Changing the text size and clarity 1 Press Start 2 Select the System tab, and then select and select Settings. Screen
. 3 Select the Text Size tab. 4 Press Left and Right text size. to adjust the 5 Select the Clear Type tab. 6 To smooth the edges of screen fonts, check the Enable Clear Type box. 7 Press OK
. Displaying the clock You can display a clock at the top of every screen. You can also choose between a digital and an analog clock display. 1 Press Start 2 Select the System tab, and then select and select Settings. Clock & Alarms
. 3 Select the More tab. Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S 13 R E T P A H C 4 To display the clock, check the Display the clock on the title bar in all programs box. 5 Press OK 6 To change the clock display format, tap and hold the clock and select Analog or Digital. If you select analog format, a clock icon appears displaying the time. Setting display formats 1 Press Start 2 Select the System tab, and then select and select Settings. Regional Settings
. D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E S E T T I N G S 279 Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S 13 R E T P A H C Currency: Sets the currency symbol and position, the decimal symbol and position, digit grouping symbol and group size, and negative number format. Time: Sets the time style, separators, and AM and PM symbols. Date: Sets the short date style, separators, and long date style. 3 On the Region tab, select a region from the list. The region selection determines all display formats (date, time, and so on) on your smartphone unless you use another Regional Settings field to select a different format for a specific type of display item. 4 (Optional) Select any of the following tabs to customize individual format settings:
Number: Sets the decimal symbol and number of decimal places, the digit grouping symbol and group size, list separators, negative number sign symbol and format, leading zero display, and measurement system (metric versus U.S.). 5 Press OK
. Aligning the screen to correct tapping problems Occasionally, your screen may need to be readjusted. You know your screen needs adjustment if the wrong feature is activated when you tap the screen. To fix the problem, align the screen. 1 Press Start 2 Select the System tab, and then select and select Settings. Screen
. 3 On the General tab, select Align Screen. 4 Tap the screen where indicated. 5 Press OK
. 280 D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E S E T T I N G S Changing the system color scheme 1 Press Start
. 2 On the Personal tab, select Today 3 On the Appearance tab, select a theme and select Settings. in the list. 4 Press OK
. TIP You can also set the background for your Today screen (see Selecting your Today screen background). Application settings Arranging the Start menu You can change the seven applications listed on the Start menu. You can still access the remaining applications by selecting Programs from the Start menu, and then selecting the applications icon. 1 Press Start 2 On the Personal tab, select Menus and select Settings. Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S 13 R E T P A H C 3 Check the boxes next to the applications you want to see in the Start menu. 4 Press OK
. TIP Dont forget the six icons across the top of the Start menu. Theyre the apps you opened most recently, and its easy to get back to them: just use the 5-way to select one of the icons. Reassigning buttons You can use Buttons Settings to select which applications to associate with many of the buttons and key combinations on your smartphone. A P P L I C A T I O N S E T T I N G S 281 13 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S 1 Press Start and select Settings. 2 On the Personal tab, select Buttons
. Option
+ Messaging
= Tasks Hold Side = Camera 4 Select the Assign a program list, and then select the application you want to assign to the button or key combination you selected. 5 Select the Up/Down Control tab and and adjust the settings for the Up Down buttons on the 5-way. 3 On the Program Buttons tab, highlight the button or key combination you want to change in the Button list. The hardware buttons are mapped to the following items:
Start
= Start menu OK
= OK/Close Option Internet Explorer
+ Phone/Send
=
Option
+ Start
= File Explorer Option
+ OK
= Task Manager Option
+ Calendar
= Calculator 6 Press OK
. Setting up voice commands IMPORTANT The Voice Command application is available only for English, French, and German. Voice commands enable you to use speech to execute some commands on the Start menu and the Programs screen. 1 Assign the Hold Side button to Voice Command. See Reassigning buttons for details. 2 Press Start and select Settings. 282 A P P L I C A T I O N S E T T I N G S Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S 3 On the Personal tab, select Voice Command
. safety and legal information included in your smartphone package for information. 13 R E T P A H C 1 Set the Ringer switch at the top of your smartphone to Sound On
. 2 Hold your device close to your mouth, and press and release the assigned Voice Command button (see Setting up voice commands). A tone plays and a microphone icon appears at the top of your screen. 3 In a clear voice, say the command. For example:
To access Help: Say Help. After Voice Command finishes speaking, a microphone icon appears at the top of your screen. Say your answer. For example, say General to access general Help topics. To access your Calendar: Say Start Calendar. To access your music: Say Start Windows Media. After Voice Command finishes speaking, a microphone icon appears at the top of your screen. Say your answer. 4 Check the Enabled box. 5 Select the items you want to enable. If an item is highlighted and the Options button is active, select Options to choose the features you want enabled for the highlighted item. 6 Select Notifications and select the options for how you want to receive voice command notifications. Using voice commands IMPORTANT Do not use voice commands in your car until you read the End user notice about this kind of usage; see the A P P L I C A T I O N S E T T I N G S 283 13 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S TIP You can move quickly through voice commands by stopping the voice command response before it finishes. When Voice Command responds, you can press the Voice Command button before it completes the question. After the microphone icon is visible, you may say your answer. Setting input options 1 Press Start 2 On the Personal tab, select Input 3 On the Input Method tab, set any of the and select Settings. following options:
NOTE The Input Method options you specify apply only to entering info using the screen. You can still enter info using your 284 A P P L I C A T I O N S E T T I N G S smartphones keyboard regardless of the onscreen input method you choose. Input method: Specifies which onscreen input method you want to use:
Block Recognizer: Use a single stroke to write letters, numbers, symbols, and punctuation, which are then converted into typed text. Use gestures to enter Return and Backspace.
Keyboard: Tap keys on the onscreen keyboard to enter text.
Letter Recognizer: Write individual letters, numbers, and punctuation, which are converted into typed text. Large/Small keys: If you selected Keyboard, select whether to use large or small onscreen keys. If you select Large keys, check the box if you want to use gestures for the space bar and the Backspace, Shift, and Return keys. Options: If you selected Letter Recognizer, select Options and select the options you want. Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S 4 Select the Word Completion tab and set any of the following options:
Enable Auto Correct: Indicates whether common misspellings such as teh are corrected automatically. 5 Select the Options tab and set any of the following options:
13 R E T P A H C Suggest words when entering text:
Indicates whether word suggestions appear as you enter text. You can also specify how many letters you want to enter before a suggestion appears, how many suggestions you want to see, and whether a space appears after you insert a suggested word. This option is disabled by default. TIP To enter a suggested word, press Down to highlight the suggestion, and then press Center to accept it. Clear Stored Entries: Deletes the database of word suggestions. Voice recording format: Specifies the format in which you save voice notes. Default zoom level for writing:
Specifies the initial size of text entered from onscreen writing methods. Default zoom level for typing:
Specifies the initial size of text entered using the keyboard. Capitalize first letter of sentence:
Specifies whether the first letter of a sentence automatically appears in A P P L I C A T I O N S E T T I N G S 285 13 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S uppercase, without requiring you to press a Shift key. Scroll upon reaching the last line:
Specifies whether the display automatically scrolls when you select the last line of visible info. 6 Press OK
. Auto-Keyguard and touchscreen lockout: Automatically enables Keyguard after a period of inactivity and lets you disable the screens touch-sensitive feature during an active call. System password lock: Requires a password to see any information on your smartphone. Locking your smartphone and info Your smartphone includes several features that help you protect it from inadvertent use and keep your information private. The security software lets you use your smartphone for emergency calls, such as dialing your national emergency number
(such as 911, 112, or 999), even if it is locked. Keyguard: Manually disables all buttons and the screens touch-sensitive feature to prevent accidental presses. TIP To avoid accidentally pressing onscreen buttons while youre holding your smartphone up to your ear to speak, you can disable the screens touch-sensitive feature during active calls. When the screens touch-sensitive feature is disabled, you must use the 5-way navigator to access items on the screen. Locking your keyboard (Keyguard) By default, your keyboard locks so that you dont accidentally press buttons or activate screen items. To dismiss Keyguard: Press Center
. 286 L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O To manually turn on Keyguard when your smartphone screen is on: Do one of the following:
Press and hold End
Press Option
.
+ End
. TIP If youre using a headset or hands-free device, you can manually turn on Keyguard during a call to prevent accidental key presses. TIP If your Today screen is displayed and youre not on a call, you can also turn on Keyguard by pressing End. Turning on Auto-Keyguard Auto-Keyguard enables you to configure the Keyguard feature. 1 Press Start 2 On the Personal tab, select and select Settings. Keyguard
. 3 Select the Auto-Keyguard list and disable the Auto-Keyguard feature or set the period of inactivity that passes before the keyboard automatically locks. Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S 13 R E T P A H C 4 Press OK
. Locking your screen 1 Press Start 2 On the Personal tab, select and select Settings. Keyguard
. 3 Under Disable touchscreen, check or uncheck the While on a phone call box to determine whether the screens touch-sensitive feature is disabled during a call. 4 Press OK
. Locking your smartphone To protect your personal information, you can lock the system so that you need to enter your password to access any of your L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O 287 13 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S information or use other features of your smartphone. IMPORTANT If you lock your system, you must enter the exact password to unlock it. If you enter an incorrect password, you are given another chance. Each time an incorrect password is entered, you are given progressively longer time periods between your chances to enter the password. If you forget the password, you need to perform a hard reset to resume using your smartphone. Performing a hard reset deletes all the entries in your smartphone. However, you can restore all previously synchronized info the next time you sync (see Synchronizing information). 1 Press Start 2 On the Personal tab, select Lock 3 On the Password tab, check the and select Settings. Prompt if device unused for box to turn on the password feature. 4 Select the first list, and then select how long a period of inactivity must pass before you are prompted to enter a password to unlock the system. 5 Select the Password type list, and then select a format for your password:
Strong alphanumeric: A strong alphanumeric password must contain at least seven characters and must contain a combination of letters, numerals, and punctuation. You must press Option or Alt before entering numerals or punctuation. Simple PIN: A simple PIN must contain at least four characters and includes numerals only. You do not need to press Option before entering the PIN numerals. 6 Select Password and enter your password. 7 Select Confirm and enter the password again. 8 (Optional) Select the Hint tab and enter a hint to help you recall your password. 9 Press OK
. 288 L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O TIP If you lock your smartphone and use a Simple PIN as the password, you can dial an emergency number by entering the number in the password field and pressing Phone/Send. You do not need to press Option before entering the number. However, if you select Strong alphanumeric as the password type, you must first press Option twice before entering an emergency number in the password field. Entering owner information You can enter personal information that you want to associate with your smartphone, such as your name, company name, and phone number. You can also set whether you want this information to appear when you turn on your smartphone. If you lose your smartphone, this feature can help the person who finds it return it to you. 1 Press Start 2 On the Personal tab, select Owner and select Settings. Information
. Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S 3 On the Identification tab, enter any of the information you want to include. 13 R E T P A H C 4 Select the Notes tab and enter any additional text you want to include. 5 Select the Options tab and check the boxes to indicate which info (if any) you want to appear on the screen when you turn on your smartphone. 6 Press OK
. TIP You can also display your Owner Information on your Today screen. See Selecting which items appear on your Today screen for details. L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O 289 13 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S System settings Setting the date and time Use Clock & Alarms Settings to set the time zone, time, and date for your home location and a location that you visit. To set the display format for the date and time, see Setting display formats. 1 Press Start 2 Select the System tab, and then select and select Settings. Clock & Alarms
. 3 On the Time tab, select Home. 5 Select the hour and press Up or 6 Select the month and press Up to increase or decrease the Down hour setting. Repeat this process for the minute, seconds, and AM/PM settings. or to increase or decrease the Down month setting. Repeat this process for the date and year settings 7 (Optional) Select Visiting and set the info for a location that you visit often. 8 Press OK 9 If prompted, select Yes to accept your
. changes. Synchronizing the date, time, and time zone with the network By default, your smartphone synchronizes the date, time, and time zone with your wireless service providers network whenever your phone is on and you are inside a coverage area. 1 Press Start 2 Select the System tab, and then select and select Settings. 4 Select the first list, and then select the time zone for your home location. Clock & Alarms
. 3 Select the More tab. 290 S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S 13 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S 4 To disable this option, uncheck the Enable local network time box. 5 If you want to keep your smartphone date and time set for your selected location, uncheck the Use network time zone box. Setting system alarms System alarms let you set alarms that are not associated with a task or appointment. For example, you can use your smartphone as an alarm clock when you travel, or set alarms to remind you when its time to take medication or pick up the kids. 1 Press Start 2 Select the System tab, and then select and select Settings. Clock & Alarms
. 3 Select the Alarms tab. 4 Check a box to turn on that alarm. 5 Select Description next to the box you checked and enter a description for the alarm. 6 Tap the days of the week you want the alarm to go off. You can select multiple days for each alarm. 7 Tap the time, set the time you want the alarm to go off, and press OK
. 8 Select the alarm icon and check the boxes to select how you want the alarm to go off. You can choose a single sound, a repeating sound, a flashing light, or vibration. TIP To change the alarm sound, select the alarm sound icon, select the Play Sound list, and then select the alarm sound you want to use. 9 Press OK 10 If prompted, select Yes to accept your twice. changes. S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S 291 13 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S Managing identity certificates Your smartphone may include preinstalled certificates. Certificates are digital documents that are used to authenticate and exchange information on networks. Certificates can be issued for a user, a device, or a service. 1 Press Start 2 Select the System tab, and then select and select Settings. Certificates
. 3 Select any of the following tabs:
Personal: Displays certificates that establish your identity when you log in to a secured network, such as a corporate network. Intermediate: Displays certificates issued from a root certificate whose purpose is to then issue personal certificates. Root: Displays certificates that identify the computers, such as servers, to which you connect. These certificates help prevent unauthorized users from accessing your smartphone and information. 4 To view certificate details, select the certificate. 5 Press OK
. TIP To delete a certificate, highlight the certificate name, press and hold Center on the 5-way, and then select Delete from the shortcut menu. Enabling error reporting Error Reporting sends info that helps diagnose application errors for devices running Windows Mobile software. When an error is detected, a text file is created. You can review the file and choose whether you want it delivered to Microsoft Support. The information is used by programming groups at Microsoft for quality control and is not used for tracking individual users or installations for any marketing purpose. The info that is collected is technical info about the state of your system when the error occurred. No documents (or any info contained in them) are intentionally sent with the report. To ensure further security, the report is transmitted by means of a secure 292 S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S connection and is kept confidential and anonymous in a limited-access database. DID YOU KNOW? This error-reporting method meets the privacy regulations of the European Union (EU) as well as the Fair Information Practice Principles of the Federal Trade Commission in the United States. To view the Fair Information Practice Principles, visit the Federal Trade Commission website at ftc gov/
reports/privacy3/fairinfo htm Your smartphone must be connected to your computer when you send the error reportprovided your computer is connected to the Internet. 1 Press Start 2 Select the System tab, and then select and select Settings. Error Reporting
. 3 Select whether you want to enable or disable error reporting. 4 Press OK
. How much storage space do I have left?
1 Press Start and select Settings. 2 Select the System tab, and then select Memory
. Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S 3 Select either of the following tabs:
Main: Displays the amount of memory assigned to your applications and info, as well as the amount of memory in use versus the available memory. 13 R E T P A H C TIP If storage memory is low, consider using an expansion card to store files (see Using expansion cards). If program memory is low, close some applications to avoid slow smartphone performance (see Closing applications). You can also tap Find at the bottom of the screen to search for large files to delete so that you free up memory TIP You can also open Memory settings by selecting the running programs icon in the upper-right corner of the Today screen, and then selecting the memory icon. S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S 293 13 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S Storage Card: Displays the amount of memory available on an expansion card that has been inserted into the expansion slot on your smartphone. 4 Press OK
. 4 Select the Advanced tab and set whether your smartphone screen turns off automatically after a specified period of inactivity. You can assign different intervals for battery power and external power. Optimizing power settings 1 Press Start 2 Select the System tab, and then select and select Settings. Power
. 3 On the Battery tab, view the power remaining in your battery. 5 Select the Screen Saver tab, and check the box to enable the screen saver feature, or uncheck it to disable the screen saver. 6 Press OK
. TIP An easy way to check the battery level is by tapping the battery icon in the title bar. 294 S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S 13 R E T P A H C TIP To conserve additional battery power, disable the screen saver or adjust the display backlight setting. Press Start and select Settings. Select the System tab, and then select Backlight. On the Battery Power tab, set whether the display backlight turns off automatically after a period of inactivity. You can also select the External Power tab to turn off the backlight when your smartphone is connected to an external charging source. Turning wireless services on/off To quickly turn all wireless services on or off, press and hold Power
. Follow these steps to turn individual wireless features on or off:
1 On the Today screen, select your wireless service provider name, or select Phone off / Digital Roam if your wireless service provider name is not displayed. 2 Select a wireless feature to turn it on or off. The current state of the feature, ON or OFF, appears on a gray background. The description of the feature tells you what you can change it to. In the illustration, Airplane Mode and Wi-Fi are off, and Phone and Bluetooth are on. TIP To change the settings for one of the displayed wireless features, press Settings
(right softkey) and select the wireless feature you want to change. 3 Press OK You can also turn wireless services on and off by tapping the signal-strength icon at the top of the screen and selecting Comm Manager. S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S 295 13 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S Updating the system software Windows Update for Windows Mobile lets you download security updates and other important updates to the Windows Mobile operating system software on your smartphone. 1 Press Start 2 Select the System tab, and then select and select Settings. Windows Update. 3 On the Update Setup screen, press Next (right softkey). TIP Select View privacy statement to read about how using Windows Update affects the personal information on your smartphone. 296 S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S 4 Select whether you want to run Windows Update manually or you want it to check for updates automatically, and press Next (right softkey). 5 If you selected automatic updates, check the Use my data plan to check for and download updates box if you want to use your data plan instead of your basic wireless plan to update your smartphone. Using your data plan means that updates may occur more frequently but may result in additional data charges. Press Next (right softkey). 6 Press Finish (left softkey). If you selected Automatic in step 4, Windows Update periodically checks for and downloads updates automatically. If you selected Manual in step 4, you can check for updates at any time by opening Windows Update and pressing Check Now (left softkey). To view detailed results of the last check for updates, press Menu (right softkey) and select View details. 13 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S TIP To switch between manual and automatic updates, open Windows Update, press Menu
(right softkey), and select Change Schedule. To select or deselect the option to use your data plan to check for and download updates, press Menu (right softkey) and select Connections. Connection settings Managing ISP settings Your smartphone is already set up to connect to the Internet using a high-speed data connection on your wireless service providers network. To connect to the Internet, simply start Internet Explorer Mobile. For special situations, such as connecting to your Internet service provider (ISP) or to a remote access server (RAS), you can set up another connection. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Obtain the following information from your ISP or system administrator:
ISP server phone number or access point
Username
Password 1 Press Start 2 Select the Connections tab, and then and select Settings. select Connections
. 3 On the Tasks tab, select Manage existing connections. 4 Select the Modem tab. 5 Highlight the connection you want to view or change and select Edit, or select New to create a new connection. 6 Follow the onscreen instructions to edit or create the connection. Connecting to a VPN If you want to use your smartphone to access your corporate email account or other files on your corporate server, you may need to set up a VPN (virtual private network). A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate server through the companys firewall (security layer). BEFORE YOU BEGIN Check with your companys system administrator to see if a VPN is required for accessing the corporate network. If you need a VPN, you C O N N E C T I O N S E T T I N G S 297 13 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S must purchase and install a third-party VPN client in order to use this feature. Ask your corporate system administrator for the following information:
Your username and password
Your servers domain name
Your servers TCP/IP settings
Your servers host name or IP address 1 Install your third-party VPN client (see Installing applications). 2 Press Start 3 Select the Connections tab, and then and select Settings. select Connections
. 4 On the Tasks tab, select Add a new VPN server connection. 5 Follow the onscreen instructions to enter the settings provided by your corporate system administrator. TIP To manually start a data connection on your wireless service provider network or another network, go to Connections Settings, and on the Tasks tab, select Manage existing connections. Tap and hold the connection you want to start, and then select Connect from the shortcut menu Setting up a proxy server 1 Press Start 2 Select the Connections tab, and then and select Settings. select Connections
. 3 On the Tasks tab, select Set up my proxy server. 4 Check both the This network connects to the Internet and the This network uses a proxy server to connect to the Internet boxes. 5 Select Proxy server and enter the proxy server name. 6 Press OK
. TIP To change settings such as the port number, proxy server type, or credentials, select Advanced. Ending a data connection If your service plan includes minutes-of-use fees for data connections, you can reduce costs by ending the data connection when youve finished browsing the web. 298 C O N N E C T I O N S E T T I N G S 13 R E T P A H C Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S 1 On the Today screen, press Down to select your wireless service provider name, and then press Center
. 2 Select Data Connection. Enrolling a domain If your company uses Microsoft System Center Mobile Device Manager, you may need to use the Domain Enroll settings to register your smartphone within your companys network. IMPORTANT After you enroll your smartphone in your companys network, your system administrator can turn various features on your smartphone on and off. If a feature, such as the camera or messaging, worked previously and this feature no longer works after enrollment, contact your system administrator to find out if this feature is disabled on your smartphone. 1 Press Start 2 Select the Connections tab, and then and select Settings. select Domain Enroll
. 3 Press Enroll (right softkey). 4 Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the enrollment process. C O N N E C T I O N S E T T I N G S 299 Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S 13 R E T P A H C 300 C O N N E C T I O N S E T T I N G S Troubleshooting Although we cant anticipate all the questions you might have, this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly asked questions. For additional information and answers to other common questions, visit palm.com/treopro. CHAPTER 14 301 In this chapter Transferring info from another device . 303 Reinstalling the desktop software . 303 Resetting your smartphone . 304 Performance. 308 Screen . 309 Network connection. 310 Synchronization . 314 Email . 321 Web . 324 Camera. 325 Third-party applications . 326 Making room on your smartphone. 327 Voice quality . 328 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G Transferring info from another device Reinstalling the desktop software For information on transferring your info from a previous Windows Mobile device or from a Palm OS by ACCESS device to your new Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm smartphone, visit palm.com/treopro for instructions. DID YOU KNOW? You can purchase a third-party application that lets you run Palm OS applications on your smartphone. DID YOU KNOW? If you have questions about Windows Mobile, you can go to windowsmobile.com. Search for Palm devices for information. IMPORTANT Do not use a backup utility to transfer your info from another device to your new smartphone. This can cause your smartphone to malfunction. If you have problems synchronizing when using your desktop synchronization software, you may need to reinstall the software. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your computer profile includes administrator rights to install software. In large organizations, these are usually granted by the system administrator. 1 Shut down your computer and turn it on again. 2 On your computer, click Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs. 3 Remove your desktop software. For computers running Windows XP, the software is called Microsoft ActiveSync. For computers running Windows Vista, the software is called Windows Mobile Device Center. 4 Quit any active applications, including virus scanners and Internet security applications. T R A N S F E R R I N G I N F O F R O M A N O T H E R D E V I C E 303 2 If the screen display is on, press Power to turn off the screen. 3 Remove the back panel from your smartphone (see Removing the back panel). 4 Slide the stylus out from its slot. 5 Use the stylus tip to gently press the reset button. 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G 5 On your smartphone, press Start and select Programs. 6 Select PC Setup 7 Select Set up my PC. 8 Press OK 9 Connect the USB cable to your
. smartphone by inserting it into the microUSB connector on the bottom of the smartphone. Installation starts automatically. Resetting your smartphone Performing a soft reset Performing a soft reset is similar to restarting a computer. If your smartphone is not responding or you have trouble synchronizing with your computer, a soft reset may help. 1 If your smartphone responds to key presses, press and hold Power turn off your phone. to 304 R E S E T T I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G 6 Wait for the progress bar on the Palm logo screen to fill before continuing to use your smartphone. 7 Slide the back panel into place. TIP You can also do a soft reset by removing the battery and reinserting it. DID YOU KNOW? If the phone or the Bluetooth wireless technology feature was on before a reset, these automatically turn on after the reset. Performing a hard reset A hard reset erases all personal information, such as appointments, contacts, and tasks, as well as programs you have added, such as third-party software on your smartphone. Never do a hard reset without first trying a soft reset. You can restore previously synchronized information the next time you sync. IMPORTANT Synchronize to restore your Outlook data, such as Outlook email, Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks. You can use a backup-and-restore solution. Make sure its an application thats approved by Palm, such as the one included on your smartphone. TIP Some third-party applications do not create a backup on your computer when you synchronize. If you do a hard reset, you may lose info in these applications and you need to reinstall the application on your smartphone after the hard reset. Please contact the application vendor to find out if your info is backed up during synchronization. DID YOU KNOW? When you synchronize after a hard reset, the source folder in My Documents changes from Treo My Documents to WM_your name. A hard reset can tell you whether a problem stems from your smartphone or from an application installed on it. If you do not experience the problem after you perform a hard reset, the problem may be related to software you installed. See Third-party applications for suggestions on diagnosing third-party software issues. 1 Synchronize your smartphone with your computer so that your smartphone applications and info can be restored by synchronizing again after you perform the hard reset. R E S E T T I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E 305 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G 2 Remove the back panel from your smartphone (see Removing the back panel). 3 Slide the stylus out from its slot. 4 If the screen is off, press Power to wake up the screen. 5 While pressing and holding End use the tip of the stylus to gently press and release the reset button. 6 Continue pressing and holding End
, until the Erase all data? prompt appears. 7 Press Up 8 Wait for the progress bar on the Treo logo screen to fill before continuing to use your smartphone. to confirm the hard reset. 9 Slide the back panel into place. 10 (Optional) Synchronize to restore your previously synchronized info. If you use a backup utility, you may also need to restore a backup to recover additional info and settings. Replacing the battery Your smartphone comes with a replaceable battery. Be sure to use a replacement battery from Palm that is compatible with Treo Pro models. Do not use a battery from any earlier model of the smartphone. TIP Be sure to dispose of your old battery in an environmentally responsible and legal way. In some areas, disposal in household or business trash is prohibited. Visit palm.com/
environment for more information. DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone stores all your info even when you remove the battery. 1 Press Power to turn off the screen. 2 With the back panel facing you, push the lower-right corner of the back panel with your right thumb. Then use both thumbs and firmly slide the panel away from you to release it. NOTE The back panel might be difficult to remove the first few times. If you have trouble removing the back panel as described, go to the Knowledge Library at kb.palm.com. Enter 30457 in the solution 306 R E S E T T I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G id field to learn different ways to remove the back panel. 4 Align the metal contacts on the new battery with the contacts of the battery compartment, and then press the battery into place. 14 R E T P A H C 1 2 3 Place a fingernail behind the small tab at the upper-left of the battery, and pull the end of the battery up and out of the compartment to remove the battery. 1 Battery contacts 2 Smartphone contacts 5 Slide the back panel into place. R E S E T T I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E 307 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G Performance The applications are running slower than usual 1 Press and hold OK to open Task Manager. 2 Select Stop All to close all your open applications. 3 Press OK If the previous steps dont fix the problem, try doing a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). If the problem persists, follow these steps to turn off the Voice Command setting, if it is enabled:
1 Press Start 2 Select Personal, and then select Voice and select Settings. Command
. 3 Uncheck the Enabled box. 4 Press OK
. 308 P E R F O R M A N C E TIP Be sure that any third-party applications you use on your smartphone are designed for Windows Mobile 6.1 Professional. Applications written for Windows Mobile 6.1 Standard or earlier versions of Windows Mobile software do not work with your smartphone. If you can try a free version of the software before purchasing it, you can test it first to make sure it works properly. My battery seems to drain quickly If you have a push email solution or if you have set up a schedule for wireless synchronization, check with your email provider or system administrator to make sure that the server is set up properly to work with your smartphone. Incorrect server setup can cause excessive drain on your battery. For more tips on conserving battery life, see Maximizing battery life). I want to charge my smartphone by connecting it to my computer, but when I connect them, a Setup screen appears If you want to use the connection between your smartphone and your computer just to 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G charge your smartphone (and not to sync), you need to turn off setup mode. When the Setup screen appears on your computer, on your smartphone, press Cancel (right softkey), and then press Exit (right softkey). Screen The screen appears blank 1 If this is the first time you are turning on your smartphone, you need to take out and reinsert the battery to turn on the screen (see Replacing the battery). Alternately, connect your smartphone to a wall outlet using the USB AC charger
(see Charging the battery). 2 If youre on a call, when the time period specified in Backlight Settings expires, the screen dims; one minute later, the screen automatically turns off. Press any key except End to wake up the screen. Pressing End hangs up the call. 3 Look closely at the screen. If you can see a dim image, try adjusting the screen brightness (see Adjusting the brightness). 4 If that doesnt work, perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). 5 If that doesnt work, connect your smartphone to the USB AC charger (see Charging the battery) and perform a soft reset again. 6 If you are using a third-party application, make sure that the application supports 320x320 screen resolution. 7 If that doesnt work, perform a hard reset (see Performing a hard reset). The screen doesnt respond accurately to taps or activates wrong features 1 Make sure there is no debris trapped under the edges of the screen. 2 Press Start 3 Select the System tab, and then select and select Settings. Screen
. 4 On the General tab, select Align Screen. 5 Tap the screen where indicated. 6 Press OK
. S C R E E N 309 My smartphone wont connect to the mobile network 1 Try the preceding suggestions for weak signals. 2 Turn off your phone and turn it on again
(see Turning your smartphone on/off). 3 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). My phone seems to turn off by itself If a system error and reset occur, the phone automatically turns on if it was on before the reset. However, if your smartphone cant determine if your phone was on before the reset, it does not automatically turn on the phone (see Turning your phone on). 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G Network connection Signal strength is weak 1 If youre standing, move about 10 feet (3 meters) in any direction. 2 If youre in a building, move near a window. Open any metal blinds. 3 If youre in a building, move outdoors or to a more open area. 4 If youre outdoors, move away from large buildings, trees, or electrical wires. 5 If youre in a vehicle, move your smartphone so that its level with a window. 6 Try using a hands-free Bluetooth headset to see if that improves the signal strength. TIP Become familiar with low coverage areas where you live, commute, work, and play so you know when to expect signal-strength issues. 310 N E T W O R K C O N N E C T I O N I cant tell if data services are available The following icons appear in the title bar to indicate whether data services are available:
You are in an area that supports mobile broadband (EVDO) data services. EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized) is a wireless broadband technology that is designed for very high-speed data transfer, with average download speeds of 400 to 600Kbps. It is capable of reaching download speeds up to 3.1Mbps and upload speeds up to 1.8Mbps. Your phone is on, and a mobile broadband data connection is active. You can still make or answer calls. When you make or answer a call, the data transmission is automatically interrupted. 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G Your phone is on and is connected to a mobile broadband network, but you are not actively transmitting data. You can still make and answer calls. You are in an area that supports 1xRTT data services. The 1xRTT
(single-carrier [1x] radio transmission technology) wireless technology can provide fast data transfer and Internet access with average speeds of 60 to 80Kbps and bursts up to 144Kbps. Your phone is on, and a 1xRTT data connection is active. When you make or receive a call, the data transmission is automatically interrupted. Your phone is on and is connected to a 1xRTT network, but you are not actively transmitting data. You can still make and answer calls. N E T W O R K C O N N E C T I O N 311 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G My smartphone wont connect to the Internet using a data connection Your smartphone supports EVDO or 1X wireless data networks. To connect to the Internet using this method, you must subscribe to data services with your wireless service provider.
Contact your wireless service provider to verify that your subscription plan includes data services and that these services have been correctly activated. Your wireless service provider should also be able to tell you if there are any outages in your location. 3 On the Tasks tab, select Manage existing connections. 4 If your wireless service providers name
. If not, appears in the list, press OK contact your wireless service provider for assistance.
Try using a Wi-Fi connection if you are in an area that supports it. I cant send or receive text or multimedia messages
Make sure your phone is on and that youre inside a coverage area (see Turning your phone on).
Press and hold Power to turn off
Contact your wireless service provider your phone, and then press and hold the same button to turn it back on.
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset).
Confirm that data services are correctly configured on your smartphone by doing the following:
1 Press Start 2 Select the Connections tab, and then and select Settings. select Connections
.
to verify that your plan includes messaging services, that these services have been correctly activated, and that they are available at your location. Your wireless service provider should be able to tell you if messaging services have been experiencing transmission delays. If possible, contact the recipient or sender of the message, and make sure the receiving device can handle the type of message youre sending. 312 N E T W O R K C O N N E C T I O N 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G
If a text message arrives but does not display a notification, perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset).
The device specifications are compatible with your smartphone. I cant make or receive calls using a hands-free device with Bluetooth wireless technology Verify all the following:
The Turn on Bluetooth box is checked in Bluetooth Settings.
Your Bluetooth device is charged and turned on.
Your smartphone is within range of the hands-free device. Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet (10 meters) in optimum environmental conditions, which include the absence of the following: obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.
The Bluetooth Settings screen is closed.
You are away from other devices using the 2.4 GHz radio frequency, such as cordless phones, microwaves, and Wi-Fi equipment. If this is impossible, move the phone closer to the hands-free device. I lost the connection between my smartphone and my Bluetooth headset 1 Press Start and select Settings. 2 Select the Connections tab, and then select Bluetooth. 3 Select the Devices tab. 4 Select your headset name from the list. 5 In Partnership Settings, make sure the Hands Free box is checked. 6 Select Save. 7 Highlight the headset name. 8 Press and hold Center to open the shortcut menu and select Set as Hands-Free. 9 Test your headset by making or receiving a call. If the headset still doesnt work, delete the existing partnership and create a new one. To delete the partnership:
1 Press Start 2 Select the Connections tab, and then and select Settings. select Bluetooth. N E T W O R K C O N N E C T I O N 313 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G 3 Highlight the headset device name. 4 Press and hold Center to open the shortcut menu, and select Delete. 5 Create a new partnership (see Connecting to devices with Bluetooth wireless technology. DID YOU KNOW? You can go to the Windows Mobile website for more information at windowsmobile.com. DID YOU KNOW? A common cause of sync problems is the presence of protective software, such as VPNs or firewalls, on your computer or network. Desktop sync software This section covers issues with synchronizing using the desktop sync software that came with your smartphone. If you have a Windows XP computer, the desktop sync software is called ActiveSync desktop software. If you have a Windows Vista computer, the desktop sync software is called Windows Mobile Device Center. NOTE See Exchange ActiveSync (wireless synchronization) for help with direct wireless synchronization with an Exchange server. Synchronization Synchronization enables you to back up the information on your smartphone onto your computer or your server. If you ever need to perform a hard reset or otherwise erase all your information on your smartphone, you can synchronize your smartphone with your computer to restore the info. To make sure you always have an up-to-date backup of your info, synchronize frequently. You can synchronize email and other information directly with Microsoft Exchange Server 2007, or Exchange Server 2003 SP2, using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, or you can synchronize your smartphone with your computer, using the desktop sync software that came with your smartphone. 314 S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G My smartphone does not sync when I connect it to my computer with the USB cable. Instead, I see a Treo Setup screen. Your connection did not switch to sync mode. Follow these steps to switch modes manually. 1 On your smartphone, press Start and select Programs. 2 Select PC Setup 3 Select Synchronize. 4 If you still cannot synchronize, go to palm.com/treopro for synchronization support. I am in sync mode, but synchronization isnt working. Even if you are in sync mode, synchronization cannot take place unless you have the desktop sync software installed on your computer. If you did not install the software during initial setup but want to synchronize, switch to setup mode so that you can install the software. 1 On your smartphone, press Start and select Programs. 2 Select PC Setup 3 Select Set up my PC. 4 Connect your smartphone to your computer using the USB cable. 5 On your computer, follow the onscreen prompts to update or install the appropriate sync software for your computer (ActiveSync for Windows XP, or Windows Mobile Device Center for Windows Vista). 6 If you still cannot synchronize, go to palm.com/treopro for synchronization support. The desktop sync software does not respond to sync attempt As you complete the following steps, synchronize after each step. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need to complete the remaining steps. 1 Verify that the USB cable is securely connected at all points (see Setting up your computer for synchronization). 2 Make sure that all the files youre trying to sync are closed on both your computer and your smartphone. 3 On a Windows XP computer, look for icon at the top of the ActiveSync S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N 315 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G icon in the taskbar on your smartphone screen and the ActiveSync your computer to make sure ActiveSync desktop software is running on your computer. On a Windows Vista computer, look for the connection icon at the top of your smartphone screen. If the correct icons are not displayed, do the following:
, select Smartphone: Press Start Programs, and select ActiveSync Press Menu (right softkey) and select Connections. Make sure the Synchronize all PCs using this connection box is checked, and that USB is selected from the list. Windows XP computer: Click Start >
Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. Windows Vista computer: Click Start
> All Programs > Windows Mobile Device Center. 4 Do one of the following:
Windows XP computer: Double-click the ActiveSync taskbar. From the File menu, select icon in your 316 S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N Connection Settings. Make sure the Allow USB connections box is checked and click Connect. Windows Vista computer: Click Start
> All Programs > Windows Mobile Device Center. Select Connect without setting up your device, and then select Connection settings. Make sure the Allow USB connections box is checked, and click Connect. 5 On your smartphone, press Start
, select Settings, select the Connections tab, and then select USB to PC network functionality box is checked, uncheck it. If this box is currently unchecked, then check it. If the Enable advanced 6 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). 7 Restart your computer and make sure the desktop sync software is running. 8 If problems persist and youre synchronizing through a USB hub, try connecting the USB cable to a different USB port or directly to your computers built-in USB port. 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G 9 If youre already synchronizing through a
When the Synchronization Setup built-in USB port on the front of your computer, move the USB cable to a USB on the back of your computer if your computer has USB ports in both places. 10 Uninstall the desktop software that came with your smartphone, and then repeat the installation process (see Reinstalling the desktop software). 11 For a Windows XP computer only, delete the existing partnership between your smartphone and your computer and create a new one by doing the following steps in turn:
Disconnect your smartphone and your computer from the USB cable.
Right-click the gray ActiveSync icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen, and select Open Microsoft ActiveSync.
Click File, and then click Delete Mobile Device. When asked to confirm, click Yes.
Connect your smartphone and your computer to the USB cable. Wizard appears, follow the steps to establish a sync relationship between your smartphone and your computer. 12 If your organization uses a firewall or a VPN connection, synchronizing with ActiveSync may not work. For a Windows XP computer only, go to microsoft.com and search for the following topics to help with specific firewall setup situations:
ActiveSync USB Connection Troubleshooting Guide
ActiveSync with Sygate Personal Firewall
ActiveSync with TrendMicro PC-cillin Internet Security
ActiveSync with Norton Personal Firewall
ActiveSync with Zone Alarm Security Suite
ActiveSync with McAfee Personal Firewall
ActiveSync with Windows Firewall 13 Verify with your computer hardware vendor that your operating system supports your internal USB controller. S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N 317 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G Synchronization finishes but info doesnt appear where it should
With the included desktop sync software, your smartphone can synchronize with the root folders of Microsoft Office Outlook Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Notes (Outlook sold separately). If you want to synchronize with a global Exchange Address Book, you must copy the addresses to your local Contacts list in Microsoft Office Outlook (right-click the addresses and select Add to Personal Address Book).
Microsoft Office Outlook subfolders and public folders are not accessible with the included software. You may want to use a third-party solution instead. If youre trying to sync offline, be sure to set your Microsoft Office Outlook Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to be available offline.
For music files, update the library in Windows Media Player Mobile (see Working with libraries).
For pictures and videos, see Synchronizing your pictures, videos, and music for information on the location of synchronized items.
For Office Mobile files, see Where are the changes I made to my file? for information on the location of synchronized files. If youre still having problems, try the following:
1 Make sure youre synchronizing with the intended desktop personal information manager (PIM). The desktop sync software lets you synchronize with Microsoft Office Outlook for Windows. If you use a different PIM, you need to install third-party software to synchronize. For more information, consult the company that makes the PIM. 2 Open the desktop sync software on your computer, and make sure the Files synchronization option is selected (see Changing which applications sync). 3 Uninstall the desktop sync software, reboot your computer, and then repeat the installation process (see Reinstalling the desktop software). 318 S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G Synchronization starts but doesnt finish Make sure that you installed the desktop software that came with your smartphone. If youre not sure whether this software is installed, reinstall it (see Reinstalling the desktop software). 2 Open Microsoft Office Outlook and correct the wrong entries. 3 Manually enter any information you added to your smartphone since the last time you synchronized. 4 Synchronize your smartphone and your 14 R E T P A H C My video and music files wont sync 1 Make sure you have Windows Media Player 10 or later installed on your computer. 2 Reinstall the desktop sync software
(see Reinstalling the desktop software). Media file synchronization fails if you installed the desktop sync software before you installed Windows Media Player. My appointments show up in the wrong time slot after I sync 1 Make sure that you installed the desktop sync software that came with your smartphone. If youre not sure whether this software is installed, reinstall it (see Reinstalling the desktop software). computer. My scheduled sync doesnt work By default, a scheduled sync does not work while you are roaming. This is to prevent roaming charges on your account. If roaming charges are not a concern, follow these steps to continue your sync schedule while roaming:
and select Programs. 1 Press Start 2 Select ActiveSync 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select
. Schedule. 4 Check the Use above setting when roaming box. 5 Press OK
. S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N 319 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G An alert tells me that ActiveSync encountered a problem on the server There is a temporary problem with the server or the server may be temporarily overloaded. Try again later. If the problem persists, contact your system administrator. An alert tells me that there is not enough free memory to sync my info The ActiveSync application on your smartphone ran out of storage space. Try the following:
1 Go to Memory Settings and close all running programs (see Closing applications). 2 If the problem persists, see Making room on your smartphone for suggestions on other ways to free up space on your smartphone. An alert tells me that ActiveSync encountered a problem with [item type]
[item name]
An error occurred during the sync of a single item. This error can usually be corrected only by removing the item that caused the error. If you sync again to see if the error persists, be aware that items causing this type of error are skipped and do not show up again. My Today screen settings are not restored after a hard reset Settings such as the background image and plug-in choices are not backed up during synchronization, so they cant be restored after a hard reset. If you use a backup utility, you may be able to restore a backup to recover your Today screen settings and other additional info. Exchange ActiveSync (wireless synchronization) For issues with direct wireless synchronization with an Exchange server, see Desktop sync software. TIP If you are synchronizing with an Exchange server and youre unable to change your lock settings, check with your system administrator to find out if a systemwide locking policy is in place. 320 S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N An alert tells me that the server could not be reached Your smartphone had to wait too long to connect to the Exchange server. The connection may have been lost, the server may be temporarily overloaded, or the server may have encountered an internal error. Check your Exchange server name and proxy server settings (see Setting up wireless synchronization), and try again later. An alert tells me that my account information could not be detected When you set up the Exchange server sync options, the credentials page was left blank. Correct the credentials (see Setting up wireless synchronization), or set up your smartphone to sync only with a computer, and try to sync again. An alert tells me the device timed out while waiting for credentials The Exchange server credentials screen was left open too long. Re-enter the Exchange server credentials, and try to sync again. T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G 14 R E T P A H C Email I have problems using my account Occasionally you may experience problems using an email account after you set it up. If you followed the account setup procedure and are experiencing problems in using the account, verify that the account complies with your email providers requirements by following these steps:
Verify both your password and your username for your email account.
Some email service providers require you to be on their network to use your email account. If this is the case, be sure to use your providers network as the connection type for the account.
Some email service providers have other requirements specific to their service. Check with your service provider to see if any provider-specific requirements exist.
Service provider settings frequently change. If your email account was working but you are currently experiencing problems, check with your E M A I L 321 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G service provider to see if any of the account settings have changed. password setting is on. This is required for over-the-air synchronization. I have problems sending and receiving email Short periods of time when email is unavailable are common due to server problems or poor wireless coverage. If you have problems sending or receiving mail for an extended period of time, check with your ISP or email service provider to verify that the service is working properly. Scheduled email synchronization is not working If email synchronization is occurring and you turn your smartphone off or the connection to your email service provider is disconnected, the synchronization fails.
Check the synchronization schedule to make sure that email sync is set to occur at the expected day and time. See Setting the synchronization schedule for details.
Press Start
, select Programs, and then select ActiveSync Menu (right softkey) and select Configure Server. Make sure the verify
. Press I have problems sending email If you are able to receive email messages but cannot send them, try the following steps, in turn:
Make sure your ISP or email provider allows you to access email on a smartphone. Some providers do not offer this option at all; other providers require an upgrade for accessing email on a smartphone.
Press Start
, select Programs, and then select ActiveSync Menu (right softkey) and select Configure Server. Make sure the SSL box is checked. Press
Enter the name of a different outgoing mail server for sending mail. Many ISPs, such as cable companies, require that you have an Internet connection to their network to send email through their servers. In this case, you can almost always receive email from these accounts, but if you want to send email, you must send it through another server
(see Setting up a POP/IMAP account in 322 E M A I L the Messaging application: Common email providers). My vCard or vCal email attachment isnt forwarding correctly Microsoft Office Outlook provides several features, including vCard and vCal, that work with email client software on a Windows computer. For these features to work correctly, the email client software must be properly set up. Follow these steps to check the settings:
1 Click Start on your computer and select Settings. 2 Select Internet Options and click the Programs tab. 3 Make sure that the email field is set to the correct email client software. 4 Click OK. 5 Start the email client software and make sure it is configured as the default MAPI client. Consult the documentation for your desktop email application for more information. 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G When I sync with my Exchange server my info is not downloading to my smartphone Check with your system administrator to obtain the name of the mail server that offers you wireless access to the corporate mail system. If you cannot obtain the name of this server (some companies do not give it out, because they do not want wireless access to their servers), you cannot use Exchange ActiveSync to synchronize with the Exchange server. Its possible that the SSL setting is turned off. Verify the setting by following these steps:
and select Programs. 1 Press Start 2 Select ActiveSync 3 Press Menu (right softkey) and select
. Configure Server. 4 Make sure the SSL box is checked. E M A I L 323 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G Web I cant access a web page First, make sure you have Internet access. Open Internet Explorer Mobile and try to view a web page youve loaded before. To ensure that youre viewing the page directly from the Internet, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Refresh. After confirming your Internet connection, try to view the page in question again. If it comes up blank, press Menu (right softkey) and select Refresh. If youre still having trouble, the page may contain elements that are not supported by Internet Explorer Mobile, such as Flash, Shockwave, VBScript, WML script, and other plug-ins. Some websites use a redirector to their true home page. For example, if you enter the address http://palm.com/support, it may resolve to http://palm.com/us/support. If Internet Explorer Mobile cant follow the redirect, try using a desktop browser to see the landing page of the redirector, and enter that address in Internet Explorer Mobile. TIP Your smartphone can open your email application when you select an email address on a web page. If nothing happens when you select the link, try setting up your email application first. An image or map is too small on my smartphone screen Internet Explorer Mobile has several viewing modes: Full Screen, Mobile, and Desktop. Switch to Full Screen or Desktop mode to see the full-size image (see Viewing a web page). A secure site refuses to permit a transaction Some websites dont support certain browsers for transactions. Please contact the sites webmaster to make sure the site allows transactions using Internet Explorer Mobile. 324 W E B 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G Camera DID YOU KNOW? Pictures are 16-bit color. Resolution settings range from the low end of VGA (160 x 120 pixels) to a high end of 2 megapixels (1600 x 1200). Video resolution settings range from a low end of 176 x 144 pixels to a high end of 352 x 288 pixels. You can change the resolution setting by pressing Menu (right softkey) and selecting Resolution
(still images) or Quality (video). Here are some tips for taking good pictures with the built-in camera:
Clean the cameras lens with a soft, lint-free cloth.
Take pictures in bright lighting conditions. Low-light images may be grainy, due to the sensitivity of the camera.
Hold the camera as still as possible. Try supporting your picture-taking arm against your body or a stationary object
(such as a wall).
Keep the subject of the pictures still. Exposure time is longer with lower light levels, so you may see a blur.
For best results, verify that you have the brightest light source coming from behind you, lighting the subjects face. Avoid taking indoor pictures with the subject in front of a window or light.
Make sure the subject is at least 18 inches (0.5 meters) away from the camera to ensure good focus. When you synchronize with a Windows XP computer, your Camera images are stored in the C:\Documents and Settings\<Username>\My Documents\Treo My Documents folder on your hard drive
(see Camera). When you synchronize with a Windows Vista computer, your Camera images are stored in the C:\Documents and Settings\<Username>\Documents\Docum ents on <User>s Treo Pro folder on your hard drive (see Camera). The Camera preview image looks strange Some third-party applications overwrite the color settings on your smartphone with their own 8-bit color settings. This can affect the Camera Preview mode. Delete third-party applications one by one until the C A M E R A 325 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G preview image improves (see Removing applications). 1 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). Third-party applications Sometimes third-party applications can cause conflicts on your smartphone. Third-party applications that modify wireless features may affect the performance of your smartphone and may require extra troubleshooting. Use caution when installing the following types of applications:
Ringtone managers
Caller ID applications Instant messaging
Applications that modify when your phone or data connections turn on or off and how your phone behaves If you recently installed an application and your smartphone seems to be stuck, try the following:
2 Make sure the third-party application is compatible with the Windows Mobile 6.1 Professional operating system on your smartphone. 3 Delete the most recently installed application from your smartphone (see Removing applications). 4 If the problem persists, perform another soft reset. 5 If possible, synchronize or use a backup utility to back up your most recent info. 6 Perform a hard reset (see Performing a hard reset). 7 Synchronize or restore your backup to restore the info in your built-in applications. 8 If the problem is resolved, begin reinstalling your third-party applications one at a time. 9 If the problem recurs, delete the last application you installed and report the problem to its developer. 326 T H I R D - P A R T Y A P P L I C A T I O N S 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G Getting more help Contact the vendor of any third-party software if you require further assistance. TIP Remember that not all third-party applications were written with the Treo Pro smartphone keyboard and 5-way navigator in mind. You may encounter strange behavior or errors in these applications if you use the keyboard and the 5-way navigator. Making room on your smartphone If you store a large amount of information, or install many third-party applications, the internal memory on your smartphone may fill up. Here are some common ways to clear space on your smartphone:
Camera: Large images or videos take up a lot of memory. Move images to an expansion card or delete images from your smartphone (see Pictures & Videos). Messaging: Multimedia content and email attachments can consume excessive memory. Move multimedia content and attachments to an expansion card, or delete large files from your smartphone
(see Deleting messages for information about deleting email messages, and Deleting messages for information about deleting text and multimedia messages). You may also want to empty the deleted items folder. Internet: If you save links to pages youve visited in Internet Explorer Mobile, you may want to clear all recent pages
(see Customizing your Internet Explorer Mobile settings). Third-party applications: You can delete infrequently used applications or move them to an expansion card (see Moving info between your smartphone and an expansion card using File Explorer). Also, remember that your smartphone includes an expansion card slot, and that you can store applications and information on expansion cards. However, you still need free memory on the smartphone itself to run applications from an expansion card. M A K I N G R O O M O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E 327 14 R E T P A H C T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G Voice quality Is the other person hearing an echo?
Try decreasing the volume on your smartphone to avoid coupling or feedback on the other persons end. This applies to both the speakerphone and the handset earpiece.
Position the smartphone closer to your ear to prevent sound leaking back to the microphone. Keep your hand away from the microphone hole, which is on the lower-right side of your smartphone. If youre using Speakerphone mode with your smartphone lying on a flat surface, try turning the smartphone face down (screen facing the surface).
Are you hearing your own voice echo?
Ask the other person to turn down their volume or to hold the phone closer to their ear. Is your voice too quiet on the other end?
Be sure to hold the bottom of the smartphone, or the hands-free microphone, close to your mouth. Check the signal-strength indicator. If the signal is weak, try to find an area with better coverage. 328 V O I C E Q U A L I T Y Terms ActiveSync The software that exchanges and updates the information on your Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm with the information on your computer. ActiveSync desktop software The software on your Windows XP computer that exchanges and updates the information on your computer with the information on your smartphone. To open ActiveSync on your computer, double-click the ActiveSync icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen. If the icon does not appear, click Start > All Programs (or navigate to the Programs group) > Microsoft ActiveSync. See Installing Desktop Sync Software:
Windows XP and Windows Vista. auto-off interval The time of inactivity that passes before the screen on your smartphone turns off. The wireless features on your smartphone are unaffected by this setting. See Optimizing power settings. beam The process of sending or receiving an entry or application using the infrared (IR) port on your smartphone or using Bluetooth wireless technology. See Beaming information. Bluetooth wireless technology Technology that enables devices such as smartphones, mobile phones, and computers to connect wirelessly to each other so that they can exchange information over short distances. For more info, visit bluetooth.com. See Connecting to devices with Bluetooth wireless technology. desktop software A Personal Information Manager (PIM) application for computers, such as Microsoft Outlook, that helps you manage your personal information and keep it synchronized with your smartphone. See Installing Desktop Sync Software:
Windows XP and Windows Vista. T E R M S 329 dialog box A set of options and command buttons that is enclosed by a border and that enables you to carry out a specific task. EXIF (Exchangeable Image File Format) A standard for storing interchange information in image files that enables images to be interoperable across multiple devices. infrared (IR) A way of transmitting information using light waves. You use the IR port on your smartphone to transfer information between other IR devices within a short radius. See Beaming information. lithium-ion (li-ion) The rechargeable battery technology used in your smartphone. See Charging the battery. Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Technology that allows your smartphone to synchronize email, contacts, calendar events, and tasks wirelessly with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 SP2 or 2007. See Setting up wireless synchronization. MMS (Multimedia Messaging System) An enhanced messaging system that enables you to send pictures, animations, and ringtones almost instantly. See Creating and sending a multimedia message. Mobile Device The component on your Windows XP computer that enables you to install applications and other information on your smartphone. To access it, open Windows Explorer or My Computer and look for the icon that represents your smartphone. See Installing applications from your computer. partnership The connection that you make between two devices by means of Bluetooth wireless technology. The devices recognize each other because each device finds the same passkey on the other device. After you create a partnership between the devices, you no longer need to enter the passkey. Partnership is also known as paired relationship, pairing, trusted device, and trusted pair on some devices. See Connecting to devices with Bluetooth wireless technology. 330 T E R M S Phone Off Appearing on the Today screen, this indicates that your smartphone is not connected to any network, and you cannot make calls except those to emergency numbers. You can still use the organizer features, however. See Turning your phone on. piconet An ad-hoc network of devices that uses Bluetooth wireless technology to connect one master device with up to seven active slave devices. The network can include up to 255 inactive, or parked, slave devices that the master device can bring into active status at any time. PIM (personal information manager) A genre of software that includes applications such as Microsoft Outlook, Palm Desktop software, Lotus Notes, and ACT!. PIMs generally store contacts, schedules, tasks, and memos. Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) A security protocol that enables you to send personal information in a more secure manner over the Internet. SMS (Short Messaging Service) The service that exchanges short text messages almost instantly between mobile devices. Your smartphone can send and receive text messages while you are on a call. See Creating and sending a text message. streaming Technology that enables you to access media contentfor example, watch video or listen to an audio programdirectly from the Internet on your smartphone without needing to download and save a file on your smartphone. See Viewing a video. synchronization The process in which information that is entered or updated on your smartphone, your computer, or a server is automatically updated in one of the other locations either wirelessly or by means of a cable connection. See Synchronizing information. T E R M S 331 username The name associated with your smartphone that distinguishes it from other Windows Mobile devices. If you install desktop software, you are asked to give your smartphone a username. If you only synchronize wirelessly using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, you do not need to give your smartphone a username. See Installing Desktop Sync Software:
Windows XP and Windows Vista. Windows Mobile The operating system of your Treo Pro smartphone. Your smartphone uses Windows Mobile 6.1 Professional edition. When installing third-party applications to your smartphone, be sure to install only apps that are written for Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.1 Professional. Apps designed for Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.1 Standard or any edition of Windows Mobile 5.0 software are not compatible with your Treo Pro smartphone. See Installing third-party applications. Windows Mobile Device Center The software on your Windows Vista computer that enables you to synchronize content and manage music, pictures, and videos between your smartphone and your computer. To open Windows Mobile Device Center on your computer, click Start > All Programs > Windows Mobile 332 T E R M S Regulatory and safety information FCC Statements This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This phone meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission Guidelines and is certified with the FCC as:
FCC ID: O8F-SKYC. The FCC ID on your Palm smartphone is located on a label inside the battery compartment. The battery must be removed as shown below to view the label. CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Antenna Care/Unauthorized Modifications Use only the supplied integral antenna. Unauthorized antenna modifications or attachments could damage the unit and may violate FCC regulations. Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. The term IC before the equipment certification number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met. IC: 3905A-SKYC L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N 333 Cet appareil numrique de la classe [*] est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. RF Safety Exposure General statement on RF energy: Your smartphone contains a transmitter and a receiver. When it is ON, it receives and transmits RF energy. When you communicate with your smartphone, the system handling your call controls the power level at which your smartphone transmits. Specific Absorption Rate (SAR): Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the independent scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health. In order to certify this unit for sale to the public, this unit has been tested for RF exposure compliance at a qualified test laboratory and found to comply with the regulations regarding exposure to RF Energy under the recommendations of the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP). The tests are performed in positions and locations as required by the FCC and IC for each model. As SAR is measured utilizing the devices highest transmitting power, the actual SAR of this device while operating is typically below that indicated below. This is due to automatic changes to the power level of the device to ensure it only uses the minimum power required to communicate with the network. The SAR limit for mobile devices set by FCC/IC is 1.6 W/kg averaged over 1 gram of tissue for the body or head (4.0 W/kg averaged over 10 grams of tissue for the extremitieshands, wrists, ankles, and feet). The highest reported SAR values of the Palm smartphone are:
Maximum scaled SAR values (FCC) Head Body 1.4 W/kg 1.29 W/kg In order to comply with FCC and IC RF exposure safety guidelines, users MUST use one of the following types of body worn accessories:
1 A Palm brand body-worn accessory that has been tested for
(specific absorption rate) SAR compliance and is intended for use with this product. 2 An accessory that contains NO metal (snaps, clips, etc.) and provides AT LEAST 1.5 cm (0.6 in.) of separation between the users body and the unit. Do NOT use the device in a manner such that it is in direct contact with the body (i. e. on the lap or in a breast pocket). Such use will likely exceed the FCC RF safety exposure limits. See www.fcc.gov/
oet/rfsafety for more information on RF exposure safety. To view the most recent SAR values of the Treo Pro smartphone, visit palm.com/55058. Body worn operation: Important safety information regarding radio frequency radiation (RF) exposure: To ensure compliance with RF exposure guidelines the smartphone must be used with a minimum of 1.5 cm (0.6 in.) separation from the body. Failure to observe these instructions could result in your RF exposure exceeding the relevant guideline limits. Limiting exposure to radio frequency (RF) fields: For individuals concerned about limiting their exposure to RF fields, the World Health Organization (WHO) provides the following advice:
Precautionary measures: Present scientific information does not indicate the need for any special precautions for the use of mobile phones. If individuals are concerned, they might choose to limit their own or their childrens RF exposure by limiting the length of calls, or using hands-free devices to keep mobile phones away from the head and body. Further information on this subject can be obtained from the WHO home page http://www.who.int/mediacentre/factsheets/fs193/en/
index.html WHO Fact sheet 193: June 2000. 334 R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N HAC Using your phone with a hearing device Your smartphone is compliant with the FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility
(HAC) requirements. For additional HAC information, including the HAC rating of this product, please refer to http://www.palm.com/
treopro-t850-hac. Your device has been tested for hearing aid compatibility. When some wireless phones are used near some hearing devices (hearing aids and cochlear implants), users may detect a buzzing, humming or whining noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others to this interference noise, and phones also vary in the amount of interference they generate. The wireless telephone industry has developed ratings for some of their mobile phone, to assist hearing-device users in finding phones that may be compatible with their hearing devices. Not all phones have been rated. Phones that have been rated have a label on the box. Your Treo Pro has an M3/T3 rating. Your smartphone has not been HAC rated with respect to its Wi-Fi operation because currently no HAC standards exist for Wi-Fi. These ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary, depending on the level of immunity of your hearing device and the degree of your hearing loss. If your hearing device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not be able to use a rated phone successfully. Trying out the phone with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal needs. M-Ratings: Phones rated M3 or M4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference with hearing devices than phones that are not labeled. M4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. T-Ratings: Phones rated T3 orT4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to be more usable with a hearing device's telecoil (T switch or Telephone Switch) than unrated phones. T4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. The more immune your hearing aid device is, the less likely you are to experience interference noise from your wireless phone. Hearing aid devices should have ratings similar to those of phones. Ask your hearing health-care professional for the rating of your hearing aid. Add the rating of your hearing aid and your phone to determine probable usability:
Any combined rating equal to or greater than six offers the best use.
Any combined rating equal to five is considered normal use.
Any combined rating equal to four is considered usable. Thus, if you pair an M3 hearing aid with an M3 phone, you will have a combined rating of six for best use. This is synonymous for T ratings. Palm further suggests that you experiment with multiple phones
(even those not labeled M3/T3 or M4/T4) while in the store to find the one that works best with your hearing aid device. If you experience interference or find the quality of service unsatisfactory after purchasing your device, promptly return it to the store within 30 days of purchase. With the Palm 30-day Risk-Free Guarantee, you may return the device within 30 days of purchase for a full refund, and you will only be responsible for charges based on your actual usage. Getting the Best Hearing Device Experience with Your Device To further minimize interference:
Set the phone's screen and keyboard backlight settings to ensure the minimum time interval.
Move the phone around to find the point with the least interference. Battery handling:
Do not disassemble or open, crush, bend or deform, puncture or shred.
Do not modify or remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, immerse or expose to water or other liquids, or expose to fire, explosion, or other hazard.
Only use the battery for the system for which it is specified.
Only use the battery with a charging system that has been qualified with the system per the IEEE/CTIA-1725 standard. Use of an unqualified battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N 335
Do not short-circuit a battery or allow metallic conductive objects
Never dispose of the battery by incineration. to contact battery terminals.
Replace the battery only with another battery that has been qualified with the system per IEEE/CTIA-1725. Use of an unqualified battery may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage or other hazard.
Promptly dispose of used batteries in accordance with local regulations.
Battery usage by children should be supervised.
Avoid dropping the phone or battery. If the phone or battery is dropped, especially on a hard surface, and the user suspects damage, take it to a service center for inspection.
Keep the metal contacts on top of the battery clean.
Dont attempt to disassemble or short-circuit the battery.
The battery may need recharging if it has not been used for a long period of time. Its best to replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. It can be recharged hundreds of times before it needs replacing
Dont store the battery in high temperature areas for long periods of time. Its best to follow these storage rules:
Less than one month: 14 F to 140 F (10 C to 60 C)
Do not handle a damaged or leaking lithium-Ion (li-ion) battery as
More than one month: 14 F to 113 F (10 C to 45 C) you can be burned.
Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion or other hazard. Based on DOT rules, spare batteries must not be transported in checked luggage on commercial flights. Spare batteries can only be transported in carry-on luggage. For more information:
http://safetravel.dot.gov/whats new batteries.html. Protecting Your Battery The guidelines listed below help you get the most out of your batterys performance. Recently there have been some public reports of wireless phone batteries overheating, catching fire, or exploding. It appears that many, if not all, of these reports involve counterfeit or inexpensive, aftermarket-brand batteries with unknown or questionable manufacturing standards. Use only manufacturer-approved batteries and accessories found at Carrier Stores or through your devices manufacturer. Buying the right batteries and accessories is the best way to ensure they're genuine and safe.
In order to avoid damage, charge the battery only in temperatures that range from 32 F to 122 F (0 C to 50 C).
Dont use the battery charger in direct sunlight or in high humidity areas, such as the bathroom. Power Specifications Use only power accessories approved by Palm, such as AC-power adapters and batteries. Unauthorized and non-approved batteries will NOT operate with the Palm smartphone. AC Power Adapter source: Foxlink Model: 5890-712V-02K0 Part Number: 157-10108-00 Input Rating: 100240 Vac, 50/60Hz, 0.2A Output Rating: 5Vdc, 1000mA Battery Source: Palm Type: Rechargeable Li-ion Polymer Model: 157-10105-00 Rating: 3.7Vdc, 1500mAh (minimum) Recycling and Disposal This symbol indicates that Palm products should be recycled and not be disposed of in unsorted municipal waste. Please return Palm products to the electrical and electronic equipment collection points in your municipality or county. These collection points are available free of charge. For detailed 336 R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N information please refer to your municipality or county. For information on Palm's environmental programs, visit www.palm.com/
environment. Hazardous substances that may be included in electronic products can potentially affect human health and the environment. Recycling benefits the environment by diverting waste from landfills and by recovering materials that may be recycled into other products. Responsible recycling ensures materials are properly collected and disposed. Palm is committed to support the European Union WEEE directive (2002/96/EC) and the protection of the environment for future generations. It is everyones responsibility to ensure that electrical and electronic products are properly reused, recycled or recovered. As part of Palm's corporate commitment to be a good steward of the environment, we strive to use environmentally friendly materials, reduce waste, and develop the highest standards in electronics recycling. Our recycling program keeps Palm handheld devices, smart phones and accessories out of landfills through evaluation and disposition for reuse and recycling. In the USA, Palm customers may participate in the recycling program free of charge. Visit palm com/recycle for additional details and information about how you can help reduce electronic waste. User Safety Operational Warnings IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND EFFICIENT OPERATION. Read this information before using your smartphone. For the safe and efficient operation of your smartphone, observe these guidelines. Potentially explosive atmospheres: Turn off your smartphone when you are in any areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere, such as fueling areas (gas or petrol stations, below deck on boats) storage facilities for fuel or chemicals, blasting areas and areas near electrical blasting caps, and areas where there are chemicals or particles (such as metal powders, grains and dust) in the air. Interference to medical and personal Electronic Devices: Most but not all electronic equipment is shielded from RF signals and certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your smartphone. Pacemakers: The Health Industry Manufacturers Association recommends that a minimum separation of 15 centimeters (6 inches) be maintained between a smartphone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by the recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should:
ALWAYS keep the smartphone more than six inches
(15 centimeters) from their pacemaker when the smartphone is turned ON.
Not carry the smartphone in a breast pocket.
Use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference.
Turn the smartphone OFF immediately if you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. Other Medical Devices, Hospitals: If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Turn your smartphone OFF in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Repetitive Motion Injuries: When using the keyboard or playing games on your smartphone, you may experience discomfort in your neck, shoulders, hands, arms, of other parts of the body. To avoid any injury, such as tendonitis, carpal tunnel syndrome, or other musculoskeletal disorder, make sure to take necessary breaks from use, take longer rests (such as several hours) if discomfort or tiring begins, and see a doctor if discomfort persists. To minimize the risk of Repetitive Motion Injuries, when Texting or playing games with your phone:
Do not grip the phone too tightly R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N 337
Press the buttons lightly
Make use of the special features in the handset which minimize the number of buttons which have to be pressed, such as message templates and predictive text
Take lots of breaks to stretch and relax Audio Safety: This smartphone is capable of producing loud noises which may damage your hearing. When using the speakerphone feature, it is recommended that you place your smartphone at a safe distance from your ear. Blackouts and Seizures: Blinking lights, such as those experienced with television or playing video games may cause some people to experience blackout or seizure, even if never experienced before. In the event a smartphone user should experience any disorientation, loss of awareness, convulsion, eye or muscle twitching or other involuntary movements, stop use immediately and consult a doctor. Individuals with personal or family history of such events should consult a doctor before using the device. To limit the possibility of such symptoms, wherever possible every hour take a minimum of 15 minutes, use in a well lighted area, view the screen from the farthest distance and avoid exposure to blinking lights if you are tired. Operating Machinery: Do not use your smartphone while operating machinery. Full attention must be given to operating the machinery in order to reduce the risk of an accident. Aircraft: While in aircraft, follow all instructions regarding the operation of your smartphone. Use of your smartphone while on board an aircraft must be done in accordance in compliance with airline instructions and regulations. Vehicles with Air Bags: Your smartphone should not be placed in a position that would affect the operation of air bag deployment or in a position that, should the air bag inflate, could propel the smartphone. Air bags will inflate with great force and care should be taken to protect within a vehicle that has air bags. Do not place a phone in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Store the phone safely before driving the vehicle. Increasing the separation between them may reduce the interference. You may also consult your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives. Small children: Do not leave your smartphone and its accessories within the reach of small children or allow them to play with it. They could hurt themselves or others, or could accidentally damage the smartphone. Your smartphone contains small parts with sharp edges that may cause an injury or which could become detached and create a choking hazard. Keep the device away from the abdomens of pregnant women and adolescents, particularly when using the device hands-free. To reduce exposure to radiation, use your device in good reception areas, as indicated by the bars on your phone, at least 3 to 4 bars. CAUTION Avoid potential hearing loss. Prolonged exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as portable music players and cellular telephones, at high volume settings for long durations may lead to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use of headphones (including headsets, earbuds and Bluetooth or other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear), hypersensitivity to sound and distorted hearing. Individual susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and other potential hearing problems varies. The amount of sound produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the sound, the device, the device settings and the headphones. You should follow some common sense recommendations when using any portable audio device:
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at which you can hear adequately.
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear what you are listening to. Hearing Aids: People with hearing aids or other cochlear implants may experience interfering noises when using wireless devices or when one is nearby. The level of interference will depend on the type of hearing device and the distance from the interference source.
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use noise-canceling headphones to block out background environmental noise. 338 R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time is required before your hearing could be affected.
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal. You must always switch off your smartphone wherever the use of a phone is prohibited. Use of your smartphone is subject to safety measures designed to protect users and their environment.
Always treat your smartphone and its accessories with care and keep it in a clean and dust-free place.
Do not expose your smartphone or its accessories to open
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you flames or lit tobacco products. experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech or experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the following sources:
American Academy of Audiology 11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300 Reston, VA 20190 Voice: (800) 222-2336 Email: info@audiology.org Internet: www.audiology.org National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders National Institutes of Health 31 Center Drive, MSC 2320 Bethesda, MD USA 20892-2320 Voice: (301) 496-7243 Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov Internet: http://www nidcd nih gov/health/hearing National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health Hubert H. Humphrey Bldg. 200 Independence Ave., SW Washington, DC 20201 Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH (1-800-356-4674) Internet: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise Product Handling & Safety General statement on handling and use: You alone are responsible for how you use your smartphone and any consequences of its use.
Do not expose your smartphone or its accessories to liquid, moisture, or high humidity.
Do not drop, throw, or try to bend your smartphone or its accessories.
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or aerosols to clean the device or its accessories.
Do not paint your smartphone or its accessories.
Do not attempt to disassemble your smartphone or its accessories; only authorized personnel must do so.
Do not expose your smartphone or its accessories to extreme temperatures, minimum 32F and maximum 113F (0 to +45 degrees Celsius)
Please check local regulations for disposal of electronic products.
Do not carry your smartphone in your back pocket as it could break when you sit down. Battery: Your smartphone includes an internal lithium-ion polymer battery. Please note that use of certain data applications can result in heavy battery use and may require frequent battery charging. Any disposal of the smartphone or battery must comply with laws and regulations pertaining to lithium-ion or lithium-ion polymer batteries. Demagnetization: To avoid the risk of demagnetization, do not allow electronic devices or magnetic media close to your smartphone for a long time. Normal use position: When making or receiving a phone call, hold your smartphone to your ear, with the bottom towards your mouth or as you would a fixed line phone. R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N 339 Emergency calls: This smartphone, like any wireless phone, operates using radio signals, which cannot guarantee connection in all conditions. Therefore, you must never rely solely on any wireless phone for emergency communications. Smartphone heating: Your smartphone may become warm during charging and during normal use. Accessories: Use only approved accessories. Do not connect with incompatible products or accessories. Take care not to touch or allow metal objects, such as coins or key rings, to contact or short-circuit the battery terminals. Connection to a car: Seek professional advice when connecting a phone interface to the vehicle electrical system. Faulty and damaged products: Do not attempt to disassemble the smartphone or its accessory. Only qualified personnel must service or repair the smartphone or its accessory. If your smartphone or its accessory has been submerged in water, punctured, or subjected to a severe fall, do not use it until you have taken it to be checked at an authorized service center. Interference in cars and to other Electronic Devices: Please note that because of possible interference to electronic equipment, some vehicle manufacturers forbid the use of mobile phones in their vehicles unless a hands-free kit with an external antenna is included in the installation. RF energy may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic operating and entertainment systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or representative to determine if these systems are adequately shielded from external RF energy. Also check with the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to the vehicle. Driving Safety Driving Safety Tips Overview 2 Use a hands-free device. 3 4 Position your smartphone within easy reach. Let the person you are speaking to know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. 5 Do not take notes, look up phone numbers, read/write e-mail, or surf the internet while driving. 6 Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. 7 Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may divert your attention from the road. 8 Dial your national emergency number to report serious emergencies. This is a free call from your smartphone. 9 Use your smartphone to help others in emergencies. 10 Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless number when necessary. Driving Safety Tips Details 1 Get to know your smartphone and its features such as speed-dial and redial. Carefully read your instruction manual and learn to take advantage of valuable features most smartphone models offer, including automatic redial and memory dial. Also, work to memorize the smartphone keyboard so you can use the speed-dial function without taking your attention off the road. 2 Use a hands-free device. A number of hands-free smartphone accessories are readily available today. Whether you choose an installed mounted device for your smartphone or a speakerphone accessory, take advantage of these devices. If driving while using a smartphone is permitted in your area, we recommend using a phone headset or a hands-free car kit (sold separately). However, be aware that use of a headset that covers both ears impairs your ability to hear other sounds. Use of such a headset while operating a motor vehicle or riding a bicycle may create a serious hazard to you and/or others, and may be illegal. If you must use a stereo headset while driving, place a speaker in only one ear. Leave the other ear free to hear outside noises, and do so only if it is legal and you can do so safely. 3 Make sure you place your smartphone within easy reach and where you can grab it without removing your eyes from the road. If you get an incoming call at an inconvenient time, let your voicemail answer it for you. Suspend conversations during hazardous driving conditions or situations. Let the person you are speaking to know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, and ice can be hazardous, but so is heavy traffic. As a driver, your first responsibility is to pay attention to the road. Always obey all laws and regulations on the use of the smartphone in your driving area. SafetyYour most important call. The Wireless Industry reminds you to use your smartphone safely when driving. 4 1 Get to know your smartphone and its features, such as speed-dial and redial. 340 R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N 5 Do not take notes, look up phone numbers, read/write e-mail, or surf the internet while driving. If you are reading an address book or business card while driving a car, or writing a to-do list, then you are not watching where you are going. It's common sense. Don't get caught in a dangerous situation because you are reading or writing and not paying attention to the road or nearby vehicles. 6 Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan your calls before you begin your trip, or attempt to schedule your calls with times you may be temporarily stopped or otherwise stationary. But if you need to dial while driving, follow this simple tip: dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue. 7 Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. Stressful or emotional conversations and driving do not mixthey are distracting and even dangerous when you are behind the wheel. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and if necessary, suspend phone conversations which have the potential to divert your attention from the road. 8 Use your smartphone to call for help. Your smartphone is one of the greatest tools you can own to protect yourself and your family in dangerous situationswith your smartphone at your side, help is only three numbers away. Dial your national emergency number in the case of fire, traffic accident, road hazard, or medical emergencies. Remember, your national emergency number is a free call on your smartphone. 9 Use your smartphone to help others in emergencies. If you see an auto accident, crime in progress, or other serious emergency where lives are in danger, call your national emergency number, as you would want others to do for you. 10 Call roadside assistance or a special wireless non-emergency assistance number when necessary. Certain situations you encounter while driving may require attention, but are not urgent enough to merit a call to your national emergency number. But you can still use your smartphone to lend a hand. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor traffic accident where no one appears injured, or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or other special non-emergency wireless number. End user notice Microsoft Voice Command Version 1.5 for Windows Mobile NOTE The Voice Command application is not available in all languages. See Setting up voice commands. IMPORTANT Do not become distracted from driving safely if operating a motor vehicle while using Device Software. Operating certain parts of this Device requires user attention. Diverting attention away from the road while driving can possibly cause an accident or other serious consequences. Even occasional, short diversions of attention can be dangerous if your attention is diverted away from your driving task at a critical time. Do not change system settings or enter data non-verbally (using your hands) while driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations. This is important since while setting up or changing some functions you might be required to distract your attention away from the road and remove your hands from the wheel. Microsoft makes no representations, warranties, or other determinations that ANY use of the Software Product is legal, safe, or in any manner recommended or intended while driving or otherwise operating a motor vehicle. General Operation Voice Command Control: Many of the functions of the Device Software can be accomplished using only voice commands. Using voice commands while driving allows you to initiate the command with a button and then operate the Device mostly without removing your hands from the wheel. Prolonged Views of Screen: If you are driving, do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Even occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving task at a critical time. Let Your Judgment Prevail: The Device Software is only an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. The Device Software is not a substitute for your personal judgment. Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident. R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N 341 Use of Speech Recognition Functions: Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is subject to errors. It is your responsibility to monitor the speech recognition functions and address any errors. connecting one device to another. The recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution before connecting your handheld to your computer, placing the handheld in a cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do this in many ways, including the following:
Hands-Free Capability All CTIA Certified portable products provide the consumer with a toll-free number for the purchase of a compatible hands-free device. 1-800-881-7256. ESD Safety Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such an occurrence. Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge caused by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material. To most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shockthe discharge event when you touch a metal doorknob. This little shock discharges the built-up static electricity. ESD-susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can harm circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take measures to help protect your electronic devices, including your PalmTM handheld, from ESD harm. While Palm has built protections against ESD into its products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless neutralized, could build up to levels that could harm your equipment. Any electronic device that contains an external entry point for plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD. Devices that you carry with you, such as your handheld, build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have built up on your body is automatically passed to the device. Then, when the device is connected to another device such as a docking station, a discharge event can occur. Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built-up static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before touching an electronic device or
Ground yourself when youre holding your mobile device by simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground.
For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case should discharge the ESD on your body. Increase the relative humidity of your environment. Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats. Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that can contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment include the following:
Low relative humidity.
Material type (The type of material gathering the charge. For example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural fibers like cotton.)
The rapidity with which you touch, connect or disconnect electronic devices. While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge static electricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD events you may want to take extra precautions to protect your electronic equipment against ESD. Owners Record The model number, regulatory number, and serial number are located on a nameplate inside the battery compartment. Record the serial number in the space provided below. This will be helpful if you need to contact us about your phone in the future. Product: Treo Pro Smartphone by Palm Model:
Serial No.:
342 R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N www.palm.com/recycle R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N 343 344 R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N Specifications Radio Phone features Processor technology Expansion Battery Operating system Camera Size Weight
CDMA phone
EVDO and 1X bands
Personal speakerphone
Hands-free headset jack (3.5 mm, 3-barrel connector)
Microphone mute option
TTY-compatible
3-way calling
HAC compliant (M3/T4 rating)
Dual-core MSM7501A processor528MHz
microSD card slot
Rechargeable lithium-ion
1500mAhr power
Removable for replacement
3.5 hours full charge time
Windows Mobile 6.1 Professional
Still image capture resolution:1280 x 1024, 2 megapixel
8x digital zoom
114mm x 60mm x 13.5mm (4.5 in. x 2.36 in. x 0.53 in.)
130 grams (4.6 ounces) S P E C I F I C A T I O N S 345 Infrared (1.0 compliant)
Bluetooth wireless technology (2.0 + EDR compliant)
Wi-Fi (802.11 b/g)
Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus)
65,536 colors (16-bit color)
Resolution: 320 x 320
User-adjustable brightness
Built-in 30-key keyboard plus 5-way navigator
Backlight for low lighting conditions
Today/Phone (includes Speed Dial and Keypad)
Messaging (text, multimedia, and email) Internet Explorer Mobile (web browser)
Camera
Pictures & Videos
Windows Media Player Mobile
File Explorer
Contacts
Calendar
Tasks
Notes Connectivity Display Keyboard Included software 346 S P E C I F I C A T I O N S Included software
(continued)
OneNote
Task Manager
Calculator
ActiveSync
Microsoft Office Excel Mobile
Microsoft Office Word Mobile
Microsoft Office PowerPoint Mobile
Adobe Reader LE
Voice Command
Quick Tour
Search
Remote Desktop Mobile
Wireless Modem (not available from all wireless service providers) Java (not available from all wireless service providers)
Windows Live (not available from all wireless service providers)
Windows Live Messenger (not available from all wireless service providers)
Sprite Backup S P E C I F I C A T I O N S 347 System requirements
(for sync with desktop sync software using USB cable) Operating and storage temperature range
Windows XP or Vista (later versions may also be supported)
170MB of free hard disk space
Available USB port
0 C to 50 C (32 F to 122 F)
5% to 90% RH 348 S P E C I F I C A T I O N S Index SYMBOLS
! on battery icon 22 NUMERICS 112 calls 52, 286 1st day of week option 214 1X icon 65 1xRTT data connections 65 3G networks 57 5-way navigator 29, 31, 327 911 calls 52, 286 999 calls 52, 286 A accented characters 37, 38 accessing applications 281 menu items 33, 34 on-device help 13 online support 13, 25 remote files 269, 297 the Internet 297, 312 accessories 340, 342 account picker 122 accounts See also email accounts enabling TTY/TDD devices and 73 getting help with 13 making calls and 55, 58 preventing unauthorized use of 286, 292 sending messages and 136 troubleshooting 321 Acrobat Reader. See Adobe Reader activating items on screen 32 phone 20 active calls 55 See also phone calls ActiveSync application defined 329 opening 87 synchronizing with 87 troubleshooting 314 ActiveSync desktop software 182, 329 ActiveSync icon 87, 88, 329 Add new device option 68, 175 Add new phone number to Contacts option 74 Add Server Source command 90 Add to Personal Address Book command 318 Add to Speed Dial command 62 adding a second call 58 applications 281 appointments 209, 211 attachments to email 112, 130, 257 connections 297 contacts 53, 115, 144, 205 document templates 230 expansion cards 264 files to playlists 200 folders 233 notes 206, 216, 218, 219, 247 tasks 215216 untimed events 210 web favorites 158159 address books 116117, 123, 207, 318 Address List Lookup 255 addresses copying 318 creating multimedia messages and 137 I N D E X 349 creating text messages and 133, 134 entering email 111, 123, 205 entering web 156 getting 117, 123, 208 highlighting 32 looking up corporate 255 searching for web 43 selecting 324 synchronizing 318 verifying 111, 116 ad-hoc connections 168 adjusting screen brightness 278 Adobe Flash Player 84 Adobe Reader 223, 228 Adobe Reader icon 250 Adobe Reader LE application 249252 Advanced Composer command 134 Advanced tab (Power Settings) 294 advancing slides 143, 234, 235 AES encryption 169 Agenda View (calendar) 209 airplane mode 48 alarm clock 291 See also clock alarm sounds 291 alarms adding 210, 214, 216 setting 278, 291 turning on and off 277 Alarms tab 291 albums 191 alerts 64 See also alarms aligning the screen 280 alignment settings documents 232 spreadsheets 235 Allow USB connections check box 316 Alt key 38, 39 alternate characters 37, 38 alternate characters list 38 animation 195, 234, 235 anniversaries 211 answering phone calls 53 54, 58, 73 antenna 333 Appearance tab 275, 281 application icons 39, 281 applications See also third-party applications associating with buttons 281 choosing menu items in 3334 closing 41 copying 267 customizing 281286 deleting 260, 327 downloading 257, 258 error reporting for 292 highlighting 39 included with device 346 installing 257260, 326, 327 losing information in 305 marking as exclusive 41 moving to expansion cards 267 opening 39, 40, 265, 281 reinstalling 303, 305 running from expansion cards 265, 327 running multiple 40, 41 scrolling in 30 selecting 39, 40 sorting 42 350 I N D E X storing 327 switching between 43, 56 synchronizing info in 80, 81, 82, 96 troubleshooting 305, 308 turning sounds on or off for 277 viewing memory usage for 293 appointments adding 209 appearing in wrong time slots 319 creating reminders for 210, 214 deleting 213 displaying 43 marking as private 212 scheduling repeating 211 sending 138, 215 setting options for 214 215 viewing 209, 210 area codes 207 arrow icons 29 arrow keys 30 Assign a program list 282 attachments adding 112, 130, 257 downloading 114115 embedded objects in 115 internal memory and 327 opening 114 removing from messages 138 setting maximum size 125 storing 114, 123 troubleshooting 323 viewing information about 135 attendees (meeting requests) 211 audio 53, 196 audio modes 73 audio recordings 138, 248 See also voice notes authentication 168, 169 auto-completion options 284 AutoFilter settings
(spreadsheets) 236, 243 Auto-Keyguard feature 287 Automatic Send/Receive option 126 automatic updates 297 auto-off interval 329 available memory 293 available storage space 293 B background colors 139 backgrounds 183, 193, 201, 275 backing up information 303, 305 backlight (keyboard) 36, 295 Backlight Settings screen 36 backlight shut-off interval 36 Backspace key 32, 37 backup application (on device) 89 backup utilities (third-party) 303, 305, 306, 320 backups, restoring 306, 320 banners (calendar) 210 battery charging 2123 connecting to Bluetooth devices and 174 conserving 2324, 104, 295 disposing of 306 handling 336 removing 305, 306 replacing 306307 troubleshooting 308 viewing remaining power for 294 I N D E X 351 viewing status of 22, 64 battery icons 22, 64 battery specifications 345 Battery tab 294 battery technology 330 beaming 24, 192, 257, 261 162 border highlight 31 brightness, adjusting 278 browsing files and folders 256, 267 calendar See also Calendar application adding items to 209, 210, Browsing History command 211, 215 263, 329 browsing the web. See web birthdays 211 blank screens 309 Block Recognizer option 284 Bluetooth devices See also hands-free devices beaming and 262 connecting to 173177 conserving battery and 24 synchronizing over 9495 troubleshooting 313 Bluetooth feature turning on or off 24, 67 viewing status of 43, 64 Bluetooth icon 94 Bluetooth Settings screen 174177 Bluetooth technology 153, 329 bonus software 260, 346 bookmarks 158 See also favorites browsing built-in applications 260, 346 built-in camera. See camera Burst mode 184, 186 button settings (Media Player) 202 buttons assigning voice commands to 282 associating with applications 281 disabling 286 reassigning 281282 selecting 29, 31 turning sounds on or off for 277 Buttons Settings screen 281 C calculations 238, 270 Calculator app 270271 calculator buttons 271 352 I N D E X displaying 208 hiding items on 212 moving through 209 removing items 213, 217 setting alarms for 210, 214, 216 sorting tasks on 217 unavailable slots on 212 viewing appointments on 43 Calendar application adding contacts and 205 customizing 214215 managing schedules with 209213 opening 208 sending meeting requests and 129 Calendar icon 208 calendar settings 214215 calendar views 208, 214 Call History list 60 Call Status softkey 55 call waiting 58 caller ID applications 326 caller ID blocking 57 caller ID pictures 183, 192, case-sensitive searching 230, 244 cell patterns (spreadsheets) 205 caller IDs 72 camera capturing videos with 187188 overview 183 taking pictures 184187 troubleshooting 325 camera icons 184 camera modes 184, 186 Camera Preview Mode 325 camera settings 185, 188 190 camera specifications 345 cancelling selections in lists 35 capitalization 36, 285 Capitalize first letter of sentence check box 285 Caps Lock icon 36 Caps Lock mode 36 captions 137, 138 Capture Settings tab 188 car kits 66, 67, 69 carrier. See service providers cascading menus 33 235 cell references
(spreadsheets) 239 certificates 126, 155, 292 Certificates icon 292 Certificates screen 292 changing alarm sounds 291 calendar views 209 color themes 275, 281 connections 297 contacts 206207 date and time settings 290 information 244 picture or video resolution 325 sync settings 92 text 230 text size 279 characters See also text capitalizing 36, 285 creating messages and 134 entering 36, 37, 239 highlighting 32 moving to specific 30 typing alternate 37, 38 charge indicator 22 charging smartphone battery 2123 charging status 22, 64 charts 236, 243, 244 chat sessions 143 chat view 140, 141, 143 check boxes 31 Check Names command 111 Clear Now Playing command 200 Clear Type tab 279 clearing Browsing History list 162 Call History list 61 clock 279 Clock & Alarms icon 279, 290 Clock & Alarms Settings screen 290, 291 closing applications 41 drop-down lists 35 Internet Explorer Mobile 156 menus 33 screens 31 I N D E X 353 color settings 139, 325 color themes 275, 281 Comm Manager 48, 175 commands. See menu items; voice commands Company Directory command 117, 208 company names 207 comparisons 243 completed tasks 216, 217 compressed files 257 computers accessing remote 268 charging smartphone and 22 connecting to 80 installing from 259 reinstalling desktop software on 303 setting up device and 12 synchronizing with 88, 95, 96, 181, 225 conference calls 5859 confidential events 213 configurations data services 312 mail servers 323 troubleshooting 312 TTY/TDD devices 7273 Configure Server command 323 Configure Wireless Networks screen 166 confirmation messages 146 Connect command 298 Connect via Bluetooth command 94 Connect via IR command 95 connecting smartphone to PCs 80 Connection Settings command 316 connections accessing Internet and 153, 155, 164, 297 accessing mobile networks and 310 accessing VPN clients and 297, 298 beaming and 262, 263 changing 297 conserving battery and 18, 24 creating 297, 298 displaying 297 enabling Bluetooth 67, 94, 173 enabling TTY/TDD 7273 enabling Wi-Fi 165 ending 298 losing 313 making phone calls and 57 manually starting 298 remote computers and 268 setting up 297298 synchronizing and 80, 86 timing out 321 troubleshooting 308, 310 314, 324 viewing status of 6365 Connections icon 297, 298 Connections screen 297, 298, 312, 313 connectivity specs 346 conserving smartphone battery 2324, 104, 295 contact categories 206 Contact Details command 135, 142 contact lookup feature 49, 50, 206 contact names, dialing by 5051 contacts adding 53, 115, 144, 205 354 I N D E X assigning caller IDs 192, 205 assigning ringtones 72, 205 assigning speed dial numbers 6263 copying 206 editing 206207 getting from address books 117, 208 removing 207 saving info for 5758 searching for 50, 206, 207 selecting 206 sending 138, 208 transferring to car kits 70 viewing information about 135, 142, 207 Contacts app 205208 Contacts list 207 Contacts picture mode 184, 186 context-sensitive menus 33, 34 continuous playback (slides) 235 cookies 155 copying addresses 318 applications 267 contacts 206 documents 231 items in folders 257 media files 182 phone numbers 51, 53, 160 pictures or videos 192 text 159160, 230 copyrighted items 191 corporate email passwords 91 corporate mail systems 101, 297, 323 corporate networks 292, 299 corporate servers 297, 323 coupling 328 coverage areas 12, 24, 47, 310 creating appointments 211 connections 297, 298 contacts 53, 115, 144, 205 documents 228, 229 email messages 111112 folders 233 meeting requests 129, 211 message templates 139 multimedia messages 136139 notes 206, 216, 218, 219, 247 passkeys 68, 176 playlists 199200 reminders 210, 214, 216, 217 tasks 215216 templates 230, 237 text messages 133135 untimed events 210 web favorites 158159 workbooks 235, 237 credentials 298, 321 cropping pictures 193 currency symbols 280 Custom domain option 106 customer assistance 13 customizing applications 281286 Calendar 214215 Contacts application 207 dates and time 290 email settings 121129 Excel Mobile 246 format settings 280 I N D E X 355 Internet Explorer Mobile 160162 Media Player Mobile 201 Notes application 220 Quick Menu 42 Remote Desktop Mobile 269 system settings 290295 system sounds 276 tasks 217218 Today screen 275 Wi-Fi settings 170173 Word Mobile 233 cutting. See deleting D daily schedules 209 data. See information data encryption 169 data formats 279 data service icons 311 data service providers 12, 43, 57, 322 data services 12, 311 See also accounts data transmissions 12 See also connections date format settings 280 dates 240, 280, 290 See also calendar Day View 209, 214 decimal places 280 decimal symbols 280 decompression utility 257 defined names
(spreadsheets) 242 delays 312 Delete All Calls command 60 Delete Call command 60 Deleted folder 124, 327 Deleted Items folder 119, 145 deleting applications 260, 327 attachments 138 certificates 292 contacts 207 documents 233 email 119, 123, 124, 127 email accounts 109 events 213 favorites 158 files 257, 327 items in folders 257 items in playlists 200 messages 145 notes 220, 249 partnerships 176, 313 pictures or videos 194 tasks 217 text 32, 50 text or multimedia messages 141 workbooks 246 worksheets 246 Desktop mode 156 desktop software 303, 329 See also applications;
software Device ID tab 88 device names 88, 332 devices See also Bluetooth devices; smartphone beaming to 262 configuring TTY/TDD 72 73 connecting headset 6667 discovering trusted 174, 177 synchronizing with multiple 88 transferring info from 303 troubleshooting 313 Devices tab 313 device-to-device connections 168 diagnostic information 292 356 I N D E X dial pad. See keypad dialing 4953 dialog boxes 330 digit grouping symbols 280 digital cameras 190 See also camera digital certificates 126, 155, 292 digital notebooks 246 See also OneNote Mobile digital signatures 125 dimmed images 309 Direct Push Technology 89 directory services 116117, 123, 207 Disable touchscreen option 287 Disconnect Bluetooth command 95 disconnecting from Wi-Fi networks 169 discovering trusted devices 174, 177 disk space 348 See also memory display formats 279 Display message on screen option 278 display names (email) 103, 106 display options (web) 156 display settings (screen) 278 displaying alternate characters 37 animated images 195 application menus 33, 34 appointments 43, 209, 210 calendar 208 contact info 135, 142, 207 current connection 297 events 210, 213 folder contents 256 memory usage 293 notifications 278 on-device help 13 PDF documents 249 pictures 190, 191, 248 power settings 294 service provider 43 space on expansion cards 267, 294 speed dial numbers 63 tasks 217, 218 unread messages 43, 48 videos 191 voicemail messages 54 web favorites 158 web pages 155, 156, 157 wireless settings 295 disposal information 2 document file types 227, 233 documentation 11, 13, 47 documents See also Word Mobile application creating 228, 229 deleting 233 finding and replacing text in 230 moving or copying text in 230 opening 229 renaming 233 saving 228, 229, 231, 233 setting margins for 232 spell-checking 232 documents list 233 Domain Enroll settings 299 Download messages option 127 Download size limit option 92, 125 Download Size Settings screen 128 I N D E X 357 downloading Adobe Flash Player 84 applications 257, 258 attachments 114115 email 24, 92, 113, 124, 126 files 125, 159 images 195 Media Player 81 multimedia messages 141 Palm information and updates 13 pictures 159 ringtones 70 software updates 296 videos 195 down-pointing arrows 34 drafts 112, 135 drawing 218 driving safety tips 340 drop-down lists cancelling selection in 35 closing 35 highlighting items in 29, 32, 35 scrolling through 30 selecting items in 34 drop-down menus 33 E EAP authentication 169 earpiece 328 echo 328 Edit senders message option 118 editing. See changing email adding attachments 112, 130, 257 adding contacts and 115, 205 adding signatures 120 conserving battery and 104 creating 111112 deleting 119, 123, 124, 127 dialing from 52 displaying unread messages 43 downloading 24, 92, 113, 124, 126 forwarding 119 getting attachments 114 115 getting from corporate servers 297, 323 internal memory and 327 opening attachments in 114 receiving 99, 112113 replying to 118, 122 saving 112 saving passwords for 103 searching 118, 255 sending 112, 130, 157 setting maximum size 128 setting priority 112 setting security options for 125 sorting 119 storing copies of 122 synchronizing 80, 113, 128 troubleshooting 321323 email accounts changing display names for 103, 106 changing settings for 109 deleting 109 selecting 110, 122 setting up 101109 troubleshooting 321 email addresses adding 111, 123, 205 highlighting 32 verifying 111, 116 358 I N D E X email applications 324 email client software 323 email providers 102, 104 email settings 121129 email shortcuts 120 emergency calls 52, 286 emoticons 137, 151 Empty Deleted Items command 119, 145 Enable Clear Type option 279 Enable local network time option 291 Enable Quick Menu option 42 EV icon 65 EVDO data connections 65 event categories 213 event icons 214 events adding reminders for 210, 214 creating 210, 211 deleting 213 displaying messages for 71 filtering 213 marking as sensitive 212 selecting sounds for 71, encryption 125, 155, 169, 278 268 Excel files 223 changing sync settings for 92 deleting email accounts on 109 finding contacts and 208 getting email from 112, 113 sending email over 102, 106, 116 sending meeting requests and 212 setting up accounts for 9092 synchronizing with 80, 86, 89, 92, 93 troubleshooting 320321, ending data connections 298 entry fields See also Excel Mobile;
spreadsheets 323 Exchangeable Image File deleting text in 32 highlighting text in 32 moving to 29 scrolling through 30 Erase all data? prompt 306 erasing. See deleting error messages 277, 320 Error Reporting icon 293 Error Reporting screen 292, 293 Excel Mobile application Formats 330 235246 Excel Mobile icon 237 Exchange ActiveSync 89, 323, 330 Exclusive Programs list 42 EXIF formats 330 expansion card slot 345 expansion cards Exchange Address Book 318 Exchange server credentials browsing on 267 displaying available space screen 321 Exchange servers changing email settings errors 182, 292, 310, 320 for 109 on 267, 294 encrypting 268 formatting 264 inserting 264 I N D E X 359 installing apps on 259 moving apps to 267 moving info to 245, 266 opening items on 265 organizing info and 327 organizing pictures and videos on 193 removing 265 renaming 268 searching on 255, 257 storing attachments on 114, 123 transferring files to 196, 199, 266, 267 external power sources 294 F factory defaults 202 factory-installed applications 260, 346 favorites 81, 137, 158159 See also web pages Favorites application 81 features (smartphone) 11, 13 Federal Trade Commission website 293 feedback 328 fields. See entry fields File Explorer 255, 256257, 267 File Explorer icon 256 file names 231, 255 file types documents 227, 233 media files 195 multimedia 136 pictures 190 ringtones 70 videos 191 files accessing from corporate accounts 297 attaching to messages 130, 134, 135, 136, 138 browsing 256 copying 182 decompressing 257 deleting 257, 327 downloading 125, 159 moving 233, 257 saving 266 searching for 255, 257 selecting multiple 257 transferring to expansion cards 196, 199, 266, 267 viewing information about 135, 142, 200 fill series (spreadsheets) 240 filtering Call History list 61 events 213 information 207, 243 recent calls list 59 tasks 217 finding contacts 50, 206, 207 email messages 118, 255 information 244 text 230, 251 firewalls 314, 317 first-letter capitalization 285 5-way navigator 29, 31, 327 Flash Player 84 flicker adjustment 189 flight mode 48 folder names 233 folders accessing Outlook 318 adding documents to 231 browsing 256, 267 creating 159, 233 moving items to 233, 245, 257 opening items in 257 organizing pictures and videos in 193 360 I N D E X organizing web favorites in freeing memory 260, 320, 158, 159 sorting contents 257 synchronizing mail 128 fonts 228, 231, 235, 279 forgetting passwords 288 format settings 280 formats losing 228 saving documents and 231 sending email and 125, 128 setting display 279 formatting charts 244 expansion cards 264 paragraphs and lists 232 spreadsheets 235, 241 242 system data 279 text 231, 247 text messages 138, 139 Formatting toolbar 232 forms (web pages) 157 formulas 236, 239, 246 forwarding messages 119, 142 327 Freeze Panes option 238 Full Screen mode 156 full-charge indicators 22 functions (spreadsheets) 236, 239 G games 260 gestures 284 Get WorldMate icon 163 Getting Started guide 11 Global Address List Lookup feature 255 Global Address Lists 89, 116117, 123, 207 Global Input Options 221 Gmail accounts 102 GPRS networks 57 GPS icon 64 graphics programs 193 H Hands Free check box 313 hands-free car kits 66, 67, 69 hands-free devices connecting to 6769 entering passkeys for 68 making phone calls and 69 purchasing 342 troubleshooting 313 turning Keyguard on or off for 287 turning on or off 69 hard resets 288, 305 hardware 11 headset button 66 headsets 6667, 69, 174, 287 hearing devices 335, 338 heat sources 24 help 13, 301 hiding calendar items 212 highlight 31 highlighting applications 39 email addresses 32 items in folders 257 menu items 33, 34 options in lists 29, 35 phone numbers 52 text 32, 231 web links 31, 157 Hint tab 288 hints (passwords) 288 History list 160 holding phone calls 58 home locations 290 I N D E X 361 home page (browser) 157, 160 Hotmail 102, 109, 146 hotspots 164 HSDPA networks 57 HTML formats 114, 118 hypertext links. See links I icons 63 See also specific type Identification tab 289 Ignore softkey 53 image files 136, 190, 327 images See also pictures dimmed 309 downloading 195 embedding 115 incorrect color settings and 325 setting background 193, 275 troubleshooting web page 324 IMAP email accounts 101, 102109 inactivity 294 Inbox 43, 104, 141 Inbox folders 113, 119 See also specific folder incoming mail server settings 107 incorrect passwords 288 indentation 232 indicator light 22, 47 information backing up 303, 305 changing 244 displaying 42 entering 3638, 79, 205 erasing all 314 filtering 207, 243 losing 228, 305 managing 253 moving 266 protecting 286288 removing battery and 306 restoring 305, 306 searching for 255256 sharing 261 sorting 243 storing 264, 327 transferring from previous devices 303 updating 79 infrared port. See IR port infrared transmissions 95, 330 Input icon 284 input options 36, 221, 284 Input screen 284, 285 inserting expansion cards 264 installation, troubleshooting 305, 326 installing applications 257260, 326, 327 sync software 80, 84 VPN clients 297, 298 instant messaging applications 146, 326 internal memory. See memory Internet 297, 312 See also web browsing Internet Connection Speed option 201 Internet email accounts 101, 106, 113 Internet Explorer Mobile browsing with 155160 closing 156 customizing 160162 installing from 258 scrolling in 30 starting 156 362 I N D E X unsupported elements for setting key combinations 324 for 281 Internet Service Providers. troubleshooting 327 See ISPs IP-based push updating 89 IR connections 263 IR port 95, 262, 330 ISP settings 297 ISPs (Internet Service Providers) 101, 297, 322 Items tab 275 J Java applets 155 Java applications 260 K keyboard accessing alternate characters on 38 dialing from 49, 50, 51 entering information from 3638, 285 locking 286, 287 looking up contacts on 50 resizing keys 284 scrolling with 30 selecting menu items with 33 sending email and 120 keyboard backlight 36, 295 keyboard icon 36 keyboard specifications 346 Keyguard 286, 287 Keyguard icon 287 keypad 51 Keypad softkey 51 keys (keyboard) 35, 281, 284 Known Caller option 70 L language settings 112 lanyards 18 leading zeros 280 LED light 22, 47 Legacy Pocket Word 228 Letter Recognizer 284 libraries (media) 197, 199 Library screen 201 lightning bolt 22 Li-Ion battery. See battery links creating 248 highlighting 31 playing media files and 199 saving 327 selecting 122, 157, 248 sending 157 troubleshooting 324 list separators 280 lists cancelling selection in 35 closing 35 creating 229, 232, 247 formatting 232 highlighting items in 29, 32, 35 scrolling through 30, 157 selecting items in 34 Lithium Ion battery. See battery Live Mail. See Windows Live Mail Live Messenger. See Windows Live Messenger Live Search 147 locating contacts 50, 206, 207 email messages 118, 255 information 244 location 290 location-specific formats 279, 290 Lock icon 156, 191, 288 I N D E X 363 locking smartphone screen 287 smartphone system 287 spreadsheet rows and columns 238 the keyboard 286, 287 logging in to corporate networks 292 corporate servers 297 Manage Folders command 113, 129 Manage tab 277 MAPI clients 323 maps 324 margins 232 Match case option 230, 244 Match entire cells option 244 Match whole words only looking up contacts 50, 206, option 230 207 lookup feature 255 losing connections 313 information 228, 305 passwords 288 smartphone 89, 289 low coverage areas 310 low light conditions 36 lowercase letters 36 M magnification. See zoom settings mail. See email mail servers 107, 323 Main tab 293 Manage existing connections option 297, 298 measurement units 280 media file types 195 media files adding to playlists 199 200 copying 182 playing 197198 storing 199 synchronizing 81, 181 183, 196197 transferring 196, 199 troubleshooting 319 Media Player 81, 319 Media Player library 197, 199 Media Player Mobile 81, 195202 medical devices 337 meeting invitations. See meeting requests meeting requests addressing 117 creating 129, 211 receiving 129 sending 211212, 215 memory displaying available 267 freeing 260, 320, 327 low conditions for 293 running apps and 265 storing numbers in 271 memory buttons 271 Memory icon 267, 293 Memory screen 293 memory usage 293 memos. See messages;
notes menu items 3334 Menu key 33 menus 33, 34 Menus icon 281 Menus screen 281 Message Detail command 135, 142 Message format option 125 Message Options screen 112 message preferences 145 146 364 I N D E X message templates 139 messages See also email, Messaging Options screen Microsoft Windows Mobile 109 website 303 messaging services 312, Microsoft Word documents. multimedia, and text messages dialing from 52 displaying notification 278 displaying unread 43, 48 formatting 138, 139 storing 327 viewing info about 135, 142 viewing voicemail 54 Messaging application See also text messages;
multimedia messages adding contacts and 205 receiving meeting requests and 129 330 microphone 56, 64, 328 microphone icon 283 microSD cards 264 Microsoft ActiveSync software. See ActiveSync desktop software;
Exchange ActiveSync Microsoft Exchange servers.See Exchange servers Microsoft Media Player. See Media Player; Media Player Mobile Microsoft Office Excel 236 See also spreadsheets See documents Missed call option 70 MMS messaging 133, 330 MMS video icon 187 MMS video mode 184 mobile accounts. See accounts Mobile Device component 330 mobile devices 262, 303 Mobile Favorites folder 81 mobile features 13 Mobile mode 156 mobile networks 310 mobile phone numbers 205 Mobile to Market certificates receiving messages and Microsoft Office files 223, 258 141, 142 225 sending email from 101, Microsoft Office Outlook. 111, 116, 121 See Outlook sending messages from Microsoft operating systems. 133, 136, 145 starting chat sessions and 143 messaging applications 326 Messaging icon 133 See Windows Vista;
Windows XP computers Microsoft Windows Mobile software 258 Modem tab 297 modems 173, 177 Month View 209 most recently dialed numbers list 52 moving document files 233, 257 files to expansion cards 196, 199, 266, 267 I N D E X 365 information 266 pictures or videos 192 text 230 workbooks 245 moving around the screen 2930 multi-line fields 30 multimedia file types 191 multimedia files 190, 327 multimedia messages checking for 63 creating 136139 deleting 141, 145 dialing from 52, 141 displaying 43, 48 forwarding 142 internal memory and 327 opening 141, 142 receiving 141 removing items from 138 replying to 140, 141, 142 selecting links in 144 sending 136, 140 setting preferences for 145146 sorting 145 troubleshooting 312 viewing status of 63 Multimedia Messaging System. See MMS messaging music 53, 179, 196, 277 See also media files;
playlists music files 181, 319 muting phone calls 56 My Device folder 256 My Device library 199 My Documents folder 182, 255, 305 My Music folder 181, 183 My Pictures folder 181, 183, 184, 187 My Playlists category 200 My Storage Card library 199 My Text phrases 111, 134 My Treo application 25 My Videos folder 181, 183 N names dialing by contact 5051 displaying service provider 43 finding contact 50, 206, 207 naming document files 231, 233 expansion cards 268 folders 233 templates 230, 237 workbooks 245 worksheets 241, 242 national emergency numbers 52 navigation features 29 navigator buttons 29, 31 negative numbers 280 network keys 169 network protocols 201 networks connecting to 166, 167 disconnecting from 169 logging in to 292 registering device for 299 troubleshooting 310314 New Sound command 277 note options 220 notebook 246 notes See also Notes application; OneNote Mobile adding 206, 216, 247 changing 248 creating 218, 219 deleting 220, 249 366 I N D E X renaming 220, 249 saving 220, 221 sorting 249 viewing 248 Notes application 218221 Notes icon 218 Notes list 220 Notes tab 289 notification options 278 notification screens. See notifications notifications creating events and 71 enabling or disabling 278 receiving information and 177 receiving messages and 140, 141, 146 receiving phone calls and 58 receiving voicemail 55 sending messages and 134 setting ringtones for 70 setting system sounds for 277 silencing sounds for 276 troubleshooting 313 Now Playing playlist 200 number format settings 280 number sign symbol 280 numbers See also phone numbers entering 36, 37 formatting 235, 240 pasting into Calculator 271 O Office files 223, 225 Office Outlook. See Outlook Office Word documents. See documents on-device components 17, 18 on-device help 13 OneNote files 223 OneNote Mobile 246249 online address books 116 117, 123, 207 online support 13, 25 online travel information 163 onscreen keypad 51 open networks 165, 166 opening ActiveSync 87 Adobe Reader 228 alternate characters list 38 application menus 33, 34 applications 39, 40, 265, 281 chat view 143 documents 229 email applications 324 email attachments 114 File Explorer 256 Inbox 43 items in folders 257 meeting invitations 130 multimedia messages 141, 142 Outlook folders 318 Quick Menu 43 Quick Tour 13, 43 sync software window 86 text messages 141 Today screen 42 web pages 155, 158, 160, 324 operating system (device) 308, 332, 345 operating systems (PCs) 83 Option key 30, 37, 40, 49 Option Lock icon 37 Option Lock mode 37 options displaying 213 highlighting 29, 31, 35 I N D E X 367 selecting 35, 97 Options tab 276, 285, 289 Organize Slides command 139 organizer features 48, 203 orientation (slides) 234 outages 312 outgoing mail server settings 107 Outlook accessing folders for 318 copying addresses to 318 receiving mail and 101, 113, 114, 124 synchronizing with 80, 89, 90, 118, 128 overdue tasks 217 owner information 343 Owner Information icon 289 Owner Information screen 289 P paired relationships. See partnerships pairing. See partnerships Palm online support 13 Palm OS applications 258 Palm OS devices 303 Panorama mode 184, 186 paragraph formatting 232 paragraph highlight feature 32 partial envelope icon 114 partially-charged battery icon 22 partnerships 173, 176, 313, 330 passkeys 68, 176 Password tab 288 Password type list 288 password types 52, 288 passwords entering 37, 91, 287, 288 forgetting or losing 288 locking device and 286, 288 saving 103, 105 setting up email accounts and 103, 105 spreadsheets and 236 storing on smartphone 91 PCs. See computers PDF files 114, 223, 249 performance 308, 326 Personal Address Book 318 personal computers. See computers personal events 212 personal information 287, 289, 329 personal information managers 318, 331 See also PIM applications personalizing device 273 phone See also phone calls;
phone numbers;
smartphone activating 20 answering 5354, 58, 73 customizing sounds for 71 dialing 4953 disabling touch-sensitive feature for 286 driving and 66, 340 getting started with 20 playing music and 53 redialing 51 running applications and 57 selecting ringtones for 70 sending text messages and 56 silencing ringer for 53 turning on or off 24, 47, 48, 53 368 I N D E X phone as modem feature phone headsets. See 173, 177 phone calls See also phone; phone numbers adding a second 58 adding notes about 56, 60 adjusting volume for 72, 342 ending 56 holding 58 making 20, 4953 muting 56 opening Today screen during 43 receiving 5354 rejecting 74 sending to voicemail 53, 58, 74 setting up conference 58 59 transferring to hands-free devices 69 troubleshooting 328 viewing info about 55, 59, 60, 61 viewing missed 48 viewing status of 6365 headsets phone number codes 50, 51 phone numbers See also phone; phone calls adding to contacts 74 assigning to speed dial 6263 copying and pasting 51, 53, 160 entering 4953 getting device 21 getting from address books 117, 208 highlighting 32 saving 5758 selecting 52 phone off indicators 63, 64 Phone Off message 47, 331 phone on indicators 63, 64 Phone screen 55, 56 phone settings 7075 Phone Settings screen 73 phone specifications 345 phone status icons 6365 Phone/Send button 49, 53 phone-off icon 47 photo albums 191 photos. See pictures pick lists. See drop-down lists piconets 331 picture file types 136 picture formats 185, 190 Picture Message command 136, 140, 145 Picture mode 186 picture playback settings 194 pictures adding as backgrounds 193, 275 adding to notes 248 adding web links to 157 changing resolution for 325 deleting 194 downloading 159 editing 193 organizing 192 previewing 325 renaming 194 sending 137, 191192 storing 184, 327 synchronizing 181183 taking 184187, 325 viewing 190, 191, 248 Pictures & Videos application 190195 I N D E X 369 Pictures & Videos icon 190 PIM applications 331 PIMs 318, 331 Play Slide Show command Power screen 294 PowerPoint files 223 PowerPoint Mobile application 234235 191 Play Sound list 291 Play Sound options 71 playback controls 198, 202 playback options 201 Playback screen 201 playing media files 197198 presentations 234, 235 ringtones 71 video clips 195 voice notes 219, 249 voicemail messages 54, 55 playlists 196, 197, 199200 plug-ins 155, 276 POP email accounts 101, 102109 pop-up menus 33, 34 port numbers 298 ports. See IR port; USB ports power accessories 336 Power button 48 Power icon 294 Power Save Mode 24 PowerPoint Mobile icon 234 preferences 273 See also customizing preinstalled applications 260, 346 presentation playback options 234235 presentations 234 See also PowerPoint Mobile Preview Mode (camera) 325 previewing pictures 325 ringtones 71 sounds 278 text messages 135 prioritizing email 112 tasks 216 text messages 140 private events 212 processor 345 Program Buttons tab 282 Program Files folder 267 programs. See applications;
software Prompt if device unused for option 288 protected spreadsheets 236 protecting information 286288 Treo device 286 proxy servers 298 punctuation marks 37 push technology 89 Q Quick Menu 40, 42, 43 Quick Tour 13, 43 QuickTime Player 195 R radio 48, 345 RAS connections 297 reassigning buttons 281282 Receiving Data message 263 recent calls list 59, 60, 63 rechargeable battery. See battery recording sounds 138, 277 videos 187188 voice notes 218, 221, 285 recording toolbar 219 370 I N D E X recurring appointments. See Remove Programs screen repeating appointments recycling 2 redialing phone 51 redirector (websites) 324 refreshing web pages 157, 324 Region tab 280 regional settings 279, 290 Regional Settings icon 279 Regional Settings screen 279 registering smartphone 25 regulatory information 333 reinstalling software or applications 303, 305 Reject call with text message option 75 reminders creating 210, 214, 216, 217 system alarms and 291 turning on and off 277 viewing 64 remote access servers 297 Remote Desktop Mobile 268270 remote files 269, 297 Remove Programs icon 260 Remove Programs list 261 260 removing See also deleting battery 305, 306 expansion cards 265 Quick Menu 42 Quick Tour 13, 43 renaming documents 233 expansion cards 268 items in folders 257 notes 220, 249 pictures or videos 194 workbooks 245 worksheets 242 repeating appointments 211 repeating sounds 71, 278 repeating tasks 216 replacing information 244 smartphone battery 306 307 text 230, 251 Request message delivery notification option 134 reset button 304 resets 288, 304306, 310 caution for 305 resizing keyboard keys 284 resolution (camera) 325 resolution (screen) 346 restarting smartphone. See resets restoring backups 306, 320 information 305, 306 sound settings 276 restoring factory defaults 202 reverse type 32 right-click menus. See shortcut menus Ring tone command 72 Ringer switch 53, 276 ringer volume 72 ringtone files 70, 136 ringtone managers 326 ringtones assigning to caller IDs 72 assigning to contacts 205 downloading 70 previewing 71 selecting 70 sending 138 roaming 64, 93, 319 Roaming option 71 rotating pictures 193, 194 running programs icon 40 I N D E X 371 S safety information 2, 334, 337, 342 Save as Template command 139 Save password option 91, 103, 105 Save to Contacts prompt 57 Save to Drafts command 112 Save to list 266 saving documents 228, 229, 231, 233 email messages 112 files 266 notes 220, 221, 285 passwords 103, 105 phone numbers 5758 web links 327 workbooks 235, 237, 246 Schedule command 93 Schedule screen 93 scheduled syncs, troubleshooting 319, 322 schedules. See calendar scheduling synchronization 9293 screen activating items on 32 adjusting brightness 278 adjusting display 278 aligning 280 caring for 17 changing color themes for 275, 281 screens, returning to previous 31 screensavers 195 scroll arrows 30 scroll bar 30 Scroll upon reaching the last conserving battery and 24 disabling touch-sensitivity line option 286 scrolling for 286 fitting web pages to 156 highlighting items on 29, device screen 2930, 286 spreadsheets 238 web pages 157 3132 locking 287 scrolling in 2930, 286 selecting items on 30, 32 setting backgrounds for 193, 275 troubleshooting 280, 309 turning on or off 47, 48, 294, 329 waking up 48, 56 screen fonts 279 Screen icon 279, 280 screen resolution 346 screen saver 48 screen specifications 346 Screen view 280 screen-locked icon 64 SD expansion cards 264 Search dialog box 255 Search for list 256 Search icon 255 search results list 256 Search softkey 256 searching contacts 50, 206, 207 documents 230 email messages 118, 255 PDF files 251 spreadsheets 244 web addresses 43 web pages 146, 155 searching for files 255, 257 searching for information 255256 searching for signal 24 372 I N D E X web links 157 Show Tasks entry bar option secure networks 165, 167 Secure Sockets Layer 331 secure websites 324 security browsing websites and 155, 168 creating passkeys and 69 downloading updates for 296 sensitivity settings 212, 216 Sent folder 122 servers, troubleshooting 320, 321, 323 service contracts 12 service providers 12, 43, 57, 322 See also accounts; ISPs protecting information and Set as Hands-Free command 286288, 292 313 sending email and 122, Set up my proxy server 126 security certificates 292 security software 286 Send Options command 140 sending appointments 215 copyrighted items 191 email 112, 130, 157 meeting requests 117, 211212, 215 multimedia messages 136, 140 pictures 191192 sounds 277 text messages 60, 61, 133 videos 191192 option 298 setting alarm clock 291 Settings menu 110 settings. See options sharing information 261 sheet list 238 See also worksheets Shift cells options 245 Shift key 36 Short Messaging Service. See SMS messaging shortcut menus 33, 34 Show half hour slots option 214 Show list 191 Show start and due dates option 218 218 Show week numbers option 214 Side button 17 signal, searching for 24 signal strength 63, 310, 328 signal-strength icon 47, 295 signatures 120, 121 Signatures screen 121 silencing system sounds 276 silencing the ringer 53 silent alarm 277, 278 Simple PIN passwords 52, 288 sketching 218 skins 201 slide show settings 195 slide show toolbar 191 slide shows 191, 234, 235 slide timing option 235 slider 30 slides 138, 139, 143, 234 smartphone caring for 339 charging 2123 freeing space on 260, 327 getting help with 13 I N D E X 373 getting phone number for downloading updates for 21 getting started with 12, 13, 33 locking 287 losing 89, 289 low light conditions and 36 moving around on 27 personalizing 273 registering 25 resetting 288, 304306, 310 setting up 15 storing 17, 18 troubleshoot tips for 301 unlocking 288 unpacking 11 updating info on 79 smartphone components 17, 18 smartphone features 11, 13 SMS messaging 133, 331 soft resets 304 softkeys 32 software See also applications accessing 12 caution for hard resets and 305 296 included with device 346 installing sync 80, 84 purchasing 308 reinstalling 303, 305 songs, selecting 198 See also music; playlists Sort By command 119 sort order 243 sorting applications 42 email 119 folder items 257 information 243 messages 145 notes 249 pictures or videos 193 tasks 217 sound clips 136 sound settings 71, 276, 277 sounds See also specific types changing alarm 291 customizing 276 previewing 278 recording 138, 277 repeating 71 sending 277 setting system 277 silencing 276 turning off event 278 Sounds & Notifications screen 70, 277 Sounds & Notifications Settings icon 277 Sounds tab 277 speaker 196 speakerphone 56, 328 speakerphone icon 63 special characters. See alternate characters;
symbols speech recognition software 342 speed dial 49, 6263 Speed Dial command 63 spell-checking 112, 134, 232 Sports mode 184, 186 spreadsheet templates 235, 237, 246 spreadsheet toolbar 238 spreadsheets See also Excel Mobile;
workbooks;
worksheets accessing 223 adding charts to 243, 244 374 I N D E X calculations in 238240 creating 235 customizing filters for 243 deleting elements in 245 display options for 237 238 entering data in 237, 240 formatting 235, 241242 insertion options for 240 scrolling 238 searching 244 sorting in 243 Sprite Backup application 89 SSL protocol 331 Start button 39 Start menu 39, 281 starting data connections 298 Excel Mobile 237 Internet Explorer Mobile 156 PowerPoint Mobile 234 Quick Tour 13 synchronization 86, 88 Word Mobile 229 stereo headphones 196 stopping playback 198 stopping synchronization 97 Storage Card folder 267 storage card symbol 257 Storage Card tab 294 storage cards. See expansion sync mode 86 sync options 79, 96 sync schedules, cards storage space 293, 320 storing applications 327 document files 229, 231, 233, 245 information 264, 327 media files 199 pictures 184 smartphone 17, 18 videos 187 workbooks 245 streaming 199, 331 Strong alphanumeric passwords 52, 288 stylus 29, 31 submenus 33 Suggest words when entering text option 285 support 13 symbols 37, 38, 239 sync applications 79, 87 sync conflicts 92 Sync dialing options 93 sync errors 182 sync icons 64 troubleshooting 319, 322 sync settings (Exchange servers) 92 sync software installing 80, 84 selecting links to 12 synchronizing info and 82 troubleshooting 303 sync software window 86 synchronization backing up info and 305 conserving battery and 24 defined 331 enabling wireless 80, 89 94, 95 getting started with 25, 79, 80 hard resets and 305, 306 initiating manual 93 initiating offline 318 initiating over Bluetooth devices 9495 overview 77, 79 scheduling 9293 sending meeting requests and 212 I N D E X 375 setting up multiple computers for 95 setting up multiple devices for 88 setting up smartphone and tapping 29, 32, 280, 284 tapping sounds 277 task categories 216, 217 Task Manager 41 tasks 12 starting 86, 88 stopping 97 transferring media files and 181183, 196 transferring Office files and 225227 troubleshooting 304, 314 321, 322, 323 updating date and time info and 290 system alarms 291 System Center Mobile Device Manager 299 system dates and time 290 system errors 310 system locks 286, 287 system requirements 83 system settings 290295 system sounds 276, 277 system warnings 277 T tabs 30 taking pictures 184187, 325 adding reminders to 216 completing 217 creating 215216 deleting 217 filtering and sorting 217 marking as sensitive 216 sending 138 setting due dates for 216 setting options for 217 218 setting reminders for 217 Tasks application 215218 Tasks entry bar 216, 218 Tasks icon 215 Tasks list 217 Tasks Over The Air (OTA) 89 Tasks tab (Connections) 297, 298 technical support 13 temperature display 164 templates documents 229, 233 messages 139 notes 219, 221 spreadsheets 235, 237, 246 Templates folder 229, 237 tentative appointments 210 text aligning 232 changing 230 copying 159160 creating documents and 228 deleting 32, 50 entering 36, 221, 285 finding and replacing 230, 251, 285 formatting 231, 247 highlighting 32, 231 moving or copying 230 resizing 279 spell-checking 112, 134, 232 text captions 137 text files 292 Text Layout command 139 text messages adding web links to 157 checking for 63 converting to multimedia 134 creating 133135 376 I N D E X deleting 141, 145 displaying 43, 48 forwarding 142 making phone calls and 52, 141 opening 141 previewing 135 receiving 133, 140, 313 replying to 140, 141, 142 selecting links in 144 sending 60, 61, 133 setting preferences for 145146 sorting 145 troubleshooting 312 text phrases 111, 134, 138 Text Size tab 279 themes 275, 281 third-party applications 5-way navigator and 29, 327 accessing Outlook folders and 318 caution for hard resets and 305 deleting 327 getting help with 327 installing 257, 258, 326, 327 previewing pictures and removing Quick Tour from 325 reinstalling 303, 305 synchronizing with 81, 305 13, 43 selecting running apps from 40 starting web searches troubleshooting 258, 308, from 155 326327 time. See clock time format settings 280 time stamps 188 time system settings 290 Time tab 290 time zones 290, 291 timer 186 tips 11 TKIP encryption 169 Today screen accessing 42 changing color themes for 281 connecting to Bluetooth devices from 175 customizing 193, 275 dialing from 49 recovering settings for 320 removing Quick Menu from 42 viewing info on 4243 viewing voicemail messages on 54 touchscreen. See screen touchscreen lockout 286, 287 touch-sensitive feature 286 transactions 324 transition effects (slides) 235 transmission delays 312 Transparency level list 193 travel information 163 troubleshooting 13, 301 trusted device list 174, 175 trusted devices 174, 177 See also partnerships trusted pairs. See trusted devices TTY icon 73 TTY options 73 TTY/TDD devices 7273 Turn Hands-free Off command 69 I N D E X 377 Turn Hands-free On command 69 turning on or off alarms 277, 291 event sounds 278 reminders 277 screen 294 Typing mode 220 U UMTS networks 57 unauthorized users 286, 292 unavailable time slots 212 Unknown Caller option 71 unlocking smartphone 288 spreadsheet rows and columns 238 unread messages 43, 48, 141 unretrieved voicemail 54 untimed events 210 Update Library command 199 Update Setup screen 296 updating information 79 uppercase letters 36, 285 URLs 122, 234 See also web links USB cable 22, 85, 88 USB controllers 317 USB hubs 85, 316 USB ports 85, 317 Use network time zone option 291 User Guide 12, 25 usernames 332 V vCal attachments 323 vCalendar attachments 134, 138, 215 vCard attachments 134, 138, 323 Vibrate when check boxes 71, 278 vibrating alarm 277, 278 video albums 191 video controls 188 video files 136, 191, 319 video icon 187 Video Message command 136, 140, 145 Video mode 184 videos adding web links to 157 deleting 194 downloading 195 organizing 192 playing 195 recording 187188 renaming 194 sending 137, 191192 setting options for 187, 201 setting resolution for 325 setting ringtones for 183 storing 187 synchronizing 181183 transferring to expansion cards 196 viewing 191 View All Calls command 60 viewing alternate characters 37 animated images 195 application menus 33, 34 appointments 43, 209, 210 calendar 208 contact info 135, 142, 207 current connection 297 events 210, 213 folder contents 256 memory usage 293 notifications 278 on-device help 13 PDF documents 249 pictures 190, 191, 248 378 I N D E X power settings 294 service provider 43 space on expansion cards 267, 294 speed dial numbers 63 tasks 217, 218 unread messages 43, 48 videos 191 voicemail messages 54 web favorites 158 web pages 155, 156, 157 wireless settings 295 virtual private networks. See VPN connections Vista operating systems. See Windows Vista computers voice calls 63 voice captions 138 Voice Command application 282284, 341 Voice Command button 284 Voice Command icon 283, 308 voice commands 24, 283, 308 Voice mail option 71 voice notes creating 218219, 221 playing 249 saving 285 web browsers 155, 162 Voice recording format list See also Internet Explorer 285 voice recording formats 285 voicemail checking for 63 listening to 5455 sending calls to 53, 58, 74 voicemail icon 54 voicemail notifications 55 Voicemail softkey 55 volume caution for 338 phone 72, 342 ringer 72 tapping sounds 277 VPN clients 314 VPN connections 113, 297 298 W waking up smartphone screen 48, 56 wallpaper 183 warnings 277 warranty 11 weak signals 310, 328 weather information 164 web addresses 43, 156, 324 See also web links Mobile web browsing getting started with 155, 157, 269 memory consumption and 327 secure sites and 155, 156, 324 troubleshooting 324 wireless connections and 153, 164 web favorites. See favorites web forms 157 web links creating 248 highlighting 31 saving 327 selecting 122, 157, 248 sending 157 troubleshooting 324 web navigation features 29 web pages accessing 324 adding to favorites 158 arranging on screen 156 clearing links to 327 copying from 159160 I N D E X 379 turning on or off 18, 24, opening sync application dialing from 52, 160 downloading items from streaming from 199 submitting transactions 159, 259 moving around in 157 opening 155, 158, 160 playing media files from 198 refreshing 157, 324 returning to recently viewed 160 scrolling 157 searching 146, 155 selecting addresses on 324 and 324 Week View 209, 214 WEP encryption 169 Wi-Fi button 165 Wi-Fi feature 165 viewing status of 43, 64 Wi-Fi networks 164170 Wi-Fi settings 170173 Windows Live Hotmail Inbox 149 sending email from 157 setting as home 157, 160 synchronizing favorites for 81 viewing 155, 156, 157 Windows Live Mail 147149 Windows Live Messenger 150151 Windows Live Search 147 Windows Live services 146, web-based email 102, 113, 192 146 websites See also web browsing;
web pages accessing 153, 164 connecting to 155 ending connections to 298 redirectors and 324 searching over 146, 155 Windows Mobile Device Center 79, 87, 314, 332 Windows Mobile devices 262, 303 Windows Mobile operating system 308, 332 Windows Mobile software 258 380 I N D E X See also built-in applications; software Windows Update application 296 Windows Vista computers enabling Bluetooth connections for 94 for 87 synchronizing with 84, 89, 183, 227 troubleshooting 314 Windows XP computers enabling Bluetooth connections for 94 opening ActiveSync for 87 synchronizing with 84, 88, 181, 225 troubleshooting 314, 317 viewing synchronized files for 182 wired headsets 66, 69 wireless connection icons 64 wireless connections browsing websites and 153, 164 conserving battery and 18 ending 169 synchronizing and. See wireless synchronization turning on 165 wireless features 295, 326 wireless service indicator 43 wireless service providers 12, 43, 57 wireless services 295 wireless synchronization 80, 8994, 95 Word application 223 See also documents Word Completion tab 285 word highlight feature 32 Word Mobile application 30, 227233 Word Mobile icon 229 word-processing features 228 workbook list 246 workbooks displaying 237238 moving around in 238 naming 245 organizing 245 replacing information in 244 saving 235, 237, 246 searching 244 setting default template for 246 worksheet names 236 worksheets See also spreadsheets;
workbooks adding 241 adjusting column and row size for 242 changing order of 241 deleting 246 entering defined names in 242 entering formulas in 239, See also Excel Mobile 246 application;
spreadsheets creating 235, 237 deleting 246 entering functions in 239 filtering data in 243 formatting options for 241242 inserting cells, rows, and columns 240 moving between 238 naming 241 removing cells, rows, and columns 245 renaming 242 WorldMate 163164 WPA networks 168 Writing mode 220 Y Yahoo email accounts 102 Year View 209 Z ZIP files 257 zoom settings documents 229 PDF files 251 pictures 186, 248 presentations 234 smartphone screen 285 spreadsheets 236, 238 videos 188 web pages 157 I N D E X 381 382 I N D E X Palm, Inc. 950 W. Maude Ave. Sunnyvale, CA 94085-2801 United States of America
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2009-01-08 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
2 | 1851.25 ~ 1908.75 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2009-01-08
|
||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Palm Inc
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0007381593
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
950 West Maude Ave
|
||||
1 2 |
Sunnyvale, CA
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
O8F
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
SKYC
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
H**** Z******
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
Sr. Regulatory Compliance Engineer
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
(408)********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
(408)********
|
||||
1 2 |
h******@palm.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Palm, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
H**** Z********
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
950 West Maude Ave
|
||||
1 2 |
950 West Maude Avenue
|
|||||
1 2 |
Sunnyvale, California 94085
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
(408)********
|
||||
1 2 |
h******@palm.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 04/16/2009 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
1 2 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | |||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Smart Phone | ||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | Output power is conducted. Collocated transmitter operating configurations have been evaluated as described in this filing; other collocation configurations require separate evaluation. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations is limited to the specific configurations tested for this filing; body-worn operations are restricted to belt-clips, holsters or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and must provide at least 1.5 cm separation between the device and the user's body. End users must be informed of the body worn requirements for satisfying RF Exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values for single- and co-transmit configurations under this FCC ID: Part 15 head 0.35 W/kg, body 0.15 W/kg; Part 22: head 1.37 W/kg, body 0.76 W/kg; Part 24: head 1.4 W/kg, body 1.29 W/kg. | ||||
1 2 | Output power is ERP for Part 22 and EIRP for Part 24. Collocated transmitter operating configurations have been evaluated as described in this filing; other collocation configurations require separate evaluation. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations is limited to the specific configurations tested for this filing; body-worn operations are restricted to belt-clips, holsters or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and must provide at least 1.5 cm separation between the device and the user's body. End users must be informed of the body worn requirements for satisfying RF Exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values for single- and co-transmit configurations under this FCC ID: Part 15 head 0.35 W/kg, body 0.15 W/kg; Part 22: head 1.37 W/kg, body 0.76 W/kg; Part 24: head 1.4 W/kg, body 1.29 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Sporton International Inc
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
K**** L********
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
886-2******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
886-2********
|
||||
1 2 |
k******@sporton.com.tw
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | 2412 | 2462 | 0.141 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15C | 2402 | 2480 | 0.00136 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 22H | HC | 824.7 | 848.31 | 0.16 | 2.5 ppm | 1M28F9W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 24E | 1851.25 | 1908.75 | 0.28 | 2.5 ppm | 1M28F9W |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC